diff options
| author | Daniel Baumann <daniel.baumann@progress-linux.org> | 2024-06-17 10:51:52 +0000 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Daniel Baumann <daniel.baumann@progress-linux.org> | 2024-06-17 10:51:52 +0000 |
| commit | 4ad94864781f48b1a4b77f9cfb934622bf756ba1 (patch) | |
| tree | 3900955c1886e6d2570fea7125ee1f01bafe876d /upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8 | |
| parent | Adding upstream version 4.22.0. (diff) | |
| download | manpages-l10n-4ad94864781f48b1a4b77f9cfb934622bf756ba1.tar.xz manpages-l10n-4ad94864781f48b1a4b77f9cfb934622bf756ba1.zip | |
Adding upstream version 4.23.0.upstream/4.23.0
Signed-off-by: Daniel Baumann <daniel.baumann@progress-linux.org>
Diffstat (limited to 'upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8')
133 files changed, 1369 insertions, 11955 deletions
diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/addpart.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/addpart.8 deleted file mode 100644 index e389db67..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/addpart.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,75 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: addpart -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "ADDPART" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -addpart \- tell the kernel about the existence of a partition -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBaddpart\fP \fIdevice partition start length\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBaddpart\fP tells the Linux kernel about the existence of the specified partition. The command is a simple wrapper around the "add partition" ioctl. -.sp -This command doesn\(cqt manipulate partitions on a block device. -.SH "PARAMETERS" -.sp -\fIdevice\fP -.RS 4 -The disk device. -.RE -.sp -\fIpartition\fP -.RS 4 -The partition number. -.RE -.sp -\fIstart\fP -.RS 4 -The beginning of the partition (in 512\-byte sectors). -.RE -.sp -\fIlength\fP -.RS 4 -The length of the partition (in 512\-byte sectors). -.RE -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBdelpart\fP(8), -\fBfdisk\fP(8), -\fBparted\fP(8), -\fBpartprobe\fP(8), -\fBpartx\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBaddpart\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/agetty.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/agetty.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 220d01ee..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/agetty.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,593 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: agetty -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "AGETTY" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -agetty \- alternative Linux getty -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBagetty\fP [options] \fIport\fP [\fIbaud_rate\fP...] [\fIterm\fP] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBagetty\fP opens a tty port, prompts for a login name and invokes the /bin/login command. It is normally invoked by \fBinit\fP(8). -.sp -\fBagetty\fP has several \fInon\-standard\fP features that are useful for hardwired and for dial\-in lines: -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Adapts the tty settings to parity bits and to erase, kill, end\-of\-line and uppercase characters when it reads a login name. The program can handle 7\-bit characters with even, odd, none or space parity, and 8\-bit characters with no parity. The following special characters are recognized: Control\-U (kill); DEL and backspace (erase); carriage return and line feed (end of line). See also the \fB\-\-erase\-chars\fP and \fB\-\-kill\-chars\fP options. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Optionally deduces the baud rate from the CONNECT messages produced by Hayes(tm)\-compatible modems. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Optionally does not hang up when it is given an already opened line (useful for call\-back applications). -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Optionally does not display the contents of the \fI/etc/issue\fP file. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Optionally displays an alternative issue files or directories instead of \fI/etc/issue\fP or \fI/etc/issue.d\fP. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Optionally does not ask for a login name. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Optionally invokes a non\-standard login program instead of \fI/bin/login\fP. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Optionally turns on hardware flow control. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Optionally forces the line to be local with no need for carrier detect. -.RE -.sp -This program does not use the \fI/etc/gettydefs\fP (System V) or \fI/etc/gettytab\fP (SunOS 4) files. -.SH "ARGUMENTS" -.sp -\fIport\fP -.RS 4 -A path name relative to the \fI/dev\fP directory. If a "\-" is specified, \fBagetty\fP assumes that its standard input is already connected to a tty port and that a connection to a remote user has already been established. -.sp -Under System V, a "\-" \fIport\fP argument should be preceded by a "\-\-". -.RE -.sp -\fIbaud_rate\fP,... -.RS 4 -A comma\-separated list of one or more baud rates. Each time \fBagetty\fP receives a BREAK character it advances through the list, which is treated as if it were circular. -.sp -Baud rates should be specified in descending order, so that the null character (Ctrl\-@) can also be used for baud\-rate switching. -.sp -This argument is optional and unnecessary for \fBvirtual terminals\fP. -.sp -The default for \fBserial terminals\fP is keep the current baud rate (see \fB\-\-keep\-baud\fP) and if unsuccessful then default to \(aq9600\(aq. -.RE -.sp -\fIterm\fP -.RS 4 -The value to be used for the \fBTERM\fP environment variable. This overrides whatever \fBinit\fP(1) may have set, and is inherited by login and the shell. -.sp -The default is \(aqvt100\(aq, or \(aqlinux\(aq for Linux on a virtual terminal, or \(aqhurd\(aq for GNU Hurd on a virtual terminal. -.RE -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-8\fP, \fB\-\-8bits\fP -.RS 4 -Assume that the tty is 8\-bit clean, hence disable parity detection. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-autologin\fP \fIusername\fP -.RS 4 -Automatically log in the specified user without asking for a username or password. Using this option causes an \fB\-f\fP \fIusername\fP option and argument to be added to the \fB/bin/login\fP command line. See \fB\-\-login\-options\fP, which can be used to modify this option\(cqs behavior. -.sp -Note that \fB\-\-autologin\fP may affect the way in which \fBgetty\fP initializes the serial line, because on auto\-login \fBagetty\fP does not read from the line and it has no opportunity optimize the line setting. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-noreset\fP -.RS 4 -Do not reset terminal cflags (control modes). See \fBtermios\fP(3) for more details. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-E\fP, \fB\-\-remote\fP -.RS 4 -Typically the \fBlogin\fP(1) command is given a remote hostname when called by something such as \fBtelnetd\fP(8). This option allows \fBagetty\fP to pass what it is using for a hostname to \fBlogin\fP(1) for use in \fButmp\fP(5). See \fB\-\-host\fP, \fBlogin\fP(1), and \fButmp\fP(5). -.sp -If the \fB\-\-host\fP \fIfakehost\fP option is given, then an \fB\-h\fP \fIfakehost\fP option and argument are added to the \fI/bin/login\fP command line. -.sp -If the \fB\-\-nohostname\fP option is given, then an \fB\-H\fP option is added to the \fB/bin/login\fP command line. -.sp -See \fB\-\-login\-options\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-issue\-file\fP \fIpath\fP -.RS 4 -Specifies a ":" delimited list of files and directories to be displayed instead of \fI/etc/issue\fP (or other). All specified files and directories are displayed, missing or empty files are silently ignored. If the specified path is a directory then display all files with .issue file extension in version\-sort order from the directory. This allows custom messages to be displayed on different terminals. The \fB\-\-noissue\fP option will override this option. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-show\-issue\fP -.RS 4 -Display the current issue file (or other) on the current terminal and exit. Use this option to review the current setting, it is not designed for any other purpose. Note that output may use some default or incomplete information as proper output depends on terminal and agetty command line. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h, \-\-flow\-control\fP -.RS 4 -Enable hardware (RTS/CTS) flow control. It is left up to the application to disable software (XON/XOFF) flow protocol where appropriate. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-H\fP, \fB\-\-host\fP \fIfakehost\fP -.RS 4 -Write the specified \fIfakehost\fP into the utmp file. Normally, no login host is given, since \fBagetty\fP is used for local hardwired connections and consoles. However, this option can be useful for identifying terminal concentrators and the like. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-i\fP, \fB\-\-noissue\fP -.RS 4 -Do not display the contents of \fI/etc/issue\fP (or other) before writing the login prompt. Terminals or communications hardware may become confused when receiving lots of text at the wrong baud rate; dial\-up scripts may fail if the login prompt is preceded by too much text. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-I\fP, \fB\-\-init\-string\fP \fIinitstring\fP -.RS 4 -Set an initial string to be sent to the tty or modem before sending anything else. This may be used to initialize a modem. Non\-printable characters may be sent by writing their octal code preceded by a backslash (\(rs). For example, to send a linefeed character (ASCII 10, octal 012), write \(rs12. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-J\fP, \fB\-\-noclear\fP -.RS 4 -Do not clear the screen before prompting for the login name. By default the screen is cleared. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-login\-program\fP \fIlogin_program\fP -.RS 4 -Invoke the specified \fIlogin_program\fP instead of /bin/login. This allows the use of a non\-standard login program. Such a program could, for example, ask for a dial\-up password or use a different password file. See \fB\-\-login\-options\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-L\fP, \fB\-\-local\-line\fP[=\fImode\fP] -.RS 4 -Control the CLOCAL line flag. The optional \fImode\fP argument is \(aqauto\(aq, \(aqalways\(aq or \(aqnever\(aq. If the \fImode\fP argument is omitted, then the default is \(aqalways\(aq. If the \fB\-\-local\-line\fP option is not given at all, then the default is \(aqauto\(aq. -.sp -\fIalways\fP -.RS 4 -Forces the line to be a local line with no need for carrier detect. This can be useful when you have a locally attached terminal where the serial line does not set the carrier\-detect signal. -.RE -.sp -\fInever\fP -.RS 4 -Explicitly clears the CLOCAL flag from the line setting and the carrier\-detect signal is expected on the line. -.RE -.sp -\fIauto\fP -.RS 4 -The \fBagetty\fP default. Does not modify the CLOCAL setting and follows the setting enabled by the kernel. -.RE -.RE -.sp -\fB\-m\fP, \fB\-\-extract\-baud\fP -.RS 4 -Try to extract the baud rate from the CONNECT status message produced by Hayes(tm)\-compatible modems. These status messages are of the form: "<junk><speed><junk>". \fBagetty\fP assumes that the modem emits its status message at the same speed as specified with (the first) \fIbaud_rate\fP value on the command line. -.sp -Since the \fB\-\-extract\-baud\fP feature may fail on heavily\-loaded systems, you still should enable BREAK processing by enumerating all expected baud rates on the command line. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-list\-speeds\fP -.RS 4 -Display supported baud rates. These are determined at compilation time. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-skip\-login\fP -.RS 4 -Do not prompt the user for a login name. This can be used in connection with the \fB\-\-login\-program\fP option to invoke a non\-standard login process such as a BBS system. Note that with the \fB\-\-skip\-login\fP option, \fBagetty\fP gets no input from the user who logs in and therefore will not be able to figure out parity, character size, and newline processing of the connection. It defaults to space parity, 7 bit characters, and ASCII CR (13) end\-of\-line character. Beware that the program that \fBagetty\fP starts (usually /bin/login) is run as root. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-N\fP, \fB\-\-nonewline\fP -.RS 4 -Do not print a newline before writing out \fI/etc/issue\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-login\-options\fP \fIlogin_options\fP -.RS 4 -Options and arguments that are passed to \fBlogin\fP(1). Where \(rsu is replaced by the login name. For example: -.sp -\fB\-\-login\-options \(aq\-h darkstar \(em \(rsu\(aq\fP -.sp -See \fB\-\-autologin\fP, \fB\-\-login\-program\fP and \fB\-\-remote\fP. -.sp -Please read the SECURITY NOTICE below before using this option. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-login\-pause\fP -.RS 4 -Wait for any key before dropping to the login prompt. Can be combined with \fB\-\-autologin\fP to save memory by lazily spawning shells. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-chroot\fP \fIdirectory\fP -.RS 4 -Change root to the specified directory. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-R\fP, \fB\-\-hangup\fP -.RS 4 -Call \fBvhangup\fP(2) to do a virtual hangup of the specified terminal. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-keep\-baud\fP -.RS 4 -Try to keep the existing baud rate. The baud rates from the command line are used when \fBagetty\fP receives a BREAK character. If another baud rates specified then the original baud rate is also saved to the end of the wanted baud rates list. This can be used to return to the original baud rate after unexpected BREAKs. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-timeout\fP \fItimeout\fP -.RS 4 -Terminate if no user name could be read within \fItimeout\fP seconds. Use of this option with hardwired terminal lines is not recommended. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-U\fP, \fB\-\-detect\-case\fP -.RS 4 -Turn on support for detecting an uppercase\-only terminal. This setting will detect a login name containing only capitals as indicating an uppercase\-only terminal and turn on some upper\-to\-lower case conversions. Note that this has no support for any Unicode characters. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-w\fP, \fB\-\-wait\-cr\fP -.RS 4 -Wait for the user or the modem to send a carriage\-return or a linefeed character before sending the \fI/etc/issue\fP file (or others) and the login prompt. This is useful with the \fB\-\-init\-string\fP option. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-nohints\fP -.RS 4 -Do not print hints about Num, Caps and Scroll Locks. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-nohostname\fP -.RS 4 -By default the hostname will be printed. With this option enabled, no hostname at all will be shown. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-long\-hostname\fP -.RS 4 -By default the hostname is only printed until the first dot. With this option enabled, the fully qualified hostname by \fBgethostname\fP(3P) or (if not found) by \fBgetaddrinfo\fP(3) is shown. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-erase\-chars\fP \fIstring\fP -.RS 4 -This option specifies additional characters that should be interpreted as a backspace ("ignore the previous character") when the user types the login name. The default additional \(aqerase\(aq has been \(aq#\(aq, but since util\-linux 2.23 no additional erase characters are enabled by default. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-kill\-chars\fP \fIstring\fP -.RS 4 -This option specifies additional characters that should be interpreted as a kill ("ignore all previous characters") when the user types the login name. The default additional \(aqkill\(aq has been \(aq@\(aq, but since util\-linux 2.23 no additional kill characters are enabled by default. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-chdir\fP \fIdirectory\fP -.RS 4 -Change directory before the login. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-delay\fP \fInumber\fP -.RS 4 -Sleep seconds before open tty. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-nice\fP \fInumber\fP -.RS 4 -Run login with this priority. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-reload\fP -.RS 4 -Ask all running agetty instances to reload and update their displayed prompts, if the user has not yet commenced logging in. After doing so the command will exit. This feature might be unsupported on systems without Linux \fBinotify\fP(7). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "EXAMPLE" -.sp -This section shows examples for the process field of an entry in the \fI/etc/inittab\fP file. You\(cqll have to prepend appropriate values for the other fields. See \fBinittab\fP(5) for more details. -.sp -For a hardwired line or a console tty: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fB/sbin/agetty 9600 ttyS1\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -For a directly connected terminal without proper carrier\-detect wiring (try this if your terminal just sleeps instead of giving you a password: prompt): -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fB/sbin/agetty \-\-local\-line 9600 ttyS1 vt100\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -For an old\-style dial\-in line with a 9600/2400/1200 baud modem: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fB/sbin/agetty \-\-extract\-baud \-\-timeout 60 ttyS1 9600,2400,1200\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -For a Hayes modem with a fixed 115200 bps interface to the machine (the example init string turns off modem echo and result codes, makes modem/computer DCD track modem/modem DCD, makes a DTR drop cause a disconnection, and turns on auto\-answer after 1 ring): -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fB/sbin/agetty \-\-wait\-cr \-\-init\-string \(aqATE0Q1&D2&C1S0=1\(rs015\(aq 115200 ttyS1\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.SH "SECURITY NOTICE" -.sp -If you use the \fB\-\-login\-program\fP and \fB\-\-login\-options\fP options, be aware that a malicious user may try to enter lognames with embedded options, which then get passed to the used login program. Agetty does check for a leading "\-" and makes sure the logname gets passed as one parameter (so embedded spaces will not create yet another parameter), but depending on how the login binary parses the command line that might not be sufficient. Check that the used login program cannot be abused this way. -.sp -Some programs use "\-\-" to indicate that the rest of the command line should not be interpreted as options. Use this feature if available by passing "\-\-" before the username gets passed by \(rsu. -.SH "ISSUE FILES" -.sp -The default issue file is \fI/etc/issue\fP. If the file exists, then \fBagetty\fP also checks for \fI/etc/issue.d\fP directory. The directory is optional extension to the default issue file and content of the directory is printed after \fI/etc/issue\fP content. If the \fI/etc/issue\fP does not exist, then the directory is ignored. All files \fBwith .issue extension\fP from the directory are printed in version\-sort order. The directory can be used to maintain 3rd\-party messages independently on the primary system \fI/etc/issue\fP file. -.sp -Since version 2.35 additional locations for issue file and directory are supported. If the default \fI/etc/issue\fP does not exist, then \fBagetty\fP checks for \fI/run/issue\fP and \fI/run/issue.d\fP, thereafter for \fI/usr/lib/issue\fP and \fI/usr/lib/issue.d\fP. The directory \fI/etc\fP is expected for host specific configuration, \fI/run\fP is expected for generated stuff and \fI/usr/lib\fP for static distribution maintained configuration. -.sp -The default path maybe overridden by \fB\-\-issue\-file\fP option. In this case specified path has to be file or directory and all the default issue file and directory locations are ignored. -.sp -The issue file feature can be completely disabled by \fB\-\-noissue\fP option. -.sp -It is possible to review the current issue file by \fBagetty \-\-show\-issue\fP on the current terminal. -.sp -The issue files may contain certain escape codes to display the system name, date, time et cetera. All escape codes consist of a backslash (\(rs) immediately followed by one of the characters listed below. -.sp -4 or 4{\fIinterface\fP} -.RS 4 -Insert the IPv4 address of the specified network interface (for example: \(rs4{eth0}). If the \fIinterface\fP argument is not specified, then select the first fully configured (UP, non\-LOCALBACK, RUNNING) interface. If not any configured interface is found, fall back to the IP address of the machine\(cqs hostname. -.RE -.sp -6 or 6{\fIinterface\fP} -.RS 4 -The same as \(rs4 but for IPv6. -.RE -.sp -b -.RS 4 -Insert the baudrate of the current line. -.RE -.sp -d -.RS 4 -Insert the current date. -.RE -.sp -e or e{\fIname\fP} -.RS 4 -Translate the human\-readable \fIname\fP to an escape sequence and insert it (for example: \(rse{red}Alert text.\(rse{reset}). If the \fIname\fP argument is not specified, then insert \(rs033. The currently supported names are: black, blink, blue, bold, brown, cyan, darkgray, gray, green, halfbright, lightblue, lightcyan, lightgray, lightgreen, lightmagenta, lightred, magenta, red, reset, reverse, yellow and white. All unknown names are silently ignored. -.RE -.sp -s -.RS 4 -Insert the system name (the name of the operating system). Same as \(aquname \-s\(aq. See also the \(rsS escape code. -.RE -.sp -S or S{VARIABLE} -.RS 4 -Insert the VARIABLE data from \fI/etc/os\-release\fP. If this file does not exist then fall back to \fI/usr/lib/os\-release\fP. If the VARIABLE argument is not specified, then use PRETTY_NAME from the file or the system name (see \(rss). This escape code can be used to keep \fI/etc/issue\fP distribution and release independent. Note that \(rsS{ANSI_COLOR} is converted to the real terminal escape sequence. -.RE -.sp -l -.RS 4 -Insert the name of the current tty line. -.RE -.sp -m -.RS 4 -Insert the architecture identifier of the machine. Same as \fBuname \-m\fP. -.RE -.sp -n -.RS 4 -Insert the nodename of the machine, also known as the hostname. Same as \fBuname \-n\fP. -.RE -.sp -o -.RS 4 -Insert the NIS domainname of the machine. Same as \fBhostname \-d\fP. -.RE -.sp -O -.RS 4 -Insert the DNS domainname of the machine. -.RE -.sp -r -.RS 4 -Insert the release number of the OS. Same as \fBuname \-r\fP. -.RE -.sp -t -.RS 4 -Insert the current time. -.RE -.sp -u -.RS 4 -Insert the number of current users logged in. -.RE -.sp -U -.RS 4 -Insert the string "1 user" or "<n> users" where <n> is the number of current users logged in. -.RE -.sp -v -.RS 4 -Insert the version of the OS, that is, the build\-date and such. -.RE -.sp -An example. On my system, the following \fI/etc/issue\fP file: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -This is \(rsn.\(rso (\(rss \(rsm \(rsr) \(rst -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -displays as: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -This is thingol.orcan.dk (Linux i386 1.1.9) 18:29:30 -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.SH "FILES" -.sp -\fI/var/run/utmp\fP -.RS 4 -the system status file. -.RE -.sp -\fI/etc/issue\fP -.RS 4 -printed before the login prompt. -.RE -.sp -\fI/etc/os\-release /usr/lib/os\-release\fP -.RS 4 -operating system identification data. -.RE -.sp -\fI/dev/console\fP -.RS 4 -problem reports (if \fBsyslog\fP(3) is not used). -.RE -.sp -\fI/etc/inittab\fP -.RS 4 -\fBinit\fP(8) configuration file for SysV\-style init daemon. -.RE -.SH "BUGS" -.sp -The baud\-rate detection feature (the \fB\-\-extract\-baud\fP option) requires that \fBagetty\fP be scheduled soon enough after completion of a dial\-in call (within 30 ms with modems that talk at 2400 baud). For robustness, always use the \fB\-\-extract\-baud\fP option in combination with a multiple baud rate command\-line argument, so that BREAK processing is enabled. -.sp -The text in the \fI/etc/issue\fP file (or other) and the login prompt are always output with 7\-bit characters and space parity. -.sp -The baud\-rate detection feature (the \fB\-\-extract\-baud\fP option) requires that the modem emits its status message \fIafter\fP raising the DCD line. -.SH "DIAGNOSTICS" -.sp -Depending on how the program was configured, all diagnostics are written to the console device or reported via the \fBsyslog\fP(3) facility. Error messages are produced if the \fIport\fP argument does not specify a terminal device; if there is no utmp entry for the current process (System V only); and so on. -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "werner\(atsuse.de" "Werner Fink" "," -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.sp -The original \fBagetty\fP for serial terminals was written by \c -.MTO "wietse\(atwzv.win.tue.nl" "W.Z. Venema" "" -and ported to Linux by -.MTO "poe\(atdaimi.aau.dk" "Peter Orbaek" "." -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBagetty\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/blkdiscard.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/blkdiscard.8 deleted file mode 100644 index a8048510..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/blkdiscard.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,105 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: blkdiscard -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "BLKDISCARD" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -blkdiscard \- discard sectors on a device -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBblkdiscard\fP [options] [\fB\-o\fP \fIoffset\fP] [\fB\-l\fP \fIlength\fP] \fIdevice\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBblkdiscard\fP is used to discard device sectors. This is useful for solid\-state drivers (SSDs) and thinly\-provisioned storage. Unlike \fBfstrim\fP(8), this command is used directly on the block device. -.sp -By default, \fBblkdiscard\fP will discard all blocks on the device. Options may be used to modify this behavior based on range or size, as explained below. -.sp -The \fIdevice\fP argument is the pathname of the block device. -.sp -\fBWARNING: All data in the discarded region on the device will be lost!\fP -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -The \fIoffset\fP and \fIlength\fP arguments may be followed by the multiplicative suffixes KiB (=1024), MiB (=1024*1024), and so on for GiB, TiB, PiB, EiB, ZiB and YiB (the "iB" is optional, e.g., "K" has the same meaning as "KiB") or the suffixes KB (=1000), MB (=1000*1000), and so on for GB, TB, PB, EB, ZB and YB. -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-force\fP -.RS 4 -Disable all checking. Since v2.36 the block device is open in exclusive mode (O_EXCL) by default to avoid collision with mounted filesystem or another kernel subsystem. The \fB\-\-force\fP option disables the exclusive access mode. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-offset\fP \fIoffset\fP -.RS 4 -Byte offset into the device from which to start discarding. The provided value must be aligned to the device sector size. The default value is zero. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-length\fP \fIlength\fP -.RS 4 -The number of bytes to discard (counting from the starting point). The provided value must be aligned to the device sector size. If the specified value extends past the end of the device, \fBblkdiscard\fP will stop at the device size boundary. The default value extends to the end of the device. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-step\fP \fIlength\fP -.RS 4 -The number of bytes to discard within one iteration. The default is to discard all by one ioctl call. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-secure\fP -.RS 4 -Perform a secure discard. A secure discard is the same as a regular discard except that all copies of the discarded blocks that were possibly created by garbage collection must also be erased. This requires support from the device. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-z\fP, \fB\-\-zeroout\fP -.RS 4 -Zero\-fill rather than discard. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Display the aligned values of \fIoffset\fP and \fIlength\fP. If the \fB\-\-step\fP option is specified, it prints the discard progress every second. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "lczerner\(atredhat.com" "Lukas Czerner" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBfstrim\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBblkdiscard\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/blkid.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/blkid.8 deleted file mode 100644 index c42992a2..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/blkid.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,270 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: blkid -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "BLKID" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -blkid \- locate/print block device attributes -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBblkid\fP \fB\-\-label\fP \fIlabel\fP | \fB\-\-uuid\fP \fIuuid\fP -.sp -\fBblkid\fP [\fB\-\-no\-encoding\fP \fB\-\-garbage\-collect\fP \fB\-\-list\-one\fP \fB\-\-cache\-file\fP \fIfile\fP] [\fB\-\-output\fP \fIformat\fP] [\fB\-\-match\-tag\fP \fItag\fP] [\fB\-\-match\-token\fP \fINAME=value\fP] [\fIdevice\fP...] -.sp -\fBblkid\fP \fB\-\-probe\fP [\fB\-\-offset\fP \fIoffset\fP] [\fB\-\-output\fP \fIformat\fP] [\fB\-\-size\fP \fIsize\fP] [\fB\-\-match\-tag\fP \fItag\fP] [\fB\-\-match\-types\fP \fIlist\fP] [\fB\-\-usages\fP \fIlist\fP] [\fB\-\-no\-part\-details\fP] \fIdevice\fP... -.sp -\fBblkid\fP \fB\-\-info\fP [\fB\-\-output format\fP] [\fB\-\-match\-tag\fP \fItag\fP] \fIdevice\fP... -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -The \fBblkid\fP program is the command\-line interface to working with the \fBlibblkid\fP(3) library. It can determine the type of content (e.g., filesystem or swap) that a block device holds, and also the attributes (tokens, NAME=value pairs) from the content metadata (e.g., LABEL or UUID fields). -.sp -\fBIt is recommended to use\fP \fBlsblk\fP(8) \fBcommand to get information about block devices, or lsblk \-\-fs to get an overview of filesystems, or\fP \fBfindmnt\fP(8) \fBto search in already mounted filesystems.\fP -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBlsblk\fP(8) provides more information, better control on output formatting, easy to use in scripts and it does not require root permissions to get actual information. \fBblkid\fP reads information directly from devices and for non\-root users it returns cached unverified information. \fBblkid\fP is mostly designed for system services and to test \fBlibblkid\fP(3) functionality. -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -When \fIdevice\fP is specified, tokens from only this device are displayed. It is possible to specify multiple \fIdevice\fP arguments on the command line. If none is given, all partitions or unpartitioned devices which appear in \fI/proc/partitions\fP are shown, if they are recognized. -.sp -\fBblkid\fP has two main forms of operation: either searching for a device with a specific NAME=value pair, or displaying NAME=value pairs for one or more specified devices. -.sp -For security reasons \fBblkid\fP silently ignores all devices where the probing result is ambivalent (multiple colliding filesystems are detected). The low\-level probing mode (\fB\-p\fP) provides more information and extra exit status in this case. It\(cqs recommended to use \fBwipefs\fP(8) to get a detailed overview and to erase obsolete stuff (magic strings) from the device. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -The \fIsize\fP and \fIoffset\fP arguments may be followed by the multiplicative suffixes like KiB (=1024), MiB (=1024*1024), and so on for GiB, TiB, PiB, EiB, ZiB and YiB (the "iB" is optional, e.g., "K" has the same meaning as "KiB"), or the suffixes KB (=1000), MB (=1000*1000), and so on for GB, TB, PB, EB, ZB and YB. -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-cache\-file\fP \fIcachefile\fP -.RS 4 -Read from \fIcachefile\fP instead of reading from the default cache file (see the CONFIGURATION FILE section for more details). If you want to start with a clean cache (i.e., don\(cqt report devices previously scanned but not necessarily available at this time), specify \fI/dev/null\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-no\-encoding\fP -.RS 4 -Don\(cqt encode non\-printing characters. The non\-printing characters are encoded by ^ and M\- notation by default. Note that the \fB\-\-output udev\fP output format uses a different encoding which cannot be disabled. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-D\fP, \fB\-\-no\-part\-details\fP -.RS 4 -Don\(cqt print information (PART_ENTRY_* tags) from partition table in low\-level probing mode. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-g\fP, \fB\-\-garbage\-collect\fP -.RS 4 -Perform a garbage collection pass on the blkid cache to remove devices which no longer exist. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display a usage message and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-H\fP, \fB\-\-hint\fP \fIsetting\fP -.RS 4 -Set probing hint. The hints are optional way how to force probing functions to -check for example another location. The currently supported is -"session_offset=\fInumber\fP" to set session offset on multi\-session UDF. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-i\fP, \fB\-\-info\fP -.RS 4 -Display information about I/O Limits (aka I/O topology). The \(aqexport\(aq output format is automatically enabled. This option can be used together with the \fB\-\-probe\fP option. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-k\fP, \fB\-\-list\-filesystems\fP -.RS 4 -List all known filesystems and RAIDs and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-list\-one\fP -.RS 4 -Look up only one device that matches the search parameter specified with the \fB\-\-match\-token\fP option. If there are multiple devices that match the specified search parameter, then the device with the highest priority is returned, and/or the first device found at a given priority (but see below note about udev). Device types in order of decreasing priority are: Device Mapper, EVMS, LVM, MD, and finally regular block devices. If this option is not specified, \fBblkid\fP will print all of the devices that match the search parameter. -.sp -This option forces \fBblkid\fP to use udev when used for LABEL or UUID tokens in \fB\-\-match\-token\fP. The goal is to provide output consistent with other utils (like \fBmount\fP(8), etc.) on systems where the same tag is used for multiple devices. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-L\fP, \fB\-\-label\fP \fIlabel\fP -.RS 4 -Look up the device that uses this filesystem \fIlabel\fP; this is equal to \fB\-\-list\-one \-\-output device \-\-match\-token LABEL=\fP\fIlabel\fP. This lookup method is able to reliably use /dev/disk/by\-label udev symlinks (dependent on a setting in \fI/etc/blkid.conf\fP). Avoid using the symlinks directly; it is not reliable to use the symlinks without verification. The \fB\-\-label\fP option works on systems with and without udev. -.sp -Unfortunately, the original \fBblkid\fP(8) from e2fsprogs uses the \fB\-L\fP option as a synonym for \fB\-o list\fP. For better portability, use \fB\-l \-o device \-t LABEL=\fP\fIlabel\fP and \fB\-o list\fP in your scripts rather than the \fB\-L\fP option. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-match\-types\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Restrict the probing functions to the specified (comma\-separated) \fIlist\fP of superblock types (names). The list items may be prefixed with "no" to specify the types which should be ignored. For example: -.sp -\fBblkid \-\-probe \-\-match\-types vfat,ext3,ext4 /dev/sda1\fP -.sp -probes for vfat, ext3 and ext4 filesystems, and -.sp -\fBblkid \-\-probe \-\-match\-types nominix /dev/sda1\fP -.sp -probes for all supported formats except minix filesystems. This option is only useful together with \fB\-\-probe\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-output\fP \fIformat\fP -.RS 4 -Use the specified output format. Note that the order of variables and devices is not fixed. See also option \fB\-s\fP. The \fIformat\fP parameter may be: -.sp -\fBfull\fP -.RS 4 -print all tags (the default) -.RE -.sp -\fBvalue\fP -.RS 4 -print the value of the tags -.RE -.sp -\fBlist\fP -.RS 4 -print the devices in a user\-friendly format; this output format is unsupported for low\-level probing (\fB\-\-probe\fP or \fB\-\-info\fP). -.sp -This output format is \fBDEPRECATED\fP in favour of the \fBlsblk\fP(8) command. -.RE -.sp -\fBdevice\fP -.RS 4 -print the device name only; this output format is always enabled for the \fB\-\-label\fP and \fB\-\-uuid\fP options -.RE -.sp -\fBudev\fP -.RS 4 -print key="value" pairs for easy import into the udev environment; the keys are prefixed by ID_FS_ or ID_PART_ prefixes. The value may be modified to be safe for udev environment; allowed is plain ASCII, hex\-escaping and valid UTF\-8, everything else (including whitespaces) is replaced with \(aq_\(aq. The keys with \fI_ENC\fP postfix use hex\-escaping for unsafe chars. -.sp -The udev output returns the ID_FS_AMBIVALENT tag if more superblocks are detected, and ID_PART_ENTRY_* tags are always returned for all partitions including empty partitions. -.sp -This output format is \fBDEPRECATED\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBexport\fP -.RS 4 -print key=value pairs for easy import into the environment; this output format is automatically enabled when I/O Limits (\fB\-\-info\fP option) are requested. -.sp -The non\-printing characters are encoded by ^ and M\- notation and all potentially unsafe characters are escaped. -.RE -.RE -.sp -\fB\-O\fP, \fB\-\-offset\fP \fIoffset\fP -.RS 4 -Probe at the given \fIoffset\fP (only useful with \fB\-\-probe\fP). This option can be used together with the \fB\-\-info\fP option. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-probe\fP -.RS 4 -Switch to low\-level superblock probing mode (bypassing the cache). -.sp -Note that low\-level probing also returns information about partition table type (PTTYPE tag) and partitions (PART_ENTRY_* tags). The tag names produced by low\-level probing are based on names used internally by libblkid and it may be different than when executed without \fB\-\-probe\fP (for example PART_ENTRY_UUID= vs PARTUUID=). See also \fB\-\-no\-part\-details\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-match\-tag\fP \fItag\fP -.RS 4 -For each (specified) device, show only the tags that match \fItag\fP. It is possible to specify multiple \fB\-\-match\-tag\fP options. If no tag is specified, then all tokens are shown for all (specified) devices. In order to just refresh the cache without showing any tokens, use \fB\-\-match\-tag none\fP with no other options. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-S\fP, \fB\-\-size\fP \fIsize\fP -.RS 4 -Override the size of device/file (only useful with \fB\-\-probe\fP). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-match\-token\fP \fINAME=value\fP -.RS 4 -Search for block devices with tokens named \fINAME\fP that have the value \fIvalue\fP, and display any devices which are found. Common values for \fINAME\fP include \fBTYPE\fP, \fBLABEL\fP, and \fBUUID\fP. If there are no devices specified on the command line, all block devices will be searched; otherwise only the specified devices are searched. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-u\fP, \fB\-\-usages\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Restrict the probing functions to the specified (comma\-separated) \fIlist\fP of "usage" types. Supported usage types are: filesystem, raid, crypto and other. The list items may be prefixed with "no" to specify the usage types which should be ignored. For example: -.sp -\fBblkid \-\-probe \-\-usages filesystem,other /dev/sda1\fP -.sp -probes for all filesystem and other (e.g., swap) formats, and -.sp -\fBblkid \-\-probe \-\-usages noraid /dev/sda1\fP -.sp -probes for all supported formats except RAIDs. This option is only useful together with \fB\-\-probe\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-U\fP, \fB\-\-uuid\fP \fIuuid\fP -.RS 4 -Look up the device that uses this filesystem \fIuuid\fP. For more details see the \fB\-\-label\fP option. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version number and exit. -.RE -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -If the specified device or device addressed by specified token (option \fB\-\-match\-token\fP) was found and it\(cqs possible to gather any information about the device, an exit status 0 is returned. Note the option \fB\-\-match\-tag\fP filters output tags, but it does not affect exit status. -.sp -If the specified token was not found, or no (specified) devices could be identified, or it is impossible to gather any information about the device identifiers or device content an exit status of 2 is returned. -.sp -For usage or other errors, an exit status of 4 is returned. -.sp -If an ambivalent probing result was detected by low\-level probing mode (\fB\-p\fP), an exit status of 8 is returned. -.SH "CONFIGURATION FILE" -.sp -The standard location of the \fI/etc/blkid.conf\fP config file can be overridden by the environment variable BLKID_CONF. The following options control the libblkid library: -.sp -\fISEND_UEVENT=<yes|not>\fP -.RS 4 -Sends uevent when \fI/dev/disk/by\-{label,uuid,partuuid,partlabel}/\fP symlink does not match with LABEL, UUID, PARTUUID or PARTLABEL on the device. Default is "yes". -.RE -.sp -\fICACHE_FILE=<path>\fP -.RS 4 -Overrides the standard location of the cache file. This setting can be overridden by the environment variable \fBBLKID_FILE\fP. Default is \fI/run/blkid/blkid.tab\fP, or \fI/etc/blkid.tab\fP on systems without a \fI/run\fP directory. -.RE -.sp -\fIEVALUATE=<methods>\fP -.RS 4 -Defines LABEL and UUID evaluation method(s). Currently, the libblkid library supports the "udev" and "scan" methods. More than one method may be specified in a comma\-separated list. Default is "udev,scan". The "udev" method uses udev \fI/dev/disk/by\-*\fP symlinks and the "scan" method scans all block devices from the \fI/proc/partitions\fP file. -.RE -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -Setting \fILIBBLKID_DEBUG=all\fP enables debug output. -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -\fBblkid\fP was written by Andreas Dilger for libblkid and improved by Theodore Ts\(cqo and Karel Zak. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBlibblkid\fP(3), -\fBfindfs\fP(8), -\fBlsblk\fP(8), -\fBwipefs\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBblkid\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/blkmapd.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/blkmapd.8 index 914b80f2..4b3d3f04 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/blkmapd.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/blkmapd.8 @@ -43,9 +43,24 @@ Performs device discovery only then exits. Runs .B blkmapd in the foreground and sends output to stderr (as opposed to syslogd) +.SH CONFIGURATION FILE +The +.B blkmapd +daemon recognizes the following value from the +.B [general] +section of the +.I /etc/nfs.conf +configuration file: +.TP +.B pipefs-directory +Tells +.B blkmapd +where to look for the rpc_pipefs filesystem. The default value is +.IR /var/lib/nfs/rpc_pipefs . .SH SEE ALSO .BR nfs (5), -.BR dmsetup (8) +.BR dmsetup (8), +.BR nfs.conf (5) .sp RFC 5661 for the NFS version 4.1 specification. .br diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/blkzone.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/blkzone.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 7bc0e56a..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/blkzone.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,250 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: blkzone -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "BLKZONE" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -blkzone \- run zone command on a device -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBblkzone\fP \fIcommand\fP [options] \fIdevice\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBblkzone\fP is used to run zone command on device that support the Zoned Block Commands (ZBC) or Zoned\-device ATA Commands (ZAC). The zones to operate on can be specified using the offset, count and length options. -.sp -The \fIdevice\fP argument is the pathname of the block device. -.SH "COMMANDS" -.SS "report" -.sp -The command \fBblkzone report\fP is used to report device zone information. -.sp -By default, the command will report all zones from the start of the block device. Options may be used to modify this behavior, changing the starting zone or the size of the report, as explained below. -.sp -Report output: -.TS -allbox tab(:); -lt lt. -T{ -.sp -start -T}:T{ -.sp -Zone start sector -T} -T{ -.sp -len -T}:T{ -.sp -Zone length in number of sectors -T} -T{ -.sp -cap -T}:T{ -.sp -Zone capacity in number of sectors -T} -T{ -.sp -wptr -T}:T{ -.sp -Zone write pointer position -T} -T{ -.sp -reset -T}:T{ -.sp -Reset write pointer recommended -T} -T{ -.sp -non\-seq -T}:T{ -.sp -Non\-sequential write resources active -T} -T{ -.sp -cond -T}:T{ -.sp -Zone condition -T} -T{ -.sp -type -T}:T{ -.sp -Zone type -T} -.TE -.sp -.sp -Zone conditions: -.TS -allbox tab(:); -lt lt. -T{ -.sp -cl -T}:T{ -.sp -Closed -T} -T{ -.sp -nw -T}:T{ -.sp -Not write pointer -T} -T{ -.sp -em -T}:T{ -.sp -Empty -T} -T{ -.sp -fu -T}:T{ -.sp -Full -T} -T{ -.sp -oe -T}:T{ -.sp -Explicitly opened -T} -T{ -.sp -oi -T}:T{ -.sp -Implicitly opened -T} -T{ -.sp -ol -T}:T{ -.sp -Offline -T} -T{ -.sp -ro -T}:T{ -.sp -Read only -T} -T{ -.sp -x? -T}:T{ -.sp -Reserved conditions (should not be reported) -T} -.TE -.sp -.SS "capacity" -.sp -The command \fBblkzone capacity\fP is used to report device capacity information. -.sp -By default, the command will report the sum, in number of sectors, of all zone capacities on the device. Options may be used to modify this behavior, changing the starting zone or the size of the report, as explained below. -.SS "reset" -.sp -The command \fBblkzone reset\fP is used to reset one or more zones. Unlike \fBsg_reset_wp\fP(8), this command operates from the block layer and can reset a range of zones. -.SS "open" -.sp -The command \fBblkzone open\fP is used to explicitly open one or more zones. Unlike \fBsg_zone\fP(8), open action, this command operates from the block layer and can open a range of zones. -.SS "close" -.sp -The command \fBblkzone close\fP is used to close one or more zones. Unlike \fBsg_zone\fP(8), close action, this command operates from the block layer and can close a range of zones. -.SS "finish" -.sp -The command \fBblkzone finish\fP is used to finish (transition to full condition) one or more zones. Unlike \fBsg_zone\fP(8), finish action, this command operates from the block layer and can finish a range of zones. -.sp -By default, the reset, open, close and finish commands will operate from the zone at device sector 0 and operate on all zones. Options may be used to modify this behavior as explained below. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -The \fIoffset\fP and \fIlength\fP option arguments may be followed by the multiplicative suffixes KiB (=1024), MiB (=1024*1024), and so on for GiB, TiB, PiB, EiB, ZiB and YiB (the "iB" is optional, e.g., "K" has the same meaning as "KiB") or the suffixes KB (=1000), MB (=1000*1000), and so on for GB, TB, PB, EB, ZB and YB. Additionally, the 0x prefix can be used to specify \fIoffset\fP and \fIlength\fP in hex. -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-offset\fP \fIsector\fP -.RS 4 -The starting zone specified as a sector offset. The provided offset in sector units (512 bytes) should match the start of a zone. The default value is zero. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-length\fP \fIsectors\fP -.RS 4 -The maximum number of sectors the command should operate on. The default value is the number of sectors remaining after \fIoffset\fP. This option cannot be used together with the option \fB\-\-count\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-count\fP \fIcount\fP -.RS 4 -The maximum number of zones the command should operate on. The default value is the number of zones starting from \fIoffset\fP. This option cannot be used together with the option \fB\-\-length\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-force\fP -.RS 4 -Enforce commands to change zone status on block devices used by the system. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Display the number of zones returned in the report or the range of sectors reset. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "shaun\(attancheff.com" "Shaun Tancheff" "," -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBsg_rep_zones\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBblkzone\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/blockdev.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/blockdev.8 deleted file mode 100644 index bbaf1959..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/blockdev.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,186 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: blockdev -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "BLOCKDEV" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -blockdev \- call block device ioctls from the command line -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBblockdev\fP [\fB\-q\fP] [\fB\-v\fP] \fIcommand\fP [\fIcommand\fP...] \fIdevice\fP [\fIdevice\fP...] -.sp -\fBblockdev\fP \fB\-\-report\fP [\fIdevice\fP...] -.sp -\fBblockdev\fP \fB\-h\fP|\fB\-V\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -The utility \fBblockdev\fP allows one to call block device ioctls from the command line. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-q\fP -.RS 4 -Be quiet. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v\fP -.RS 4 -Be verbose. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-report\fP -.RS 4 -Print a report for the specified device. It is possible to give multiple devices. If none is given, all devices which appear in \fI/proc/partitions\fP are shown. Note that the partition StartSec is in 512\-byte sectors. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Print version and exit. -.RE -.SH "COMMANDS" -.sp -It is possible to give multiple devices and multiple commands. -.sp -\fB\-\-flushbufs\fP -.RS 4 -Flush buffers. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-getalignoff\fP -.RS 4 -Get alignment offset. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-getbsz\fP -.RS 4 -Print the blocksize in bytes. This size does not describe device topology. It\(cqs the size used internally by the kernel and it may be modified (for example) by filesystem driver on mount. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-getdiscardzeroes\fP -.RS 4 -Get discard zeroes support status. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-getfra\fP -.RS 4 -Get filesystem readahead in 512\-byte sectors. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-getiomin\fP -.RS 4 -Get minimum I/O size. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-getioopt\fP -.RS 4 -Get optimal I/O size. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-getmaxsect\fP -.RS 4 -Get max sectors per request. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-getpbsz\fP -.RS 4 -Get physical block (sector) size. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-getra\fP -.RS 4 -Print readahead (in 512\-byte sectors). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-getro\fP -.RS 4 -Get read\-only. Print 1 if the device is read\-only, 0 otherwise. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-getsize64\fP -.RS 4 -Print device size in bytes. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-getsize\fP -.RS 4 -Print device size (32\-bit!) in sectors. Deprecated in favor of the \fB\-\-getsz\fP option. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-getss\fP -.RS 4 -Print logical sector size in bytes \- usually 512. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-getsz\fP -.RS 4 -Get size in 512\-byte sectors. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-rereadpt\fP -.RS 4 -Reread partition table -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-setbsz\fP \fIbytes\fP -.RS 4 -Set blocksize. Note that the block size is specific to the current file descriptor opening the block device, so the change of block size only persists for as long as \fBblockdev\fP has the device open, and is lost once \fBblockdev\fP exits. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-setfra\fP \fIsectors\fP -.RS 4 -Set filesystem readahead (same as \fB\-\-setra\fP on 2.6 kernels). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-setra\fP \fIsectors\fP -.RS 4 -Set readahead (in 512\-byte sectors). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-setro\fP -.RS 4 -Set read\-only. The currently active access to the device may not be affected by the change. For example, a filesystem already mounted in read\-write mode will not be affected. The change applies after remount. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-setrw\fP -.RS 4 -Set read\-write. -.RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -\fBblockdev\fP was written by Andries E. Brouwer and rewritten by Karel Zak. -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBblockdev\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/cfdisk.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/cfdisk.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 4e7fe603..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/cfdisk.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,217 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: cfdisk -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "CFDISK" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -cfdisk \- display or manipulate a disk partition table -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBcfdisk\fP [options] [\fIdevice\fP] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBcfdisk\fP is a curses\-based program for partitioning any block device. The default device is \fI/dev/sda\fP. -.sp -Note that \fBcfdisk\fP provides basic partitioning functionality with a user\-friendly interface. If you need advanced features, use \fBfdisk\fP(8) instead. -.sp -All disk label changes will remain in memory only, and the disk will be unmodified until you decide to write your changes. Be careful before using the write command. -.sp -Since version 2.25 \fBcfdisk\fP supports MBR (DOS), GPT, SUN and SGI disk labels, but no longer provides any functionality for CHS (Cylinder\-Head\-Sector) addressing. CHS has never been important for Linux, and this addressing concept does not make any sense for new devices. -.sp -Since version 2.25 \fBcfdisk\fP also does not provide a \(aqprint\(aq command any more. This functionality is provided by the utilities \fBpartx\fP(8) and \fBlsblk\fP(8) in a very comfortable and rich way. -.sp -If you want to remove an old partition table from a device, use \fBwipefs\fP(8). -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-L\fP, \fB\-\-color\fP[\fB=\fP\fIwhen\fP] -.RS 4 -Colorize the output. The optional argument \fIwhen\fP can be \fBauto\fP, \fBnever\fP or \fBalways\fP. If the \fIwhen\fP argument is omitted, it defaults to \fBauto\fP. The colors can be disabled, for the current built\-in default see \fB\-\-help\fP output. See also the COLORS section. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-lock\fP[=\fImode\fP] -.RS 4 -Use exclusive BSD lock for device or file it operates. The optional argument \fImode\fP can be \fByes\fP, \fBno\fP (or 1 and 0) or \fBnonblock\fP. If the \fImode\fP argument is omitted, it defaults to \fB"yes"\fP. This option overwrites environment variable \fB$LOCK_BLOCK_DEVICE\fP. The default is not to use any lock at all, but it\(cqs recommended to avoid collisions with udevd or other tools. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-read\-only\fP -.RS 4 -Forced open in read\-only mode. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-z\fP, \fB\-\-zero\fP -.RS 4 -Start with an in\-memory zeroed partition table. This option does not zero the partition table on the disk; rather, it simply starts the program without reading the existing partition table. This option allows you to create a new partition table from scratch or from an \fBsfdisk\fP(8)\-compatible script. -.RE -.SH "COMMANDS" -.sp -The commands for \fBcfdisk\fP can be entered by pressing the corresponding key (pressing \fIEnter\fP after the command is not necessary). Here is a list of the available commands: -.sp -\fBb\fP -.RS 4 -Toggle the bootable flag of the current partition. This allows you to select which primary partition is bootable on the drive. This command may not be available for all partition label types. -.RE -.sp -\fBd\fP -.RS 4 -Delete the current partition. This will convert the current partition into free space and merge it with any free space immediately surrounding the current partition. A partition already marked as free space or marked as unusable cannot be deleted. -.RE -.sp -\fBh\fP -.RS 4 -Show the help screen. -.RE -.sp -\fBn\fP -.RS 4 -Create a new partition from free space. \fBcfdisk\fP then prompts you for the size of the partition you want to create. The default size is equal to the entire available free space at the current position. -.sp -The size may be followed by a multiplicative suffix: KiB (=1024), MiB (=1024*1024), and so on for GiB, TiB, PiB, EiB, ZiB and YiB (the "iB" is optional, e.g., "K" has the same meaning as "KiB"). -.RE -.sp -\fBq\fP -.RS 4 -Quit the program. This will exit the program without writing any data to the disk. -.RE -.sp -\fBr\fP -.RS 4 -Reduce or enlarge the current partition. \fBcfdisk\fP then prompts you for the new size of the partition. The default size is the current size. A partition marked as free space or marked as unusable cannot be resized. -.sp -\fBNote that reducing the size of a partition might destroy data on that partition.\fP -.RE -.sp -\fBs\fP -.RS 4 -Sort the partitions in ascending start\-sector order. When deleting and adding partitions, it is likely that the numbering of the partitions will no longer match their order on the disk. This command restores that match. -.RE -.sp -\fBt\fP -.RS 4 -Change the partition type. By default, new partitions are created as \fILinux\fP partitions. -.RE -.sp -\fBu\fP -.RS 4 -Dump the current in\-memory partition table to an sfdisk\-compatible script file. -.sp -The script files are compatible between \fBcfdisk\fP, \fBfdisk\fP(8) \fBsfdisk\fP(8) and other libfdisk applications. For more details see \fBsfdisk\fP(8). -.sp -It is also possible to load an sfdisk\-script into \fBcfdisk\fP if there is no partition table on the device or when you start \fBcfdisk\fP with the \fB\-\-zero\fP command\-line option. -.RE -.sp -\fBW\fP -.RS 4 -Write the partition table to disk (you must enter an uppercase W). Since this might destroy data on the disk, you must either confirm or deny the write by entering `yes\(aq or `no\(aq. If you enter `yes\(aq, \fBcfdisk\fP will write the partition table to disk and then tell the kernel to re\-read the partition table from the disk. -.sp -The re\-reading of the partition table does not always work. In such a case you need to inform the kernel about any new partitions by using \fBpartprobe\fP(8) or \fBpartx\fP(8), or by rebooting the system. -.RE -.sp -\fBx\fP -.RS 4 -Toggle extra information about a partition. -.RE -.sp -\fIUp Arrow\fP, \fIDown Arrow\fP -.RS 4 -Move the cursor to the previous or next partition. If there are more partitions than can be displayed on a screen, you can display the next (previous) set of partitions by moving down (up) at the last (first) partition displayed on the screen. -.RE -.sp -\fILeft Arrow\fP, \fIRight Arrow\fP -.RS 4 -Select the preceding or the next menu item. Hitting \fIEnter\fP will execute the currently selected item. -.RE -.sp -All commands can be entered with either uppercase or lowercase letters (except for \fBW\fPrite). When in a submenu or at a prompt, you can hit the \fIEsc\fP key to return to the main menu. -.SH "COLORS" -.sp -Implicit coloring can be disabled by creating the empty file \fI/etc/terminal\-colors.d/cfdisk.disable\fP. -.sp -See \fBterminal\-colors.d\fP(5) for more details about colorization configuration. -.sp -\fBcfdisk\fP does not support color customization with a color\-scheme file. -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -\fBCFDISK_DEBUG\fP=all -.RS 4 -enables cfdisk debug output. -.RE -.sp -\fBLIBFDISK_DEBUG\fP=all -.RS 4 -enables libfdisk debug output. -.RE -.sp -\fBLIBBLKID_DEBUG\fP=all -.RS 4 -enables libblkid debug output. -.RE -.sp -\fBLIBSMARTCOLS_DEBUG\fP=all -.RS 4 -enables libsmartcols debug output. -.RE -.sp -\fBLIBSMARTCOLS_DEBUG_PADDING\fP=on -.RS 4 -use visible padding characters. Requires enabled \fBLIBSMARTCOLS_DEBUG\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBLOCK_BLOCK_DEVICE\fP=<mode> -.RS 4 -use exclusive BSD lock. The mode is "1" or "0". See \fB\-\-lock\fP for more details. -.RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.sp -The current \fBcfdisk\fP implementation is based on the original \fBcfdisk\fP from \c -.MTO "martin\(atcs.unc.edu" "Kevin E. Martin" "." -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBfdisk\fP(8), -\fBparted\fP(8), -\fBpartprobe\fP(8), -\fBpartx\fP(8), -\fBsfdisk\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBcfdisk\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/chcpu.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/chcpu.8 deleted file mode 100644 index c74d998e..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/chcpu.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,129 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: chcpu -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "CHCPU" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -chcpu \- configure CPUs -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBchcpu\fP \fB\-c\fP|\fB\-d\fP|\fB\-e\fP|\fB\-g\fP \fIcpu\-list\fP -.sp -\fBchcpu\fP \fB\-p\fP \fImode\fP -.sp -\fBchcpu\fP \fB\-r\fP|\fB\-h\fP|\fB\-V\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBchcpu\fP can modify the state of CPUs. It can enable or disable CPUs, scan for new CPUs, change the CPU dispatching \fImode\fP of the underlying hypervisor, and request CPUs from the hypervisor (configure) or return CPUs to the hypervisor (deconfigure). -.sp -Some options have a \fIcpu\-list\fP argument. Use this argument to specify a comma\-separated list of CPUs. The list can contain individual CPU addresses or ranges of addresses. For example, \fB0,5,7,9\-11\fP makes the command applicable to the CPUs with the addresses 0, 5, 7, 9, 10, and 11. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-configure\fP \fIcpu\-list\fP -.RS 4 -Configure the specified CPUs. Configuring a CPU means that the hypervisor takes a CPU from the CPU pool and assigns it to the virtual hardware on which your kernel runs. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-disable\fP \fIcpu\-list\fP -.RS 4 -Disable the specified CPUs. Disabling a CPU means that the kernel sets it offline. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-e\fP, \fB\-\-enable\fP \fIcpu\-list\fP -.RS 4 -Enable the specified CPUs. Enabling a CPU means that the kernel sets it online. A CPU must be configured, see \fB\-c\fP, before it can be enabled. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-g\fP, \fB\-\-deconfigure\fP \fIcpu\-list\fP -.RS 4 -Deconfigure the specified CPUs. Deconfiguring a CPU means that the hypervisor removes the CPU from the virtual hardware on which the Linux instance runs and returns it to the CPU pool. A CPU must be offline, see \fB\-d\fP, before it can be deconfigured. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-dispatch\fP \fImode\fP -.RS 4 -Set the CPU dispatching \fImode\fP (polarization). This option has an effect only if your hardware architecture and hypervisor support CPU polarization. Available \fImodes\fP are: -.sp -\fBhorizontal\fP -.RS 4 -The workload is spread across all available CPUs. -.RE -.sp -\fBvertical\fP -.RS 4 -The workload is concentrated on few CPUs. -.RE -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-rescan\fP -.RS 4 -Trigger a rescan of CPUs. After a rescan, the Linux kernel recognizes the new CPUs. Use this option on systems that do not automatically detect newly attached CPUs. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -\fBchcpu\fP has the following exit status values: -.sp -\fB0\fP -.RS 4 -success -.RE -.sp -\fB1\fP -.RS 4 -failure -.RE -.sp -\fB64\fP -.RS 4 -partial success -.RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "heiko.carstens\(atde.ibm.com" "Heiko Carstens" "" -.SH "COPYRIGHT" -.sp -Copyright IBM Corp. 2011 -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBlscpu\fP(1) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBchcpu\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/chmem.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/chmem.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 0a1274a5..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/chmem.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,173 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: chmem -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "CHMEM" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -chmem \- configure memory -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBchmem\fP [\fB\-h] [\fP\-V*] [\fB\-v\fP] [\fB\-e\fP|\fB\-d\fP] [\fISIZE\fP|\fIRANGE\fP \fB\-b\fP \fIBLOCKRANGE\fP] [\fB\-z\fP \fIZONE\fP] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -The chmem command sets a particular size or range of memory online or offline. -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Specify \fISIZE\fP as <size>[m|M|g|G]. With m or M, <size> specifies the memory size in MiB (1024 x 1024 bytes). With g or G, <size> specifies the memory size in GiB (1024 x 1024 x 1024 bytes). The default unit is MiB. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Specify \fIRANGE\fP in the form 0x<start>\-0x<end> as shown in the output of the \fBlsmem\fP(1) command. <start> is the hexadecimal address of the first byte and <end> is the hexadecimal address of the last byte in the memory range. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Specify \fIBLOCKRANGE\fP in the form <first>\-<last> or <block> as shown in the output of the \fBlsmem\fP(1) command. <first> is the number of the first memory block and <last> is the number of the last memory block in the memory range. Alternatively a single block can be specified. \fIBLOCKRANGE\fP requires the \fB\-\-blocks\fP option. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Specify \fIZONE\fP as the name of a memory zone, as shown in the output of the \fBlsmem \-o +ZONES\fP command. The output shows one or more valid memory zones for each memory range. If multiple zones are shown, then the memory range currently belongs to the first zone. By default, \fBchmem\fP will set memory online to the zone Movable, if this is among the valid zones. This default can be changed by specifying the \fB\-\-zone\fP option with another valid zone. For memory ballooning, it is recommended to select the zone Movable for memory online and offline, if possible. Memory in this zone is much more likely to be able to be offlined again, but it cannot be used for arbitrary kernel allocations, only for migratable pages (e.g., anonymous and page cache pages). Use the \fB\-\-help\fP option to see all available zones. -.RE -.sp -\fISIZE\fP and \fIRANGE\fP must be aligned to the Linux memory block size, as shown in the output of the \fBlsmem\fP(1) command. -.sp -Setting memory online can fail for various reasons. On virtualized systems it can fail if the hypervisor does not have enough memory left, for example because memory was overcommitted. Setting memory offline can fail if Linux cannot free the memory. If only part of the requested memory can be set online or offline, a message tells you how much memory was set online or offline instead of the requested amount. -.sp -When setting memory online \fBchmem\fP starts with the lowest memory block numbers. When setting memory offline \fBchmem\fP starts with the highest memory block numbers. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-b\fP, \fB\-\-blocks\fP -.RS 4 -Use a \fIBLOCKRANGE\fP parameter instead of \fIRANGE\fP or \fISIZE\fP for the \fB\-\-enable\fP and \fB\-\-disable\fP options. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-disable\fP -.RS 4 -Set the specified \fIRANGE\fP, \fISIZE\fP, or \fIBLOCKRANGE\fP of memory offline. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-e\fP, \fB\-\-enable\fP -.RS 4 -Set the specified \fIRANGE\fP, \fISIZE\fP, or \fIBLOCKRANGE\fP of memory online. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-z\fP, \fB\-\-zone\fP -.RS 4 -Select the memory \fIZONE\fP where to set the specified \fIRANGE\fP, \fISIZE\fP, or \fIBLOCKRANGE\fP of memory online or offline. By default, memory will be set online to the zone Movable, if possible. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Print a short help text, then exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Verbose mode. Causes \fBchmem\fP to print debugging messages about it\(cqs progress. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Print the version number, then exit. -.RE -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -\fBchmem\fP has the following exit status values: -.sp -\fB0\fP -.RS 4 -success -.RE -.sp -\fB1\fP -.RS 4 -failure -.RE -.sp -\fB64\fP -.RS 4 -partial success -.RE -.SH "EXAMPLE" -.sp -\fBchmem \-\-enable 1024\fP -.RS 4 -This command requests 1024 MiB of memory to be set online. -.RE -.sp -\fBchmem \-e 2g\fP -.RS 4 -This command requests 2 GiB of memory to be set online. -.RE -.sp -\fBchmem \-\-disable 0x00000000e4000000\-0x00000000f3ffffff\fP -.RS 4 -This command requests the memory range starting with 0x00000000e4000000 and ending with 0x00000000f3ffffff to be set offline. -.RE -.sp -\fBchmem \-b \-d 10\fP -.RS 4 -This command requests the memory block number 10 to be set offline. -.RE -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBlsmem\fP(1) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBchmem\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/ctrlaltdel.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/ctrlaltdel.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 3dd7b3e7..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/ctrlaltdel.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,80 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: ctrlaltdel -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "CTRLALTDEL" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -ctrlaltdel \- set the function of the Ctrl\-Alt\-Del combination -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBctrlaltdel\fP \fBhard\fP|\fBsoft\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -Based on examination of the \fIlinux/kernel/reboot.c\fP code, it is clear that there are two supported functions that the <Ctrl\-Alt\-Del> sequence can perform. -.sp -\fBhard\fP -.RS 4 -Immediately reboot the computer without calling \fBsync\fP(2) and without any other preparation. This is the default. -.RE -.sp -\fBsoft\fP -.RS 4 -Make the kernel send the \fBSIGINT\fP (interrupt) signal to the \fBinit\fP process (this is always the process with PID 1). If this option is used, the \fBinit\fP(8) program must support this feature. Since there are now several \fBinit\fP(8) programs in the Linux community, please consult the documentation for the version that you are currently using. -.RE -.sp -When the command is run without any argument, it will display the current setting. -.sp -The function of \fBctrlaltdel\fP is usually set in the \fI/etc/rc.local\fP file. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "FILES" -.sp -\fI/etc/rc.local\fP -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "poe\(atdaimi.aau.dk" "Peter Orbaek" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBinit\fP(8), -\fBsystemd\fP(1) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBctrlaltdel\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/delpart.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/delpart.8 deleted file mode 100644 index c397b226..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/delpart.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,54 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: delpart -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "DELPART" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -delpart \- tell the kernel to forget about a partition -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBdelpart\fP \fIdevice partition\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBdelpart\fP asks the Linux kernel to forget about the specified \fIpartition\fP (a number) on the specified \fIdevice\fP. The command is a simple wrapper around the "del partition" ioctl. -.sp -This command doesn\(cqt manipulate partitions on a block device. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBaddpart\fP(8), -\fBfdisk\fP(8), -\fBparted\fP(8), -\fBpartprobe\fP(8), -\fBpartx\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBdelpart\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/exportfs.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/exportfs.8 index 45b6d834..6d417a70 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/exportfs.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/exportfs.8 @@ -148,6 +148,31 @@ options. .TP .B -s Display the current export list suitable for /etc/exports. + +.SH CONFIGURATION FILE +The +.B [exportfs] +section of the +.I /etc/nfs.conf +configuration file can contain a +.B debug +value, which can be one or more from the list +.BR general , +.BR call , +.BR auth , +.BR parse , +.BR all . +When a list is given, the members should be comma-separated. + +.B exportfs +will also recognize the +.B state-directory-path +value from both the +.B [mountd] +section and the +.B [exportd] +section + .SH DISCUSSION .SS Exporting Directories The first synopsis shows how to invoke @@ -304,6 +329,7 @@ table of clients accessing server's exports .BR exports (5), .BR nfs.conf (5), .BR rpc.mountd (8), +.BR exportd (8), .BR netgroup (5) .SH AUTHORS Olaf Kirch <okir@monad.swb.de> diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/fdformat.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/fdformat.8 deleted file mode 100644 index c367fc66..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/fdformat.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,123 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: fdformat -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "FDFORMAT" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -fdformat \- low\-level format a floppy disk -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBfdformat\fP [options] \fIdevice\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBfdformat\fP does a low\-level format on a floppy disk. \fIdevice\fP is usually one of the following (for floppy devices the major = 2, and the minor is shown for informational purposes only): -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -/dev/fd0d360 (minor = 4) -/dev/fd0h1200 (minor = 8) -/dev/fd0D360 (minor = 12) -/dev/fd0H360 (minor = 12) -/dev/fd0D720 (minor = 16) -/dev/fd0H720 (minor = 16) -/dev/fd0h360 (minor = 20) -/dev/fd0h720 (minor = 24) -/dev/fd0H1440 (minor = 28) -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -/dev/fd1d360 (minor = 5) -/dev/fd1h1200 (minor = 9) -/dev/fd1D360 (minor = 13) -/dev/fd1H360 (minor = 13) -/dev/fd1D720 (minor = 17) -/dev/fd1H720 (minor = 17) -/dev/fd1h360 (minor = 21) -/dev/fd1h720 (minor = 25) -/dev/fd1H1440 (minor = 29) -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -The generic floppy devices, \fI/dev/fd0\fP and \fI/dev/fd1\fP, will fail to work with \fBfdformat\fP when a non\-standard format is being used, or if the format has not been autodetected earlier. In this case, use \fBsetfdprm\fP(8) to load the disk parameters. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-from\fP \fIN\fP -.RS 4 -Start at the track \fIN\fP (default is 0). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-to\fP \fIN\fP -.RS 4 -Stop at the track \fIN\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-repair\fP \fIN\fP -.RS 4 -Try to repair tracks failed during the verification (max \fIN\fP retries). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-no\-verify\fP -.RS 4 -Skip the verification that is normally performed after the formatting. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -This utility does not handle USB floppy disk drives. Use \fBufiformat\fP(8) instead. -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "almesber\(atnessie.cs.id.ethz.ch" "Werner Almesberger" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBfd\fP(4), -\fBemkfs\fP(8), -\fBmkfs\fP(8), -\fBsetfdprm\fP(8), -\fBufiformat\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBfdformat\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/fdisk.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/fdisk.8 deleted file mode 100644 index ab1c5241..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/fdisk.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,294 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: fdisk -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "FDISK" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -fdisk \- manipulate disk partition table -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBfdisk\fP [options] \fIdevice\fP -.sp -\fBfdisk\fP \fB\-l\fP [\fIdevice\fP...] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBfdisk\fP is a dialog\-driven program for creation and manipulation of partition tables. It understands GPT, MBR, Sun, SGI and BSD partition tables. -.sp -Block devices can be divided into one or more logical disks called \fIpartitions\fP. This division is recorded in the \fIpartition table\fP, usually found in sector 0 of the disk. (In the BSD world one talks about `disk slices\(aq and a `disklabel\(aq.) -.sp -All partitioning is driven by device I/O limits (the topology) by default. \fBfdisk\fP is able to optimize the disk layout for a 4K\-sector size and use an alignment offset on modern devices for MBR and GPT. It is always a good idea to follow \fBfdisk\fP\(aqs defaults as the default values (e.g., first and last partition sectors) and partition sizes specified by the +/\-<size>{M,G,...} notation are always aligned according to the device properties. -.sp -CHS (Cylinder\-Head\-Sector) addressing is deprecated and not used by default. Please, do not follow old articles and recommendations with \fBfdisk \-S <n> \-H <n>\fP advices for SSD or 4K\-sector devices. -.sp -Note that \fBpartx\fP(8) provides a rich interface for scripts to print disk layouts, \fBfdisk\fP is mostly designed for humans. Backward compatibility in the output of \fBfdisk\fP is not guaranteed. The input (the commands) should always be backward compatible. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-b\fP, \fB\-\-sector\-size\fP \fIsectorsize\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the sector size of the disk. Valid values are 512, 1024, 2048, and 4096. (Recent kernels know the sector size. Use this option only on old kernels or to override the kernel\(cqs ideas.) Since util\-linux\-2.17, \fBfdisk\fP differentiates between logical and physical sector size. This option changes both sector sizes to \fIsectorsize\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-B\fP, \fB\-\-protect\-boot\fP -.RS 4 -Don\(cqt erase the beginning of the first disk sector when creating a new disk label. This feature is supported for GPT and MBR. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-compatibility\fP[=\fImode\fP] -.RS 4 -Specify the compatibility mode, \(aqdos\(aq or \(aqnondos\(aq. The default is non\-DOS mode. For backward compatibility, it is possible to use the option without the \fImode\fP argument \(em then the default is used. Note that the optional \fImode\fP argument cannot be separated from the \fB\-c\fP option by a space, the correct form is for example \fB\-c\fP=\fIdos\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display a help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-L\fP, \fB\-\-color\fP[=\fIwhen\fP] -.RS 4 -Colorize the output. The optional argument \fIwhen\fP can be \fBauto\fP, \fBnever\fP or \fBalways\fP. If the \fIwhen\fP argument is omitted, it defaults to \fBauto\fP. The colors can be disabled; for the current built\-in default see the \fB\-\-help\fP output. See also the \fBCOLORS\fP section. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-list\fP -.RS 4 -List the partition tables for the specified devices and then exit. -.sp -If no devices are given, the devices mentioned in \fI/proc/partitions\fP (if this file exists) are used. Devices are always listed in the order in which they are specified on the command\-line, or by the kernel listed in \fI/proc/partitions\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-x\fP, \fB\-\-list\-details\fP -.RS 4 -Like \fB\-\-list\fP, but provides more details. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-lock\fP[=\fImode\fP] -.RS 4 -Use exclusive BSD lock for device or file it operates. The optional argument \fImode\fP can be \fByes\fP, \fBno\fP (or 1 and 0) or \fBnonblock\fP. If the \fImode\fP argument is omitted, it defaults to \fB"yes"\fP. This option overwrites environment variable \fB$LOCK_BLOCK_DEVICE\fP. The default is not to use any lock at all, but it\(cqs recommended to avoid collisions with udevd or other tools. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-noauto\-pt\fP -.RS 4 -Don\(cqt automatically create a default partition table on empty device. The partition table has to be explicitly created by user (by command like \(aqo\(aq, \(aqg\(aq, etc.). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-output\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Specify which output columns to print. Use \fB\-\-help\fP to get a list of all supported columns. -.sp -The default list of columns may be extended if \fIlist\fP is specified in the format \fI+list\fP (e.g., \fB\-o +UUID\fP). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-getsz\fP -.RS 4 -Print the size in 512\-byte sectors of each given block device. This option is DEPRECATED in favour of \fBblockdev\fP(8). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-type\fP \fItype\fP -.RS 4 -Enable support only for disklabels of the specified \fItype\fP, and disable support for all other types. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-u\fP, \fB\-\-units\fP[=\fIunit\fP] -.RS 4 -When listing partition tables, show sizes in \(aqsectors\(aq or in \(aqcylinders\(aq. The default is to show sizes in sectors. For backward compatibility, it is possible to use the option without the \fIunit\fP argument \(em then the default is used. Note that the optional \fIunit\fP argument cannot be separated from the \fB\-u\fP option by a space, the correct form is for example \(aq*\-u=*\fIcylinders\fP\(aq. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-C\fP, \fB\-\-cylinders\fP \fInumber\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the number of cylinders of the disk. I have no idea why anybody would want to do so. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-H\fP, \fB\-\-heads\fP \fInumber\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the number of heads of the disk. (Not the physical number, of course, but the number used for partition tables.) Reasonable values are 255 and 16. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-S\fP, \fB\-\-sectors\fP \fInumber\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the number of sectors per track of the disk. (Not the physical number, of course, but the number used for partition tables.) A reasonable value is 63. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-w\fP, \fB\-\-wipe\fP \fIwhen\fP -.RS 4 -Wipe filesystem, RAID and partition\-table signatures from the device, in order to avoid possible collisions. The argument \fIwhen\fP can be \fBauto\fP, \fBnever\fP or \fBalways\fP. When this option is not given, the default is \fBauto\fP, in which case signatures are wiped only when in interactive mode. In all cases detected signatures are reported by warning messages before a new partition table is created. See also \fBwipefs\fP(8) command. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-W\fP, \fB\-\-wipe\-partitions\fP \fIwhen\fP -.RS 4 -Wipe filesystem, RAID and partition\-table signatures from a newly created partitions, in order to avoid possible collisions. The argument \fIwhen\fP can be \fBauto\fP, \fBnever\fP or \fBalways\fP. When this option is not given, the default is \fBauto\fP, in which case signatures are wiped only when in interactive mode and after confirmation by user. In all cases detected signatures are reported by warning messages before a new partition is created. See also \fBwipefs\fP(8) command. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.SH "DEVICES" -.sp -The \fIdevice\fP is usually \fI/dev/sda\fP, \fI/dev/sdb\fP or so. A device name refers to the entire disk. Old systems without libata (a library used inside the Linux kernel to support ATA host controllers and devices) make a difference between IDE and SCSI disks. In such cases the device name will be \fI/dev/hd*\fP (IDE) or \fI/dev/sd*\fP (SCSI). -.sp -The \fIpartition\fP is a device name followed by a partition number. For example, \fI/dev/sda1\fP is the first partition on the first hard disk in the system. See also Linux kernel documentation (the \fIDocumentation/admin\-guide/devices.txt\fP file). -.SH "SIZES" -.sp -The "last sector" dialog accepts partition size specified by number of sectors or by +/\-<size>{K,B,M,G,...} notation. -.sp -If the size is prefixed by \(aq+\(aq then it is interpreted as relative to the partition first sector. If the size is prefixed by \(aq\-\(aq then it is interpreted as relative to the high limit (last available sector for the partition). -.sp -In the case the size is specified in bytes than the number may be followed by the multiplicative suffixes KiB=1024, MiB=1024*1024, and so on for GiB, TiB, PiB, EiB, ZiB and YiB. The "iB" is optional, e.g., "K" has the same meaning as "KiB". -.sp -The relative sizes are always aligned according to device I/O limits. The +/\-<size>{K,B,M,G,...} notation is recommended. -.sp -For backward compatibility fdisk also accepts the suffixes KB=1000, MB=1000*1000, and so on for GB, TB, PB, EB, ZB and YB. These 10^N suffixes are deprecated. -.SH "SCRIPT FILES" -.sp -\fBfdisk\fP allows reading (by \(aqI\(aq command) \fBsfdisk\fP(8) compatible script files. The script is applied to in\-memory partition table, and then it is possible to modify the partition table before you write it to the device. -.sp -And vice\-versa it is possible to write the current in\-memory disk layout to the script file by command \(aqO\(aq. -.sp -The script files are compatible between \fBcfdisk\fP(8), \fBsfdisk\fP(8), \fBfdisk\fP and other libfdisk applications. For more details see \fBsfdisk\fP(8). -.SH "DISK LABELS" -.sp -\fBGPT (GUID Partition Table)\fP -.RS 4 -GPT is modern standard for the layout of the partition table. GPT uses 64\-bit logical block addresses, checksums, UUIDs and names for partitions and an unlimited number of partitions (although the number of partitions is usually restricted to 128 in many partitioning tools). -.sp -Note that the first sector is still reserved for a \fBprotective MBR\fP in the GPT specification. It prevents MBR\-only partitioning tools from mis\-recognizing and overwriting GPT disks. -.sp -GPT is always a better choice than MBR, especially on modern hardware with a UEFI boot loader. -.RE -.sp -\fBDOS\-type (MBR)\fP -.RS 4 -A DOS\-type partition table can describe an unlimited number of partitions. In sector 0 there is room for the description of 4 partitions (called `primary\(aq). One of these may be an extended partition; this is a box holding logical partitions, with descriptors found in a linked list of sectors, each preceding the corresponding logical partitions. The four primary partitions, present or not, get numbers 1\-4. Logical partitions are numbered starting from 5. -.sp -In a DOS\-type partition table the starting offset and the size of each partition is stored in two ways: as an absolute number of sectors (given in 32 bits), and as a \fBCylinders/Heads/Sectors\fP triple (given in 10+8+6 bits). The former is OK \(em with 512\-byte sectors this will work up to 2 TB. The latter has two problems. First, these C/H/S fields can be filled only when the number of heads and the number of sectors per track are known. And second, even if we know what these numbers should be, the 24 bits that are available do not suffice. DOS uses C/H/S only, Windows uses both, Linux never uses C/H/S. The \fBC/H/S addressing is deprecated\fP and may be unsupported in some later \fBfdisk\fP version. -.sp -\fBPlease, read the DOS\-mode section if you want DOS\-compatible partitions.\fP \fBfdisk\fP does not care about cylinder boundaries by default. -.RE -.sp -\fBBSD/Sun\-type\fP -.RS 4 -A BSD/Sun disklabel can describe 8 partitions, the third of which should be a `whole disk\(aq partition. Do not start a partition that actually uses its first sector (like a swap partition) at cylinder 0, since that will destroy the disklabel. Note that a \fBBSD label\fP is usually nested within a DOS partition. -.RE -.sp -\fBIRIX/SGI\-type\fP -.RS 4 -An IRIX/SGI disklabel can describe 16 partitions, the eleventh of which should be an entire `volume\(aq partition, while the ninth should be labeled `volume header\(aq. The volume header will also cover the partition table, i.e., it starts at block zero and extends by default over five cylinders. The remaining space in the volume header may be used by header directory entries. No partitions may overlap with the volume header. Also do not change its type or make some filesystem on it, since you will lose the partition table. Use this type of label only when working with Linux on IRIX/SGI machines or IRIX/SGI disks under Linux. -.sp -A sync() and an ioctl(BLKRRPART) (rereading the partition table from disk) are performed before exiting when the partition table has been updated. -.RE -.SH "DOS MODE AND DOS 6.X WARNING" -.sp -\fBNote that all this is deprecated. You don\(cqt have to care about things like\fP \fBgeometry and cylinders on modern operating systems. If you really want\fP \fBDOS\-compatible partitioning then you have to enable DOS mode and cylinder\fP \fBunits by using the \(aq\-c=dos \-u=cylinders\(aq fdisk command\-line options.\fP -.sp -The DOS 6.x FORMAT command looks for some information in the first sector of the data area of the partition, and treats this information as more reliable than the information in the partition table. DOS FORMAT expects DOS FDISK to clear the first 512 bytes of the data area of a partition whenever a size change occurs. DOS FORMAT will look at this extra information even if the /U flag is given \(em we consider this a bug in DOS FORMAT and DOS FDISK. -.sp -The bottom line is that if you use \fBfdisk\fP or \fBcfdisk\fP to change the size of a DOS partition table entry, then you must also use \fBdd\fP(1) to \fBzero the first 512 bytes\fP of that partition before using DOS FORMAT to format the partition. For example, if you were using \fBfdisk\fP to make a DOS partition table entry for \fI/dev/sda1\fP, then (after exiting \fBfdisk\fP and rebooting Linux so that the partition table information is valid) you would use the command \fBdd if=/dev/zero of=/dev/sda1 bs=512 count=1\fP to zero the first 512 bytes of the partition. -.sp -\fBfdisk\fP usually obtains the disk geometry automatically. This is not necessarily the physical disk geometry (indeed, modern disks do not really have anything like a physical geometry, certainly not something that can be described in the simplistic Cylinders/Heads/Sectors form), but it is the disk geometry that MS\-DOS uses for the partition table. -.sp -Usually all goes well by default, and there are no problems if Linux is the only system on the disk. However, if the disk has to be shared with other operating systems, it is often a good idea to let an \fBfdisk\fP from another operating system make at least one partition. When Linux boots it looks at the partition table, and tries to deduce what (fake) geometry is required for good cooperation with other systems. -.sp -Whenever a partition table is printed out in DOS mode, a consistency check is performed on the partition table entries. This check verifies that the physical and logical start and end points are identical, and that each partition starts and ends on a cylinder boundary (except for the first partition). -.sp -Some versions of MS\-DOS create a first partition which does not begin on a cylinder boundary, but on sector 2 of the first cylinder. Partitions beginning in cylinder 1 cannot begin on a cylinder boundary, but this is unlikely to cause difficulty unless you have OS/2 on your machine. -.sp -For best results, you should always use an OS\-specific partition table program. For example, you should make DOS partitions with the DOS FDISK program and Linux partitions with the Linux \fBfdisk\fP or Linux \fBcfdisk\fP(8) programs. -.SH "COLORS" -.sp -Implicit coloring can be disabled by an empty file \fI/etc/terminal\-colors.d/fdisk.disable\fP. -.sp -See \fBterminal\-colors.d\fP(5) for more details about colorization configuration. The logical color names supported by \fBfdisk\fP are: -.sp -\fBheader\fP -.RS 4 -The header of the output tables. -.RE -.sp -\fBhelp\-title\fP -.RS 4 -The help section titles. -.RE -.sp -\fBwarn\fP -.RS 4 -The warning messages. -.RE -.sp -\fBwelcome\fP -.RS 4 -The welcome message. -.RE -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -\fBFDISK_DEBUG\fP=all -.RS 4 -enables fdisk debug output. -.RE -.sp -\fBLIBFDISK_DEBUG\fP=all -.RS 4 -enables libfdisk debug output. -.RE -.sp -\fBLIBBLKID_DEBUG\fP=all -.RS 4 -enables libblkid debug output. -.RE -.sp -\fBLIBSMARTCOLS_DEBUG\fP=all -.RS 4 -enables libsmartcols debug output. -.RE -.sp -\fBLIBSMARTCOLS_DEBUG_PADDING\fP=on -.RS 4 -use visible padding characters. -.RE -.sp -\fBLOCK_BLOCK_DEVICE\fP=<mode> -.RS 4 -use exclusive BSD lock. The mode is "1" or "0". See \fB\-\-lock\fP for more details. -.RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "," -.MTO "dave\(atgnu.org" "Davidlohr Bueso" "" -.sp -The original version was written by Andries E. Brouwer, A. V. Le Blanc and others. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBcfdisk\fP(8), -\fBmkfs\fP(8), -\fBpartx\fP(8), -\fBsfdisk\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBfdisk\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/findfs.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/findfs.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 7751c208..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/findfs.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,113 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: findfs -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "FINDFS" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -findfs \- find a filesystem by label or UUID -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBfindfs\fP \fBNAME\fP=\fIvalue\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBfindfs\fP will search the block devices in the system looking for a filesystem or partition with specified tag. The currently supported tags are: -.sp -\fBLABEL\fP=\fI<label>\fP -.RS 4 -Specifies filesystem label. -.RE -.sp -\fBUUID\fP=\fI<uuid>\fP -.RS 4 -Specifies filesystem UUID. -.RE -.sp -\fBPARTUUID\fP=\fI<uuid>\fP -.RS 4 -Specifies partition UUID. This partition identifier is supported for example for GUID Partition Table (GPT) partition tables. -.RE -.sp -\fBPARTLABEL\fP=\fI<label>\fP -.RS 4 -Specifies partition label (name). The partition labels are supported for example for GUID Partition Table (GPT) or MAC partition tables. -.RE -.sp -If the filesystem or partition is found, the device name will be printed on stdout. -.sp -The complete overview about filesystems and partitions you can get for example by -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBlsblk \-\-fs\fP -.sp -\fBpartx \-\-show <disk>\fP -.sp -\fBblkid\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -\fB0\fP -.RS 4 -success -.RE -.sp -\fB1\fP -.RS 4 -label or uuid cannot be found -.RE -.sp -\fB2\fP -.RS 4 -usage error, wrong number of arguments or unknown option -.RE -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -LIBBLKID_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables libblkid debug output. -.RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -\fBfindfs\fP was originally written by \c -.MTO "tytso\(atmit.edu" "Theodore Ts\(cqo" "" -and re\-written for the util\-linux package by -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "." -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBblkid\fP(8), -\fBlsblk\fP(8), -\fBpartx\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBfindfs\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/findmnt.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/findmnt.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 4444e3e8..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/findmnt.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,361 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: findmnt -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "FINDMNT" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -findmnt \- find a filesystem -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBfindmnt\fP [options] -.sp -\fBfindmnt\fP [options] \fIdevice\fP|\fImountpoint\fP -.sp -\fBfindmnt\fP [options] [\fB\-\-source\fP] \fIdevice\fP [\fB\-\-target\fP \fIpath\fP|\fB\-\-mountpoint\fP \fImountpoint\fP] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBfindmnt\fP will list all mounted filesystems or search for a filesystem. The \fBfindmnt\fP command is able to search in \fI/etc/fstab\fP, \fI/etc/mtab\fP or \fI/proc/self/mountinfo\fP. If \fIdevice\fP or \fImountpoint\fP is not given, all filesystems are shown. -.sp -The device may be specified by device name, major:minor numbers, filesystem label or UUID, or partition label or UUID. Note that \fBfindmnt\fP follows \fBmount\fP(8) behavior where a device name may be interpreted as a mountpoint (and vice versa) if the \fB\-\-target\fP, \fB\-\-mountpoint\fP or \fB\-\-source\fP options are not specified. -.sp -The command\-line option \fB\-\-target\fP accepts any file or directory and then \fBfindmnt\fP displays the filesystem for the given path. -.sp -The command prints all mounted filesystems in the tree\-like format by default. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-A\fP, \fB\-\-all\fP -.RS 4 -Disable all built\-in filters and print all filesystems. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-ascii\fP -.RS 4 -Use ascii characters for tree formatting. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-b\fP, \fB\-\-bytes\fP -.RS 4 -Print the SIZE, USED and AVAIL columns in bytes rather than in a human\-readable format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-C\fP, \fB\-\-nocanonicalize\fP -.RS 4 -Do not canonicalize paths at all. This option affects the comparing of paths and the evaluation of tags (LABEL, UUID, etc.). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-canonicalize\fP -.RS 4 -Canonicalize all printed paths. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-D\fP, \fB\-\-df\fP -.RS 4 -Imitate the output of \fBdf\fP(1). This option is equivalent to \fB\-o SOURCE,FSTYPE,SIZE,USED,AVAIL,USE%,TARGET\fP but excludes all pseudo filesystems. Use \fB\-\-all\fP to print all filesystems. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-direction\fP \fIword\fP -.RS 4 -The search direction, either \fBforward\fP or \fBbackward\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-e\fP, \fB\-\-evaluate\fP -.RS 4 -Convert all tags (LABEL, UUID, PARTUUID or PARTLABEL) to the corresponding device names. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-F\fP, \fB\-\-tab\-file\fP \fIpath\fP -.RS 4 -Search in an alternative file. If used with \fB\-\-fstab\fP, \fB\-\-mtab\fP or \fB\-\-kernel\fP, then it overrides the default paths. If specified more than once, then tree\-like output is disabled (see the \fB\-\-list\fP option). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-first\-only\fP -.RS 4 -Print the first matching filesystem only. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-i\fP, \fB\-\-invert\fP -.RS 4 -Invert the sense of matching. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-J\fP, \fB\-\-json\fP -.RS 4 -Use JSON output format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-k\fP, \fB\-\-kernel\fP -.RS 4 -Search in \fI/proc/self/mountinfo\fP. The output is in the tree\-like format. This is the default. The output contains only mount options maintained by kernel (see also \fB\-\-mtab)\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-list\fP -.RS 4 -Use the list output format. This output format is automatically enabled if the output is restricted by the \fB\-t\fP, \fB\-O\fP, \fB\-S\fP or \fB\-T\fP option and the option \fB\-\-submounts\fP is not used or if more that one source file (the option \fB\-F\fP) is specified. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-M\fP, \fB\-\-mountpoint\fP \fIpath\fP -.RS 4 -Explicitly define the mountpoint file or directory. See also \fB\-\-target\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-m\fP, \fB\-\-mtab\fP -.RS 4 -Search in \fI/etc/mtab\fP. The output is in the list format by default (see \fB\-\-tree\fP). The output may include user space mount options. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-N\fP, \fB\-\-task\fP \fItid\fP -.RS 4 -Use alternative namespace \fI/proc/<tid>/mountinfo\fP rather than the default \fI/proc/self/mountinfo\fP. If the option is specified more than once, then tree\-like output is disabled (see the \fB\-\-list\fP option). See also the \fBunshare\fP(1) command. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-noheadings\fP -.RS 4 -Do not print a header line. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-O\fP, \fB\-\-options\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Limit the set of printed filesystems. More than one option may be specified in a comma\-separated list. The \fB\-t\fP and \fB\-O\fP options are cumulative in effect. It is different from \fB\-t\fP in that each option is matched exactly; a leading \fIno\fP at the beginning does not have global meaning. The "no" can used for individual items in the list. The "no" prefix interpretation can be disabled by "+" prefix. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-output\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Define output columns. See the \fB\-\-help\fP output to get a list of the currently supported columns. The \fBTARGET\fP column contains tree formatting if the \fB\-\-list\fP or \fB\-\-raw\fP options are not specified. -.sp -The default list of columns may be extended if \fIlist\fP is specified in the format \fI+list\fP (e.g., \fBfindmnt \-o +PROPAGATION\fP). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-output\-all\fP -.RS 4 -Output almost all available columns. The columns that require \fB\-\-poll\fP are not included. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-P\fP, \fB\-\-pairs\fP -.RS 4 -Produce output in the form of key="value" pairs. All potentially unsafe value characters are hex\-escaped (\(rsx<code>). The key (variable name) will be modified to contain only characters allowed for a shell variable identifiers, for example, FS_OPTIONS and USE_PCT instead of FS\-OPTIONS and USE%. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-poll\fP[\fI=list\fP] -.RS 4 -Monitor changes in the \fI/proc/self/mountinfo\fP file. Supported actions are: mount, umount, remount and move. More than one action may be specified in a comma\-separated list. All actions are monitored by default. -.sp -The time for which \fB\-\-poll\fP will block can be restricted with the \fB\-\-timeout\fP or \fB\-\-first\-only\fP options. -.sp -The standard columns always use the new version of the information from the mountinfo file, except the umount action which is based on the original information cached by \fBfindmnt\fP. The poll mode allows using extra columns: -.sp -\fBACTION\fP -.RS 4 -mount, umount, move or remount action name; this column is enabled by default -.RE -.sp -\fBOLD\-TARGET\fP -.RS 4 -available for umount and move actions -.RE -.sp -\fBOLD\-OPTIONS\fP -.RS 4 -available for umount and remount actions -.RE -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-pseudo\fP -.RS 4 -Print only pseudo filesystems. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-shadow\fP -.RS 4 -Print only filesystems over\-mounted by another filesystem. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-R\fP, \fB\-\-submounts\fP -.RS 4 -Print recursively all submounts for the selected filesystems. The restrictions defined by options \fB\-t\fP, \fB\-O\fP, \fB\-S\fP, \fB\-T\fP and \fB\-\-direction\fP are not applied to submounts. All submounts are always printed in tree\-like order. The option enables the tree\-like output format by default. This option has no effect for \fB\-\-mtab\fP or \fB\-\-fstab\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-raw\fP -.RS 4 -Use raw output format. All potentially unsafe characters are hex\-escaped (\(rsx<code>). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-real\fP -.RS 4 -Print only real filesystems. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-S\fP, \fB\-\-source\fP \fIspec\fP -.RS 4 -Explicitly define the mount source. Supported specifications are \fIdevice\fP, \fImaj\fP\fB:\fP\fImin\fP, \fBLABEL=\fP\fIlabel\fP, \fBUUID=\fP\fIuuid\fP, \fBPARTLABEL=\fP\fIlabel\fP and \fBPARTUUID=\fP\fIuuid\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-fstab\fP -.RS 4 -Search in \fI/etc/fstab\fP. The output is in the list format (see \fB\-\-list\fP). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-T\fP, \fB\-\-target\fP \fIpath\fP -.RS 4 -Define the mount target. If \fIpath\fP is not a mountpoint file or directory, then \fBfindmnt\fP checks the \fIpath\fP elements in reverse order to get the mountpoint (this feature is supported only when searching in kernel files and unsupported for \fB\-\-fstab\fP). It\(cqs recommended to use the option \fB\-\-mountpoint\fP when checks of \fIpath\fP elements are unwanted and \fIpath\fP is a strictly specified mountpoint. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-types\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Limit the set of printed filesystems. More than one type may be specified in a comma\-separated list. The list of filesystem types can be prefixed with \fBno\fP to specify the filesystem types on which no action should be taken. For more details see \fBmount\fP(8). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-tree\fP -.RS 4 -Enable tree\-like output if possible. The options is silently ignored for tables where is missing child\-parent relation (e.g., fstab). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-shadowed\fP -.RS 4 -Print only filesystems over\-mounted by another filesystem. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-U\fP, \fB\-\-uniq\fP -.RS 4 -Ignore filesystems with duplicate mount targets, thus effectively skipping over\-mounted mount points. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-u\fP, \fB\-\-notruncate\fP -.RS 4 -Do not truncate text in columns. The default is to not truncate the \fBTARGET\fP, \fBSOURCE\fP, \fBUUID\fP, \fBLABEL\fP, \fBPARTUUID\fP, \fBPARTLABEL\fP columns. This option disables text truncation also in all other columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-nofsroot\fP -.RS 4 -Do not print a [/dir] in the SOURCE column for bind mounts or btrfs subvolumes. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-w\fP, \fB\-\-timeout\fP \fImilliseconds\fP -.RS 4 -Specify an upper limit on the time for which \fB\-\-poll\fP will block, in milliseconds. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-x\fP, \fB\-\-verify\fP -.RS 4 -Check mount table content. The default is to verify \fI/etc/fstab\fP parsability and usability. It\(cqs possible to use this option also with \fB\-\-tab\-file\fP. It\(cqs possible to specify source (device) or target (mountpoint) to filter mount table. The option \fB\-\-verbose\fP forces findmnt to print more details. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Force findmnt to print more information (\fB\-\-verify\fP only for now). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-vfs\-all\fP -.RS 4 -When used with \fBVFS\-OPTIONS\fP column, print all VFS (fs\-independent) flags. This option is designed for auditing purposes to list also default VFS kernel mount options which are normally not listed. -.RE -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -LIBMOUNT_FSTAB=<path> -.RS 4 -overrides the default location of the fstab file -.RE -.sp -LIBMOUNT_MTAB=<path> -.RS 4 -overrides the default location of the mtab file -.RE -.sp -LIBMOUNT_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables libmount debug output -.RE -.sp -LIBSMARTCOLS_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables libsmartcols debug output -.RE -.sp -LIBSMARTCOLS_DEBUG_PADDING=on -.RS 4 -use visible padding characters. -.RE -.SH "EXAMPLES" -.sp -\fBfindmnt \-\-fstab \-t nfs\fP -.RS 4 -Prints all NFS filesystems defined in \fI/etc/fstab\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBfindmnt \-\-fstab /mnt/foo\fP -.RS 4 -Prints all \fI/etc/fstab\fP filesystems where the mountpoint directory is \fI/mnt/foo\fP. It also prints bind mounts where \fI/mnt/foo\fP is a source. -.RE -.sp -\fBfindmnt \-\-fstab \-\-target /mnt/foo\fP -.RS 4 -Prints all \fI/etc/fstab\fP filesystems where the mountpoint directory is \fI/mnt/foo\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBfindmnt \-\-fstab \-\-evaluate\fP -.RS 4 -Prints all \fI/etc/fstab\fP filesystems and converts LABEL= and UUID= tags to the real device names. -.RE -.sp -\fBfindmnt \-n \-\-raw \-\-evaluate \-\-output=target LABEL=/boot\fP -.RS 4 -Prints only the mountpoint where the filesystem with label "/boot" is mounted. -.RE -.sp -\fBfindmnt \-\-poll \-\-mountpoint /mnt/foo\fP -.RS 4 -Monitors mount, unmount, remount and move on \fI/mnt/foo\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBfindmnt \-\-poll=umount \-\-first\-only \-\-mountpoint /mnt/foo\fP -.RS 4 -Waits for \fI/mnt/foo\fP unmount. -.RE -.sp -\fBfindmnt \-\-poll=remount \-t ext3 \-O ro\fP -.RS 4 -Monitors remounts to read\-only mode on all ext3 filesystems. -.RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBfstab\fP(5), -\fBmount\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBfindmnt\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/fsck.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/fsck.8 deleted file mode 100644 index a136f2cb..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/fsck.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,250 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: fsck -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-01-06 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "FSCK" "8" "2022-01-06" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -fsck \- check and repair a Linux filesystem -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBfsck\fP [\fB\-lsAVRTMNP\fP] [\fB\-r\fP [\fIfd\fP]] [\fB\-C\fP [\fIfd\fP]] [\fB\-t\fP \fIfstype\fP] [\fIfilesystem\fP...] [\fB\-\-\fP] [\fIfs\-specific\-options\fP] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBfsck\fP is used to check and optionally repair one or more Linux filesystems. \fIfilesystem\fP can be a device name (e.g., \fI/dev/hdc1\fP, \fI/dev/sdb2\fP), a mount point (e.g., \fI/\fP, \fI/usr\fP, \fI/home\fP), or an filesystem label or UUID specifier (e.g., UUID=8868abf6\-88c5\-4a83\-98b8\-bfc24057f7bd or LABEL=root). Normally, the \fBfsck\fP program will try to handle filesystems on different physical disk drives in parallel to reduce the total amount of time needed to check all of them. -.sp -If no filesystems are specified on the command line, and the \fB\-A\fP option is not specified, \fBfsck\fP will default to checking filesystems in \fI/etc/fstab\fP serially. This is equivalent to the \fB\-As\fP options. -.sp -The exit status returned by \fBfsck\fP is the sum of the following conditions: -.sp -\fB0\fP -.RS 4 -No errors -.RE -.sp -\fB1\fP -.RS 4 -Filesystem errors corrected -.RE -.sp -\fB2\fP -.RS 4 -System should be rebooted -.RE -.sp -\fB4\fP -.RS 4 -Filesystem errors left uncorrected -.RE -.sp -\fB8\fP -.RS 4 -Operational error -.RE -.sp -\fB16\fP -.RS 4 -Usage or syntax error -.RE -.sp -\fB32\fP -.RS 4 -Checking canceled by user request -.RE -.sp -\fB128\fP -.RS 4 -Shared\-library error -.RE -.sp -The exit status returned when multiple filesystems are checked is the bit\-wise OR of the exit statuses for each filesystem that is checked. -.sp -In actuality, \fBfsck\fP is simply a front\-end for the various filesystem checkers (\fBfsck\fP.\fIfstype\fP) available under Linux. The filesystem\-specific checker is searched for in the \fBPATH\fP environment variable. If the \fBPATH\fP is undefined then fallback to \fI/sbin\fP. -.sp -Please see the filesystem\-specific checker manual pages for further details. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-l\fP -.RS 4 -Create an exclusive \fBflock\fP(2) lock file (\fI/run/fsck/<diskname>.lock\fP) for whole\-disk device. This option can be used with one device only (this means that \fB\-A\fP and \fB\-l\fP are mutually exclusive). This option is recommended when more \fBfsck\fP instances are executed in the same time. The option is ignored when used for multiple devices or for non\-rotating disks. \fBfsck\fP does not lock underlying devices when executed to check stacked devices (e.g. MD or DM) \- this feature is not implemented yet. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP [\fIfd\fP] -.RS 4 -Report certain statistics for each fsck when it completes. These statistics include the exit status, the maximum run set size (in kilobytes), the elapsed all\-clock time and the user and system CPU time used by the fsck run. For example: -.sp -\fB/dev/sda1: status 0, rss 92828, real 4.002804, user 2.677592, sys 0.86186\fP -.sp -GUI front\-ends may specify a file descriptor \fIfd\fP, in which case the progress bar information will be sent to that file descriptor in a machine parsable format. For example: -.sp -\fB/dev/sda1 0 92828 4.002804 2.677592 0.86186\fP -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP -.RS 4 -Serialize \fBfsck\fP operations. This is a good idea if you are checking multiple filesystems and the checkers are in an interactive mode. (Note: \fBe2fsck\fP(8) runs in an interactive mode by default. To make \fBe2fsck\fP(8) run in a non\-interactive mode, you must either specify the \fB\-p\fP or \fB\-a\fP option, if you wish for errors to be corrected automatically, or the \fB\-n\fP option if you do not.) -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP \fIfslist\fP -.RS 4 -Specifies the type(s) of filesystem to be checked. When the \fB\-A\fP flag is specified, only filesystems that match \fIfslist\fP are checked. The \fIfslist\fP parameter is a comma\-separated list of filesystems and options specifiers. All of the filesystems in this comma\-separated list may be prefixed by a negation operator \(aq\fBno\fP\(aq or \(aq\fB!\fP\(aq, which requests that only those filesystems not listed in \fIfslist\fP will be checked. If none of the filesystems in \fIfslist\fP is prefixed by a negation operator, then only those listed filesystems will be checked. -.sp -Options specifiers may be included in the comma\-separated \fIfslist\fP. They must have the format \fBopts=\fP\fIfs\-option\fP. If an options specifier is present, then only filesystems which contain \fIfs\-option\fP in their mount options field of \fI/etc/fstab\fP will be checked. If the options specifier is prefixed by a negation operator, then only those filesystems that do not have \fIfs\-option\fP in their mount options field of \fI/etc/fstab\fP will be checked. -.sp -For example, if \fBopts=ro\fP appears in \fIfslist\fP, then only filesystems listed in \fI/etc/fstab\fP with the \fBro\fP option will be checked. -.sp -For compatibility with Mandrake distributions whose boot scripts depend upon an unauthorized UI change to the \fBfsck\fP program, if a filesystem type of \fBloop\fP is found in \fIfslist\fP, it is treated as if \fBopts=loop\fP were specified as an argument to the \fB\-t\fP option. -.sp -Normally, the filesystem type is deduced by searching for \fIfilesys\fP in the \fI/etc/fstab\fP file and using the corresponding entry. If the type cannot be deduced, and there is only a single filesystem given as an argument to the \fB\-t\fP option, \fBfsck\fP will use the specified filesystem type. If this type is not available, then the default filesystem type (currently ext2) is used. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-A\fP -.RS 4 -Walk through the \fI/etc/fstab\fP file and try to check all filesystems in one run. This option is typically used from the \fI/etc/rc\fP system initialization file, instead of multiple commands for checking a single filesystem. -.sp -The root filesystem will be checked first unless the \fB\-P\fP option is specified (see below). After that, filesystems will be checked in the order specified by the \fIfs_passno\fP (the sixth) field in the \fI/etc/fstab\fP file. Filesystems with a \fIfs_passno\fP value of 0 are skipped and are not checked at all. Filesystems with a \fIfs_passno\fP value of greater than zero will be checked in order, with filesystems with the lowest \fIfs_passno\fP number being checked first. If there are multiple filesystems with the same pass number, \fBfsck\fP will attempt to check them in parallel, although it will avoid running multiple filesystem checks on the same physical disk. -.sp -\fBfsck\fP does not check stacked devices (RAIDs, dm\-crypt, ...) in parallel with any other device. See below for \fBFSCK_FORCE_ALL_PARALLEL\fP setting. The \fI/sys\fP filesystem is used to determine dependencies between devices. -.sp -Hence, a very common configuration in \fI/etc/fstab\fP files is to set the root filesystem to have a \fIfs_passno\fP value of 1 and to set all other filesystems to have a \fIfs_passno\fP value of 2. This will allow \fBfsck\fP to automatically run filesystem checkers in parallel if it is advantageous to do so. System administrators might choose not to use this configuration if they need to avoid multiple filesystem checks running in parallel for some reason \- for example, if the machine in question is short on memory so that excessive paging is a concern. -.sp -\fBfsck\fP normally does not check whether the device actually exists before calling a filesystem specific checker. Therefore non\-existing devices may cause the system to enter filesystem repair mode during boot if the filesystem specific checker returns a fatal error. The \fI/etc/fstab\fP mount option \fBnofail\fP may be used to have \fBfsck\fP skip non\-existing devices. \fBfsck\fP also skips non\-existing devices that have the special filesystem type \fBauto\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-C\fP [\fIfd\fP] -.RS 4 -Display completion/progress bars for those filesystem checkers (currently only for ext[234]) which support them. \fBfsck\fP will manage the filesystem checkers so that only one of them will display a progress bar at a time. GUI front\-ends may specify a file descriptor \fIfd\fP, in which case the progress bar information will be sent to that file descriptor. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-M\fP -.RS 4 -Do not check mounted filesystems and return an exit status of 0 for mounted filesystems. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-N\fP -.RS 4 -Don\(cqt execute, just show what would be done. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-P\fP -.RS 4 -When the \fB\-A\fP flag is set, check the root filesystem in parallel with the other filesystems. This is not the safest thing in the world to do, since if the root filesystem is in doubt things like the \fBe2fsck\fP(8) executable might be corrupted! This option is mainly provided for those sysadmins who don\(cqt want to repartition the root filesystem to be small and compact (which is really the right solution). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-R\fP -.RS 4 -When checking all filesystems with the \fB\-A\fP flag, skip the root filesystem. (This is useful in case the root filesystem has already been mounted read\-write.) -.RE -.sp -\fB\-T\fP -.RS 4 -Don\(cqt show the title on startup. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP -.RS 4 -Produce verbose output, including all filesystem\-specific commands that are executed. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-?\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.SH "FILESYSTEM SPECIFIC OPTIONS" -.sp -\fBOptions which are not understood by fsck are passed to the filesystem\-specific checker!\fP -.sp -These options \fBmust\fP not take arguments, as there is no way for \fBfsck\fP to be able to properly guess which options take arguments and which don\(cqt. -.sp -Options and arguments which follow the \fB\-\-\fP are treated as filesystem\-specific options to be passed to the filesystem\-specific checker. -.sp -Please note that \fBfsck\fP is not designed to pass arbitrarily complicated options to filesystem\-specific checkers. If you\(cqre doing something complicated, please just execute the filesystem\-specific checker directly. If you pass \fBfsck\fP some horribly complicated options and arguments, and it doesn\(cqt do what you expect, \fBdon\(cqt bother reporting it as a bug.\fP You\(cqre almost certainly doing something that you shouldn\(cqt be doing with \fBfsck\fP. Options to different filesystem\-specific fsck\(cqs are not standardized. -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -The \fBfsck\fP program\(cqs behavior is affected by the following environment variables: -.sp -\fBFSCK_FORCE_ALL_PARALLEL\fP -.RS 4 -If this environment variable is set, \fBfsck\fP will attempt to check all of the specified filesystems in parallel, regardless of whether the filesystems appear to be on the same device. (This is useful for RAID systems or high\-end storage systems such as those sold by companies such as IBM or EMC.) Note that the \fIfs_passno\fP value is still used. -.RE -.sp -\fBFSCK_MAX_INST\fP -.RS 4 -This environment variable will limit the maximum number of filesystem checkers that can be running at one time. This allows configurations which have a large number of disks to avoid \fBfsck\fP starting too many filesystem checkers at once, which might overload CPU and memory resources available on the system. If this value is zero, then an unlimited number of processes can be spawned. This is currently the default, but future versions of \fBfsck\fP may attempt to automatically determine how many filesystem checks can be run based on gathering accounting data from the operating system. -.RE -.sp -\fBPATH\fP -.RS 4 -The \fBPATH\fP environment variable is used to find filesystem checkers. -.RE -.sp -\fBFSTAB_FILE\fP -.RS 4 -This environment variable allows the system administrator to override the standard location of the \fI/etc/fstab\fP file. It is also useful for developers who are testing \fBfsck\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBLIBBLKID_DEBUG=all\fP -.RS 4 -enables libblkid debug output. -.RE -.sp -\fBLIBMOUNT_DEBUG=all\fP -.RS 4 -enables libmount debug output. -.RE -.SH "FILES" -.sp -\fI/etc/fstab\fP -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "tytso\(atmit.edu>" "Theodore Ts\(cqo" "," -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBfstab\fP(5), -\fBmkfs\fP(8), -\fBfsck.ext2\fP(8) or \fBfsck.ext3\fP(8) or \fBe2fsck\fP(8), -\fBfsck.cramfs\fP(8), -\fBfsck.jfs\fP(8), -\fBfsck.nfs\fP(8), -\fBfsck.minix\fP(8), -\fBfsck.msdos\fP(8), -\fBfsck.vfat\fP(8), -\fBfsck.xfs\fP(8), -\fBreiserfsck\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBfsck\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/fsck.cramfs.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/fsck.cramfs.8 deleted file mode 100644 index b99968ae..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/fsck.cramfs.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,106 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: fsck.cramfs -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "FSCK.CRAMFS" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -fsck.cramfs \- fsck compressed ROM file system -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBfsck.cramfs\fP [options] \fIfile\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBfsck.cramfs\fP is used to check the cramfs file system. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Enable verbose messaging. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-b\fP, \fB\-\-blocksize\fP \fIblocksize\fP -.RS 4 -Use this blocksize, defaults to page size. Must be equal to what was set at creation time. Only used for \fB\-\-extract\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-extract\fP[=\fIdirectory\fP] -.RS 4 -Test to uncompress the whole file system. Optionally extract contents of the \fIfile\fP to \fIdirectory\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-a\fP -.RS 4 -This option is silently ignored. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-y\fP -.RS 4 -This option is silently ignored. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -\fB0\fP -.RS 4 -success -.RE -.sp -\fB4\fP -.RS 4 -file system was left uncorrected -.RE -.sp -\fB8\fP -.RS 4 -operation error, such as unable to allocate memory -.RE -.sp -\fB16\fP -.RS 4 -usage information was printed -.RE -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBmount\fP(8), -\fBmkfs.cramfs\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBfsck.cramfs\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/fsck.minix.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/fsck.minix.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 13f5d74f..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/fsck.minix.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,199 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: fsck.minix -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "FSCK.MINIX" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -fsck.minix \- check consistency of Minix filesystem -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBfsck.minix\fP [options] \fIdevice\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBfsck.minix\fP performs a consistency check for the Linux MINIX filesystem. -.sp -The program assumes the filesystem is quiescent. \fBfsck.minix\fP should not be used on a mounted device unless you can be sure nobody is writing to it. Remember that the kernel can write to device when it searches for files. -.sp -The \fIdevice\fP name will usually have the following form: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.TS -allbox tab(:); -lt lt. -T{ -.sp -/dev/hda[1\-63] -T}:T{ -.sp -IDE disk 1 -T} -T{ -.sp -/dev/hdb[1\-63] -T}:T{ -.sp -IDE disk 2 -T} -T{ -.sp -/dev/sda[1\-15] -T}:T{ -.sp -SCSI disk 1 -T} -T{ -.sp -/dev/sdb[1\-15] -T}:T{ -.sp -SCSI disk 2 -T} -.TE -.sp -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -If the filesystem was changed, i.e., repaired, then \fBfsck.minix\fP will print "FILE SYSTEM HAS CHANGED" and will \fBsync\fP(2) three times before exiting. There is \fIno\fP need to reboot after check. -.SH "WARNING" -.sp -\fBfsck.minix\fP should \fBnot\fP be used on a mounted filesystem. Using \fBfsck.minix\fP on a mounted filesystem is very dangerous, due to the possibility that deleted files are still in use, and can seriously damage a perfectly good filesystem! If you absolutely have to run \fBfsck.minix\fP on a mounted filesystem, such as the root filesystem, make sure nothing is writing to the disk, and that no files are "zombies" waiting for deletion. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-list\fP -.RS 4 -List all filenames. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-repair\fP -.RS 4 -Perform interactive repairs. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-auto\fP -.RS 4 -Perform automatic repairs. This option implies \fB\-\-repair\fP and serves to answer all of the questions asked with the default. Note that this can be extremely dangerous in the case of extensive filesystem damage. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Be verbose. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-super\fP -.RS 4 -Output super\-block information. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-m\fP, \fB\-\-uncleared\fP -.RS 4 -Activate MINIX\-like "mode not cleared" warnings. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-force\fP -.RS 4 -Force a filesystem check even if the filesystem was marked as valid. Marking is done by the kernel when the filesystem is unmounted. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "DIAGNOSTICS" -.sp -There are numerous diagnostic messages. The ones mentioned here are the most commonly seen in normal usage. -.sp -If the device does not exist, \fBfsck.minix\fP will print "unable to read super block". If the device exists, but is not a MINIX filesystem, \fBfsck.minix\fP will print "bad magic number in super\-block". -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -The exit status returned by \fBfsck.minix\fP is the sum of the following: -.sp -\fB0\fP -.RS 4 -No errors -.RE -.sp -\fB3\fP -.RS 4 -Filesystem errors corrected, system should be rebooted if filesystem was mounted -.RE -.sp -\fB4\fP -.RS 4 -Filesystem errors left uncorrected -.RE -.sp -\fB7\fP -.RS 4 -Combination of exit statuses 3 and 4 -.RE -.sp -\fB8\fP -.RS 4 -Operational error -.RE -.sp -\fB16\fP -.RS 4 -Usage or syntax error -.RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "torvalds\(atcs.helsinki.fi" "Linus Torvalds" "." -Exit status values by -.MTO "faith\(atcs.unc.edu" "Rik Faith" "" -Added support for filesystem valid flag: -.MTO "greg%wind.uucp\(atplains.nodak.edu" "Dr. Wettstein" "." -Check to prevent fsck of mounted filesystem added by -.MTO "quinlan\(atyggdrasil.com" "Daniel Quinlan" "." -Minix v2 fs support by -.MTO "schwab\(atissan.informatik.uni\-dortmund.de" "Andreas Schwab" "," -updated by -.MTO "janl\(atmath.uio.no" "Nicolai Langfeldt" "." -Portability patch by -.MTO "rmk\(atecs.soton.ac.uk" "Russell King" "." -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBfsck\fP(8), -\fBfsck.ext2\fP(8), -\fBmkfs\fP(8), -\fBmkfs.ext2\fP(8), -\fBmkfs.minix\fP(8), -\fBreboot\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBfsck.minix\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/fsfreeze.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/fsfreeze.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 5647deaf..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/fsfreeze.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,88 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: fsfreeze -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "FSFREEZE" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -fsfreeze \- suspend access to a filesystem (Ext3/4, ReiserFS, JFS, XFS) -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBfsfreeze\fP \fB\-\-freeze\fP|\fB\-\-unfreeze\fP \fImountpoint\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBfsfreeze\fP suspends or resumes access to a filesystem. -.sp -\fBfsfreeze\fP halts any new access to the filesystem and creates a stable image on disk. \fBfsfreeze\fP is intended to be used with hardware RAID devices that support the creation of snapshots. -.sp -\fBfsfreeze\fP is unnecessary for \fBdevice\-mapper\fP devices. The device\-mapper (and LVM) automatically freezes a filesystem on the device when a snapshot creation is requested. For more details see the \fBdmsetup\fP(8) man page. -.sp -The \fImountpoint\fP argument is the pathname of the directory where the filesystem is mounted. The filesystem must be mounted to be frozen (see \fBmount\fP(8)). -.sp -Note that access\-time updates are also suspended if the filesystem is mounted with the traditional atime behavior (mount option \fBstrictatime\fP, for more details see \fBmount\fP(8)). -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-freeze\fP -.RS 4 -This option requests the specified a filesystem to be frozen from new modifications. When this is selected, all ongoing transactions in the filesystem are allowed to complete, new write system calls are halted, other calls which modify the filesystem are halted, and all dirty data, metadata, and log information are written to disk. Any process attempting to write to the frozen filesystem will block waiting for the filesystem to be unfrozen. -.sp -Note that even after freezing, the on\-disk filesystem can contain information on files that are still in the process of unlinking. These files will not be unlinked until the filesystem is unfrozen or a clean mount of the snapshot is complete. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-u\fP, \fB\-\-unfreeze\fP -.RS 4 -This option is used to un\-freeze the filesystem and allow operations to continue. Any filesystem modifications that were blocked by the freeze are unblocked and allowed to complete. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "FILESYSTEM SUPPORT" -.sp -This command will work only if filesystem supports has support for freezing. List of these filesystems include (2016\-12\-18) \fBbtrfs\fP, \fBext2/3/4\fP, \fBf2fs\fP, \fBjfs\fP, \fBnilfs2\fP, \fBreiserfs\fP, and \fBxfs\fP. Previous list may be incomplete, as more filesystems get support. If in doubt easiest way to know if a filesystem has support is create a small loopback mount and test freezing it. -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -This man page is based on \fBxfs_freeze\fP(8). -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -Written by Hajime Taira. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBmount\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBfsfreeze\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/fstrim.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/fstrim.8 deleted file mode 100644 index f67e3691..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/fstrim.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,144 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: fstrim -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "FSTRIM" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -fstrim \- discard unused blocks on a mounted filesystem -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBfstrim\fP [\fB\-Aa\fP] [\fB\-o\fP \fIoffset\fP] [\fB\-l\fP \fIlength\fP] [\fB\-m\fP \fIminimum\-size\fP] [\fB\-v\fP \fImountpoint\fP] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBfstrim\fP is used on a mounted filesystem to discard (or "trim") blocks which are not in use by the filesystem. This is useful for solid\-state drives (SSDs) and thinly\-provisioned storage. -.sp -By default, \fBfstrim\fP will discard all unused blocks in the filesystem. Options may be used to modify this behavior based on range or size, as explained below. -.sp -The \fImountpoint\fP argument is the pathname of the directory where the filesystem is mounted. -.sp -Running \fBfstrim\fP frequently, or even using \fBmount \-o discard\fP, might negatively affect the lifetime of poor\-quality SSD devices. For most desktop and server systems a sufficient trimming frequency is once a week. Note that not all devices support a queued trim, so each trim command incurs a performance penalty on whatever else might be trying to use the disk at the time. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -The \fIoffset\fP, \fIlength\fP, and \fIminimum\-size\fP arguments may be followed by the multiplicative suffixes KiB (=1024), MiB (=1024*1024), and so on for GiB, TiB, PiB, EiB, ZiB and YiB (the "iB" is optional, e.g., "K" has the same meaning as "KiB") or the suffixes KB (=1000), MB (=1000*1000), and so on for GB, TB, PB, EB, ZB and YB. -.sp -\fB\-A, \-\-fstab\fP -.RS 4 -Trim all mounted filesystems mentioned in \fI/etc/fstab\fP on devices that support the discard operation. The root filesystem is determined from kernel command line if missing in the file. The other supplied options, like \fB\-\-offset\fP, \fB\-\-length\fP and \fB\-\-minimum\fP, are applied to all these devices. Errors from filesystems that do not support the discard operation, read\-only devices and read\-only filesystems are silently ignored. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-a, \-\-all\fP -.RS 4 -Trim all mounted filesystems on devices that support the discard operation. The other supplied options, like \fB\-\-offset\fP, \fB\-\-length\fP and \fB\-\-minimum\fP, are applied to all these devices. Errors from filesystems that do not support the discard operation, read\-only devices and read\-only filesystems are silently ignored. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n, \-\-dry\-run\fP -.RS 4 -This option does everything apart from actually call \fBFITRIM\fP ioctl. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o, \-\-offset\fP \fIoffset\fP -.RS 4 -Byte offset in the filesystem from which to begin searching for free blocks to discard. The default value is zero, starting at the beginning of the filesystem. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l, \-\-length\fP \fIlength\fP -.RS 4 -The number of bytes (after the starting point) to search for free blocks to discard. If the specified value extends past the end of the filesystem, \fBfstrim\fP will stop at the filesystem size boundary. The default value extends to the end of the filesystem. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-I, \-\-listed\-in\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Specifies a colon\-separated list of files in fstab or kernel mountinfo format. All missing or empty files are silently ignored. The evaluation of the \fIlist\fP stops after first non\-empty file. For example: -.sp -\fB\-\-listed\-in /etc/fstab:/proc/self/mountinfo\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-m, \-\-minimum\fP \fIminimum\-size\fP -.RS 4 -Minimum contiguous free range to discard, in bytes. (This value is internally rounded up to a multiple of the filesystem block size.) Free ranges smaller than this will be ignored and fstrim will adjust the minimum if it\(cqs smaller than the device\(cqs minimum, and report that (fstrim_range.minlen) back to userspace. By increasing this value, the fstrim operation will complete more quickly for filesystems with badly fragmented freespace, although not all blocks will be discarded. The default value is zero, discarding every free block. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v, \-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Verbose execution. With this option \fBfstrim\fP will output the number of bytes passed from the filesystem down the block stack to the device for potential discard. This number is a maximum discard amount from the storage device\(cqs perspective, because \fIFITRIM\fP ioctl called repeated will keep sending the same sectors for discard repeatedly. -.sp -\fBfstrim\fP will report the same potential discard bytes each time, but only sectors which had been written to between the discards would actually be discarded by the storage device. Further, the kernel block layer reserves the right to adjust the discard ranges to fit raid stripe geometry, non\-trim capable devices in a LVM setup, etc. These reductions would not be reflected in fstrim_range.len (the \fB\-\-length\fP option). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-quiet\-unsupported\fP -.RS 4 -Suppress error messages if trim operation (ioctl) is unsupported. This option is meant to be used in systemd service file or in cron scripts to hide warnings that are result of known problems, such as NTFS driver reporting \fIBad file descriptor\fP when device is mounted read\-only, or lack of file system support for ioctl FITRIM call. This option also cleans exit status when unsupported filesystem specified on fstrim command line. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -0 -.RS 4 -success -.RE -.sp -1 -.RS 4 -failure -.RE -.sp -32 -.RS 4 -all failed -.RE -.sp -64 -.RS 4 -some filesystem discards have succeeded, some failed -.RE -.sp -The command \fBfstrim \-\-all\fP returns 0 (all succeeded), 32 (all failed) or 64 (some failed, some succeeded). -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "lczerner\(atredhat.com" "Lukas Czerner" "," -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBblkdiscard\fP(8), -\fBmount\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBfstrim\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-bios-setup.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-bios-setup.8 index 5f2bc8a3..3e0cbccd 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-bios-setup.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-bios-setup.8 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.5. -.TH GRUB-BIOS-SETUP "8" "January 2024" "grub-bios-setup (GRUB2) 2.12" "System Administration Utilities" +.TH GRUB-BIOS-SETUP "8" "March 2024" "grub-bios-setup (GRUB2) 2.12" "System Administration Utilities" .SH NAME grub-bios-setup \- set up a device to boot using GRUB .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-install.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-install.8 index 982b42ab..3751ea28 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-install.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-install.8 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.5. -.TH GRUB-INSTALL "8" "January 2024" "grub-install (GRUB2) 2.12" "System Administration Utilities" +.TH GRUB-INSTALL "8" "March 2024" "grub-install (GRUB2) 2.12" "System Administration Utilities" .SH NAME grub-install \- install GRUB to a device .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-macbless.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-macbless.8 index 55500a02..4479a16d 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-macbless.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-macbless.8 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.5. -.TH GRUB-MACBLESS "8" "January 2024" "grub-macbless (GRUB2) 2.12" "System Administration Utilities" +.TH GRUB-MACBLESS "8" "March 2024" "grub-macbless (GRUB2) 2.12" "System Administration Utilities" .SH NAME grub-macbless \- bless a mac file/directory .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-mkconfig.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-mkconfig.8 index a5f5dcfa..be87e329 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-mkconfig.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-mkconfig.8 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.5. -.TH GRUB-MKCONFIG "8" "January 2024" "grub-mkconfig (GRUB2) 2.12" "System Administration Utilities" +.TH GRUB-MKCONFIG "8" "March 2024" "grub-mkconfig (GRUB2) 2.12" "System Administration Utilities" .SH NAME grub-mkconfig \- generate a GRUB configuration file .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-ofpathname.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-ofpathname.8 index 06ec60f5..ccb7c0e9 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-ofpathname.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-ofpathname.8 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.5. -.TH GRUB-OFPATHNAME "8" "January 2024" "grub-ofpathname 2.12" "System Administration Utilities" +.TH GRUB-OFPATHNAME "8" "March 2024" "grub-ofpathname 2.12" "System Administration Utilities" .SH NAME grub-ofpathname \- find OpenBOOT path for a device .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-probe.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-probe.8 index e31afc65..bc7680b3 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-probe.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-probe.8 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.5. -.TH GRUB-PROBE "8" "January 2024" "grub-probe (GRUB2) 2.12" "System Administration Utilities" +.TH GRUB-PROBE "8" "March 2024" "grub-probe (GRUB2) 2.12" "System Administration Utilities" .SH NAME grub-probe \- probe device information for GRUB .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-reboot.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-reboot.8 index 2cdb2fbd..44f4e9f3 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-reboot.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-reboot.8 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.5. -.TH GRUB-REBOOT "8" "January 2024" "grub-reboot (GRUB2) 2.12" "System Administration Utilities" +.TH GRUB-REBOOT "8" "March 2024" "grub-reboot (GRUB2) 2.12" "System Administration Utilities" .SH NAME grub-reboot \- set the default boot entry for GRUB, for the next boot only .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-set-default.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-set-default.8 index c99167a3..3dc9cc2d 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-set-default.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-set-default.8 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.5. -.TH GRUB-SET-DEFAULT "8" "January 2024" "grub-set-default (GRUB2) 2.12" "System Administration Utilities" +.TH GRUB-SET-DEFAULT "8" "March 2024" "grub-set-default (GRUB2) 2.12" "System Administration Utilities" .SH NAME grub-set-default \- set the saved default boot entry for GRUB .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-sparc64-setup.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-sparc64-setup.8 index 96a6d237..678356a7 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-sparc64-setup.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-sparc64-setup.8 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.5. -.TH GRUB-SPARC64-SETUP "8" "January 2024" "grub-sparc64-setup (GRUB2) 2.12" "System Administration Utilities" +.TH GRUB-SPARC64-SETUP "8" "March 2024" "grub-sparc64-setup (GRUB2) 2.12" "System Administration Utilities" .SH NAME grub-sparc64-setup \- set up a device to boot using GRUB .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/gssd.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/gssd.8 index 87eef024..2a5384d3 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/gssd.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/gssd.8 @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ rpc.gssd \- RPCSEC_GSS daemon .SH SYNOPSIS .B rpc.gssd -.RB [ \-DfMnlvr ] +.RB [ \-DfMnlvrHC ] .RB [ \-k .IR keytab ] .RB [ \-p @@ -17,6 +17,10 @@ rpc.gssd \- RPCSEC_GSS daemon .IR ccachedir ] .RB [ \-t .IR timeout ] +.RB [ \-T +.IR timeout ] +.RB [ \-U +.IR timeout ] .RB [ \-R .IR realm ] .SH INTRODUCTION @@ -45,22 +49,20 @@ is known as a .BR kerberos (1) for more on principals). .P -For certain operations, a credential is required -which represents no user, -is otherwise unprivileged, -and is always available. -This is referred to as a +Certain operations require a credential that +represents no particular user +or +represents the host itself. +This kind of credential is called a .IR "machine credential" . .P -Machine credentials are typically established using a -.IR "service principal" , -whose encrypted password, called its -.IR key , -is stored in a file, called a -.IR keytab , -to avoid requiring a user prompt. -A machine credential effectively does not expire because the system -can renew it as needed without user intervention. +A host establishes its machine credential using a +.I "service principal" +whose encrypted password is stored in a local file known as a +.IR keytab . +A machine credential remains effective +without user intervention +as long as the host can renew it. .P Once obtained, credentials are typically stored in local temporary files with well-known pathnames. @@ -93,30 +95,12 @@ See the description of the .B -d option for details. .SS Machine Credentials -A user credential is established by a user and -is then shared with the kernel and -.BR rpc.gssd . -A machine credential is established by -.B rpc.gssd -for the kernel when there is no user. -Therefore -.B rpc.gssd -must already have the materials on hand to establish this credential -without requiring user intervention. -.P .B rpc.gssd -searches the local system's keytab for a principal and key to use -to establish the machine credential. -By default, -.B rpc.gssd -assumes the file -.I /etc/krb5.keytab -contains principals and keys that can be used to obtain machine credentials. -.P -.B rpc.gssd -searches in the following order for a principal to use. -The first matching credential is used. -For the search, <hostname> and <REALM> are replaced with the local +searches the default keytab, +.IR /etc/krb5.keytab , +in the following order for a principal and password to use +when establishing the machine credential. +For the search, rpc.gssd replaces <hostname> and <REALM> with the local system's hostname and Kerberos realm. .sp <HOSTNAME>$@<REALM> @@ -133,15 +117,20 @@ system's hostname and Kerberos realm. .br host/<anyname>@<REALM> .sp -The <anyname> entries match on the service name and realm, but ignore the hostname. -These can be used if a principal matching the local host's name is not found. +rpc.gssd selects one of the <anyname> entries if it does not find +a service principal matching the local hostname, +e.g. if DHCP assigns the local hostname dynamically. +The <anyname> facility enables the use of the same keytab on multiple systems. +However, using the same service principal to establish a machine credential +on multiple hosts can create unwanted security exposures +and is therefore not recommended. .P -Note that the first principal in the search order is a user principal +Note that <HOSTNAME>$@<REALM> is a user principal that enables Kerberized NFS when the local system is joined to an Active Directory domain using Samba. -A password for this principal must be provided in the local system's keytab. +The keytab provides the password for this principal. .P -You can specify another keytab by using the +You can specify a different keytab by using the .B -k option if .I /etc/krb5.keytab @@ -290,13 +279,35 @@ seconds, which allows changing Kerberos tickets and identities frequently. The default is no explicit timeout, which means the kernel context will live the lifetime of the Kerberos service ticket used in its creation. .TP -.B -T timeout +.BI "-T " timeout Timeout, in seconds, to create an RPC connection with a server while establishing an authenticated gss context for a user. The default timeout is set to 5 seconds. If you get messages like "WARNING: can't create tcp rpc_clnt to server %servername% for user with uid %uid%: RPC: Remote system error - Connection timed out", you should consider an increase of this timeout. +.TP +.BI "-U " timeout +Timeout, in seconds, for upcall threads. Threads executing longer than +.I timeout +seconds will cause an error message to be logged. The default +.I timeout +is 30 seconds. The minimum is 5 seconds. The maximum is 600 seconds. +.TP +.B -C +In addition to logging an error message for threads that have timed out, +the thread will be canceled and an error of -ETIMEDOUT will be reported +to the kernel. +.TP +.B -H +Avoids setting $HOME to "/". This allows rpc.gssd to read per user k5identity +files versus trying to read /.k5identity for each user. + +If +.B \-H +is not set, rpc.gssd will use the first match found in +/var/kerberos/krb5/user/$EUID/client.keytab and will not use a principal based on +host and/or service parameters listed in $HOME/.k5identity. .SH CONFIGURATION FILE Many of the options that can be set on the command line can also be controlled through values set in the @@ -305,6 +316,14 @@ section of the .I /etc/nfs.conf configuration file. Values recognized include: .TP +.B verbosity +Value which is equivalent to the number of +.BR -v . +.TP +.B rpc-verbosity +Value which is equivalent to the number of +.BR -r . +.TP .B use-memcache A Boolean flag equivalent to .BR -M . @@ -329,15 +348,11 @@ Equivalent to .TP .B context-timeout Equivalent to -.BR -T . -.TP -.B rpc-timeout -Equivalent to .BR -t . .TP -.B pipefs-directory +.B rpc-timeout Equivalent to -.BR -p . +.BR -T . .TP .B keytab-file Equivalent to @@ -350,6 +365,32 @@ Equivalent to .B preferred-realm Equivalent to .BR -R . +.TP +.B upcall-timeout +Equivalent to +.BR -U . +.TP +.B cancel-timed-out-upcalls +Setting to +.B true +is equivalent to providing the +.B -C +flag. +.TP +.B set-home +Setting to +.B false +is equivalent to providing the +.B -H +flag. +.P +In addtion, the following value is recognized from the +.B [general] +section: +.TP +.B pipefs-directory +Equivalent to +.BR -p . .SH SEE ALSO .BR rpc.svcgssd (8), diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/hwclock.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/hwclock.8 deleted file mode 100644 index ba59b326..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/hwclock.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,589 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: hwclock -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "HWCLOCK" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -hwclock \- time clocks utility -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBhwclock\fP [\fIfunction\fP] [\fIoption\fP...] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBhwclock\fP is an administration tool for the time clocks. It can: display the Hardware Clock time; set the Hardware Clock to a specified time; set the Hardware Clock from the System Clock; set the System Clock from the Hardware Clock; compensate for Hardware Clock drift; correct the System Clock timescale; set the kernel\(cqs timezone, NTP timescale, and epoch (Alpha only); and predict future Hardware Clock values based on its drift rate. -.sp -Since v2.26 important changes were made to the \fB\-\-hctosys\fP function and the \fB\-\-directisa\fP option, and a new option \fB\-\-update\-drift\fP was added. See their respective descriptions below. -.SH "FUNCTIONS" -.sp -The following functions are mutually exclusive, only one can be given at a time. If none is given, the default is \fB\-\-show\fP. -.sp -\fB\-a, \-\-adjust\fP -.RS 4 -Add or subtract time from the Hardware Clock to account for systematic drift since the last time the clock was set or adjusted. See the discussion below, under \fBThe Adjust Function\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-getepoch\fP; \fB\-\-setepoch\fP -.RS 4 -These functions are for Alpha machines only, and are only available through the Linux kernel RTC driver. -.sp -They are used to read and set the kernel\(cqs Hardware Clock epoch value. Epoch is the number of years into AD to which a zero year value in the Hardware Clock refers. For example, if the machine\(cqs BIOS sets the year counter in the Hardware Clock to contain the number of full years since 1952, then the kernel\(cqs Hardware Clock epoch value must be 1952. -.sp -The \fB\-\-setepoch\fP function requires using the \fB\-\-epoch\fP option to specify the year. For example: -.sp -\fBhwclock \-\-setepoch \-\-epoch=1952\fP -.sp -The RTC driver attempts to guess the correct epoch value, so setting it may not be required. -.sp -This epoch value is used whenever \fBhwclock\fP reads or sets the Hardware Clock on an Alpha machine. For ISA machines the kernel uses the fixed Hardware Clock epoch of 1900. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-predict\fP -.RS 4 -Predict what the Hardware Clock will read in the future based upon the time given by the \fB\-\-date\fP option and the information in \fI/etc/adjtime\fP. This is useful, for example, to account for drift when setting a Hardware Clock wakeup (aka alarm). See \fBrtcwake\fP(8). -.sp -Do not use this function if the Hardware Clock is being modified by anything other than the current operating system\(cqs \fBhwclock\fP command, such as \(aq11 minute mode\(aq or from dual\-booting another OS. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-show\fP; \fB\-\-get\fP -.RS 4 -Read the Hardware Clock and print its time to standard output in the \fBISO 8601\fP format. The time shown is always in local time, even if you keep your Hardware Clock in UTC. See the \fB\-\-localtime\fP option. -.sp -Showing the Hardware Clock time is the default when no function is specified. -.sp -The \fB\-\-get\fP function also applies drift correction to the time read, based upon the information in \fI/etc/adjtime\fP. Do not use this function if the Hardware Clock is being modified by anything other than the current operating system\(cqs \fBhwclock\fP command, such as \(aq11 minute mode\(aq or from dual\-booting another OS. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-hctosys\fP -.RS 4 -Set the System Clock from the Hardware Clock. The time read from the Hardware Clock is compensated to account for systematic drift before using it to set the System Clock. See the discussion below, under \fBThe Adjust Function\fP. -.sp -The System Clock must be kept in the UTC timescale for date\-time applications to work correctly in conjunction with the timezone configured for the system. If the Hardware Clock is kept in local time then the time read from it must be shifted to the UTC timescale before using it to set the System Clock. The \fB\-\-hctosys\fP function does this based upon the information in the \fI/etc/adjtime\fP file or the command line arguments \fB\-\-localtime\fP and \fB\-\-utc\fP. Note: no daylight saving adjustment is made. See the discussion below, under \fBLOCAL vs UTC\fP. -.sp -The kernel also keeps a timezone value, the \fB\-\-hctosys\fP function sets it to the timezone configured for the system. The system timezone is configured by the TZ environment variable or the \fI/etc/localtime\fP file, as \fBtzset\fP(3) would interpret them. The obsolete \fItz_dsttime\fP field of the kernel\(cqs timezone value is set to zero. (For details on what this field used to mean, see \fBsettimeofday\fP(2).) -.sp -When used in a startup script, making the \fB\-\-hctosys\fP function the first caller of \fBsettimeofday\fP(2) from boot, it will set the NTP \(aq11 minute mode\(aq timescale via the \fIpersistent_clock_is_local\fP kernel variable. If the Hardware Clock\(cqs timescale configuration is changed then a reboot is required to inform the kernel. See the discussion below, under \fBAutomatic Hardware Clock Synchronization by the Kernel\fP. -.sp -This is a good function to use in one of the system startup scripts before the file systems are mounted read/write. -.sp -This function should never be used on a running system. Jumping system time will cause problems, such as corrupted filesystem timestamps. Also, if something has changed the Hardware Clock, like NTP\(cqs \(aq11 minute mode\(aq, then \fB\-\-hctosys\fP will set the time incorrectly by including drift compensation. -.sp -Drift compensation can be inhibited by setting the drift factor in \fI/etc/adjtime\fP to zero. This setting will be persistent as long as the \fB\-\-update\-drift\fP option is not used with \fB\-\-systohc\fP at shutdown (or anywhere else). Another way to inhibit this is by using the \fB\-\-noadjfile\fP option when calling the \fB\-\-hctosys\fP function. A third method is to delete the \fI/etc/adjtime\fP file. \fBHwclock\fP will then default to using the UTC timescale for the Hardware Clock. If the Hardware Clock is ticking local time it will need to be defined in the file. This can be done by calling \fBhwclock \-\-localtime \-\-adjust\fP; when the file is not present this command will not actually adjust the Clock, but it will create the file with local time configured, and a drift factor of zero. -.sp -A condition under which inhibiting \fBhwclock\fP\(aqs drift correction may be desired is when dual\-booting multiple operating systems. If while this instance of Linux is stopped, another OS changes the Hardware Clock\(cqs value, then when this instance is started again the drift correction applied will be incorrect. -.sp -For \fBhwclock\fP\(aqs drift correction to work properly it is imperative that nothing changes the Hardware Clock while its Linux instance is not running. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-set\fP -.RS 4 -Set the Hardware Clock to the time given by the \fB\-\-date\fP option, and update the timestamps in \fI/etc/adjtime\fP. With the \fB\-\-update\-drift\fP option also (re)calculate the drift factor. Try it without the option if \fB\-\-set\fP fails. See \fB\-\-update\-drift\fP below. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-systz\fP -.RS 4 -This is an alternate to the \fB\-\-hctosys\fP function that does not read the Hardware Clock nor set the System Clock; consequently there is not any drift correction. It is intended to be used in a startup script on systems with kernels above version 2.6 where you know the System Clock has been set from the Hardware Clock by the kernel during boot. -.sp -It does the following things that are detailed above in the \fB\-\-hctosys\fP function: -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Corrects the System Clock timescale to UTC as needed. Only instead of accomplishing this by setting the System Clock, \fBhwclock\fP simply informs the kernel and it handles the change. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Sets the kernel\(cqs NTP \(aq11 minute mode\(aq timescale. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Sets the kernel\(cqs timezone. -.RE -.RE -.sp -The first two are only available on the first call of \fBsettimeofday\fP(2) after boot. Consequently this option only makes sense when used in a startup script. If the Hardware Clocks timescale configuration is changed then a reboot would be required to inform the kernel. -.sp -\fB\-w\fP, \fB\-\-systohc\fP -.RS 4 -Set the Hardware Clock from the System Clock, and update the timestamps in \fI/etc/adjtime\fP. With the \fB\-\-update\-drift\fP option also (re)calculate the drift factor. Try it without the option if \fB\-\-systohc\fP fails. See \fB\-\-update\-drift\fP below. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-\-adjfile=\fP\fIfilename\fP -.RS 4 -Override the default \fI/etc/adjtime\fP file path. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-date=\fP\fIdate_string\fP -.RS 4 -This option must be used with the \fB\-\-set\fP or \fB\-\-predict\fP functions, otherwise it is ignored. -.sp -\fBhwclock \-\-set \-\-date=\(aq16:45\(aq\fP -.sp -\fBhwclock \-\-predict \-\-date=\(aq2525\-08\-14 07:11:05\(aq\fP -.sp -The argument must be in local time, even if you keep your Hardware Clock in UTC. See the \fB\-\-localtime\fP option. Therefore, the argument should not include any timezone information. It also should not be a relative time like "+5 minutes", because \fBhwclock\fP\(aqs precision depends upon correlation between the argument\(cqs value and when the enter key is pressed. Fractional seconds are silently dropped. This option is capable of understanding many time and date formats, but the previous parameters should be observed. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-delay=\fP\fIseconds\fP -.RS 4 -This option can be used to overwrite the internally used delay when setting the clock time. The default is 0.5 (500ms) for rtc_cmos, for another RTC types the delay is 0. If RTC type is impossible to determine (from sysfs) then it defaults also to 0.5 to be backwardly compatible. -.sp -The 500ms default is based on commonly used MC146818A\-compatible (x86) hardware clock. This Hardware Clock can only be set to any integer time plus one half second. The integer time is required because there is no interface to set or get a fractional second. The additional half second delay is because the Hardware Clock updates to the following second precisely 500 ms after setting the new time. Unfortunately, this behavior is hardware specific and in same cases another delay is required. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-D\fP, \fB\-\-debug\fP -.RS 4 -Use \fB\-\-verbose\fP. The \fB\-\-debug\fP option has been deprecated and may be repurposed or removed in a future release. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-directisa\fP -.RS 4 -This option is meaningful for ISA compatible machines in the x86 and x86_64 family. For other machines, it has no effect. This option tells \fBhwclock\fP to use explicit I/O instructions to access the Hardware Clock. Without this option, \fBhwclock\fP will use the rtc device file, which it assumes to be driven by the Linux RTC device driver. As of v2.26 it will no longer automatically use directisa when the rtc driver is unavailable; this was causing an unsafe condition that could allow two processes to access the Hardware Clock at the same time. Direct hardware access from userspace should only be used for testing, troubleshooting, and as a last resort when all other methods fail. See the \fB\-\-rtc\fP option. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-epoch=\fP\fIyear\fP -.RS 4 -This option is required when using the \fB\-\-setepoch\fP function. The minimum \fIyear\fP value is 1900. The maximum is system dependent (\fBULONG_MAX \- 1\fP). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-rtc=\fP\fIfilename\fP -.RS 4 -Override \fBhwclock\fP\(aqs default rtc device file name. Otherwise it will use the first one found in this order: \fI/dev/rtc0\fP, \fI/dev/rtc\fP, \fI/dev/misc/rtc\fP. For \fBIA\-64:\fP \fI/dev/efirtc\fP \fI/dev/misc/efirtc\fP -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-localtime\fP; \fB\-u\fP, \fB\-\-utc\fP -.RS 4 -Indicate which timescale the Hardware Clock is set to. -.sp -The Hardware Clock may be configured to use either the UTC or the local timescale, but nothing in the clock itself says which alternative is being used. The \fB\-\-localtime\fP or \fB\-\-utc\fP options give this information to the \fBhwclock\fP command. If you specify the wrong one (or specify neither and take a wrong default), both setting and reading the Hardware Clock will be incorrect. -.sp -If you specify neither \fB\-\-utc\fP nor \fB\-\-localtime\fP then the one last given with a set function (\fB\-\-set\fP, \fB\-\-systohc\fP, or \fB\-\-adjust\fP), as recorded in \fI/etc/adjtime\fP, will be used. If the adjtime file doesn\(cqt exist, the default is UTC. -.sp -Note: daylight saving time changes may be inconsistent when the Hardware Clock is kept in local time. See the discussion below, under \fBLOCAL vs UTC\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-noadjfile\fP -.RS 4 -Disable the facilities provided by \fI/etc/adjtime\fP. \fBhwclock\fP will not read nor write to that file with this option. Either \fB\-\-utc\fP or \fB\-\-localtime\fP must be specified when using this option. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-test\fP -.RS 4 -Do not actually change anything on the system, that is, the Clocks or \fI/etc/adjtime\fP (\fB\-\-verbose\fP is implicit with this option). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-update\-drift\fP -.RS 4 -Update the Hardware Clock\(cqs drift factor in \fI/etc/adjtime\fP. It can only be used with \fB\-\-set\fP or \fB\-\-systohc\fP. -.sp -A minimum four hour period between settings is required. This is to avoid invalid calculations. The longer the period, the more precise the resulting drift factor will be. -.sp -This option was added in v2.26, because it is typical for systems to call \fBhwclock \-\-systohc\fP at shutdown; with the old behavior this would automatically (re)calculate the drift factor which caused several problems: -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -When using NTP with an \(aq11 minute mode\(aq kernel the drift factor would be clobbered to near zero. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -It would not allow the use of \(aqcold\(aq drift correction. With most configurations using \(aqcold\(aq drift will yield favorable results. Cold, means when the machine is turned off which can have a significant impact on the drift factor. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -(Re)calculating drift factor on every shutdown delivers suboptimal results. For example, if ephemeral conditions cause the machine to be abnormally hot the drift factor calculation would be out of range. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Significantly increased system shutdown times (as of v2.31 when not using \fB\-\-update\-drift\fP the RTC is not read). -.RE -.RE -.sp -Having \fBhwclock\fP calculate the drift factor is a good starting point, but for optimal results it will likely need to be adjusted by directly editing the \fI/etc/adjtime\fP file. For most configurations once a machine\(cqs optimal drift factor is crafted it should not need to be changed. Therefore, the old behavior to automatically (re)calculate drift was changed and now requires this option to be used. See the discussion below, under \fBThe Adjust Function\fP. -.sp -This option requires reading the Hardware Clock before setting it. If it cannot be read, then this option will cause the set functions to fail. This can happen, for example, if the Hardware Clock is corrupted by a power failure. In that case, the clock must first be set without this option. Despite it not working, the resulting drift correction factor would be invalid anyway. -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Display more details about what \fBhwclock\fP is doing internally. -.RE -.SH "NOTES" -.SS "Clocks in a Linux System" -.sp -There are two types of date\-time clocks: -.sp -\fBThe Hardware Clock:\fP This clock is an independent hardware device, with its own power domain (battery, capacitor, etc), that operates when the machine is powered off, or even unplugged. -.sp -On an ISA compatible system, this clock is specified as part of the ISA standard. A control program can read or set this clock only to a whole second, but it can also detect the edges of the 1 second clock ticks, so the clock actually has virtually infinite precision. -.sp -This clock is commonly called the hardware clock, the real time clock, the RTC, the BIOS clock, and the CMOS clock. Hardware Clock, in its capitalized form, was coined for use by \fBhwclock\fP. The Linux kernel also refers to it as the persistent clock. -.sp -Some non\-ISA systems have a few real time clocks with only one of them having its own power domain. A very low power external I2C or SPI clock chip might be used with a backup battery as the hardware clock to initialize a more functional integrated real\-time clock which is used for most other purposes. -.sp -\fBThe System Clock:\fP This clock is part of the Linux kernel and is driven by a timer interrupt. (On an ISA machine, the timer interrupt is part of the ISA standard.) It has meaning only while Linux is running on the machine. The System Time is the number of seconds since 00:00:00 January 1, 1970 UTC (or more succinctly, the number of seconds since 1969 UTC). The System Time is not an integer, though. It has virtually infinite precision. -.sp -The System Time is the time that matters. The Hardware Clock\(cqs basic purpose is to keep time when Linux is not running so that the System Clock can be initialized from it at boot. Note that in DOS, for which ISA was designed, the Hardware Clock is the only real time clock. -.sp -It is important that the System Time not have any discontinuities such as would happen if you used the \fBdate\fP(1) program to set it while the system is running. You can, however, do whatever you want to the Hardware Clock while the system is running, and the next time Linux starts up, it will do so with the adjusted time from the Hardware Clock. Note: currently this is not possible on most systems because \fBhwclock \-\-systohc\fP is called at shutdown. -.sp -The Linux kernel\(cqs timezone is set by \fBhwclock\fP. But don\(cqt be misled \(em almost nobody cares what timezone the kernel thinks it is in. Instead, programs that care about the timezone (perhaps because they want to display a local time for you) almost always use a more traditional method of determining the timezone: They use the \fBTZ\fP environment variable or the \fI/etc/localtime\fP file, as explained in the man page for \fBtzset\fP(3). However, some programs and fringe parts of the Linux kernel such as filesystems use the kernel\(cqs timezone value. An example is the vfat filesystem. If the kernel timezone value is wrong, the vfat filesystem will report and set the wrong timestamps on files. Another example is the kernel\(cqs NTP \(aq11 minute mode\(aq. If the kernel\(cqs timezone value and/or the \fIpersistent_clock_is_local\fP variable are wrong, then the Hardware Clock will be set incorrectly by \(aq11 minute mode\(aq. See the discussion below, under \fBAutomatic Hardware Clock Synchronization by the Kernel\fP. -.sp -\fBhwclock\fP sets the kernel\(cqs timezone to the value indicated by \fBTZ\fP or \fI/etc/localtime\fP with the \fB\-\-hctosys\fP or \fB\-\-systz\fP functions. -.sp -The kernel\(cqs timezone value actually consists of two parts: 1) a field tz_minuteswest indicating how many minutes local time (not adjusted for DST) lags behind UTC, and 2) a field tz_dsttime indicating the type of Daylight Savings Time (DST) convention that is in effect in the locality at the present time. This second field is not used under Linux and is always zero. See also \fBsettimeofday\fP(2). -.SS "Hardware Clock Access Methods" -.sp -\fBhwclock\fP uses many different ways to get and set Hardware Clock values. The most normal way is to do I/O to the rtc device special file, which is presumed to be driven by the rtc device driver. Also, Linux systems using the rtc framework with udev, are capable of supporting multiple Hardware Clocks. This may bring about the need to override the default rtc device by specifying one with the \fB\-\-rtc\fP option. -.sp -However, this method is not always available as older systems do not have an rtc driver. On these systems, the method of accessing the Hardware Clock depends on the system hardware. -.sp -On an ISA compatible system, \fBhwclock\fP can directly access the "CMOS memory" registers that constitute the clock, by doing I/O to Ports 0x70 and 0x71. It does this with actual I/O instructions and consequently can only do it if running with superuser effective userid. This method may be used by specifying the \fB\-\-directisa\fP option. -.sp -This is a really poor method of accessing the clock, for all the reasons that userspace programs are generally not supposed to do direct I/O and disable interrupts. \fBhwclock\fP provides it for testing, troubleshooting, and because it may be the only method available on ISA systems which do not have a working rtc device driver. -.SS "The Adjust Function" -.sp -The Hardware Clock is usually not very accurate. However, much of its inaccuracy is completely predictable \- it gains or loses the same amount of time every day. This is called systematic drift. \fBhwclock\fP\(aqs \fB\-\-adjust\fP function lets you apply systematic drift corrections to the Hardware Clock. -.sp -It works like this: \fBhwclock\fP keeps a file, \fI/etc/adjtime\fP, that keeps some historical information. This is called the adjtime file. -.sp -Suppose you start with no adjtime file. You issue a \fBhwclock \-\-set\fP command to set the Hardware Clock to the true current time. \fBhwclock\fP creates the adjtime file and records in it the current time as the last time the clock was calibrated. Five days later, the clock has gained 10 seconds, so you issue a \fBhwclock \-\-set \-\-update\-drift\fP command to set it back 10 seconds. \fBhwclock\fP updates the adjtime file to show the current time as the last time the clock was calibrated, and records 2 seconds per day as the systematic drift rate. 24 hours go by, and then you issue a \fBhwclock \-\-adjust\fP command. \fBhwclock\fP consults the adjtime file and sees that the clock gains 2 seconds per day when left alone and that it has been left alone for exactly one day. So it subtracts 2 seconds from the Hardware Clock. It then records the current time as the last time the clock was adjusted. Another 24 hours go by and you issue another \fBhwclock \-\-adjust\fP. \fBhwclock\fP does the same thing: subtracts 2 seconds and updates the adjtime file with the current time as the last time the clock was adjusted. -.sp -When you use the \fB\-\-update\-drift\fP option with \fB\-\-set\fP or \fB\-\-systohc\fP, the systematic drift rate is (re)calculated by comparing the fully drift corrected current Hardware Clock time with the new set time, from that it derives the 24 hour drift rate based on the last calibrated timestamp from the adjtime file. This updated drift factor is then saved in \fI/etc/adjtime\fP. -.sp -A small amount of error creeps in when the Hardware Clock is set, so \fB\-\-adjust\fP refrains from making any adjustment that is less than 1 second. Later on, when you request an adjustment again, the accumulated drift will be more than 1 second and \fB\-\-adjust\fP will make the adjustment including any fractional amount. -.sp -\fBhwclock \-\-hctosys\fP also uses the adjtime file data to compensate the value read from the Hardware Clock before using it to set the System Clock. It does not share the 1 second limitation of \fB\-\-adjust\fP, and will correct sub\-second drift values immediately. It does not change the Hardware Clock time nor the adjtime file. This may eliminate the need to use \fB\-\-adjust\fP, unless something else on the system needs the Hardware Clock to be compensated. -.SS "The Adjtime File" -.sp -While named for its historical purpose of controlling adjustments only, it actually contains other information used by \fBhwclock\fP from one invocation to the next. -.sp -The format of the adjtime file is, in ASCII: -.sp -Line 1: Three numbers, separated by blanks: 1) the systematic drift rate in seconds per day, floating point decimal; 2) the resulting number of seconds since 1969 UTC of most recent adjustment or calibration, decimal integer; 3) zero (for compatibility with \fBclock\fP(8)) as a floating point decimal. -.sp -Line 2: One number: the resulting number of seconds since 1969 UTC of most recent calibration. Zero if there has been no calibration yet or it is known that any previous calibration is moot (for example, because the Hardware Clock has been found, since that calibration, not to contain a valid time). This is a decimal integer. -.sp -Line 3: "UTC" or "LOCAL". Tells whether the Hardware Clock is set to Coordinated Universal Time or local time. You can always override this value with options on the \fBhwclock\fP command line. -.sp -You can use an adjtime file that was previously used with the \fBclock\fP(8) program with \fBhwclock\fP. -.SS "Automatic Hardware Clock Synchronization by the Kernel" -.sp -You should be aware of another way that the Hardware Clock is kept synchronized in some systems. The Linux kernel has a mode wherein it copies the System Time to the Hardware Clock every 11 minutes. This mode is a compile time option, so not all kernels will have this capability. This is a good mode to use when you are using something sophisticated like NTP to keep your System Clock synchronized. (NTP is a way to keep your System Time synchronized either to a time server somewhere on the network or to a radio clock hooked up to your system. See RFC 1305.) -.sp -If the kernel is compiled with the \(aq11 minute mode\(aq option it will be active when the kernel\(cqs clock discipline is in a synchronized state. When in this state, bit 6 (the bit that is set in the mask 0x0040) of the kernel\(cqs \fItime_status\fP variable is unset. This value is output as the \(aqstatus\(aq line of the \fBadjtimex \-\-print\fP or \fBntptime\fP commands. -.sp -It takes an outside influence, like the NTP daemon to put the kernel\(cqs clock discipline into a synchronized state, and therefore turn on \(aq11 minute mode\(aq. It can be turned off by running anything that sets the System Clock the old fashioned way, including \fBhwclock \-\-hctosys\fP. However, if the NTP daemon is still running, it will turn \(aq11 minute mode\(aq back on again the next time it synchronizes the System Clock. -.sp -If your system runs with \(aq11 minute mode\(aq on, it may need to use either \fB\-\-hctosys\fP or \fB\-\-systz\fP in a startup script, especially if the Hardware Clock is configured to use the local timescale. Unless the kernel is informed of what timescale the Hardware Clock is using, it may clobber it with the wrong one. The kernel uses UTC by default. -.sp -The first userspace command to set the System Clock informs the kernel what timescale the Hardware Clock is using. This happens via the \fIpersistent_clock_is_local\fP kernel variable. If \fB\-\-hctosys\fP or \fB\-\-systz\fP is the first, it will set this variable according to the adjtime file or the appropriate command\-line argument. Note that when using this capability and the Hardware Clock timescale configuration is changed, then a reboot is required to notify the kernel. -.sp -\fBhwclock \-\-adjust\fP should not be used with NTP \(aq11 minute mode\(aq. -.SS "ISA Hardware Clock Century value" -.sp -There is some sort of standard that defines CMOS memory Byte 50 on an ISA machine as an indicator of what century it is. \fBhwclock\fP does not use or set that byte because there are some machines that don\(cqt define the byte that way, and it really isn\(cqt necessary anyway, since the year\-of\-century does a good job of implying which century it is. -.sp -If you have a bona fide use for a CMOS century byte, contact the \fBhwclock\fP maintainer; an option may be appropriate. -.sp -Note that this section is only relevant when you are using the "direct ISA" method of accessing the Hardware Clock. ACPI provides a standard way to access century values, when they are supported by the hardware. -.SH "DATE\-TIME CONFIGURATION" -.SS "Keeping Time without External Synchronization" -.sp -This discussion is based on the following conditions: -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Nothing is running that alters the date\-time clocks, such as NTP daemon or a cron job." -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -The system timezone is configured for the correct local time. See below, under \fBPOSIX vs \(aqRIGHT\(aq\fP. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Early during startup the following are called, in this order: \fBadjtimex \-\-tick\fP \fIvalue\fP \fB\-\-frequency\fP \fIvalue\fP \fBhwclock \-\-hctosys\fP -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -During shutdown the following is called: \fBhwclock \-\-systohc\fP -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Systems without \fBadjtimex\fP may use \fBntptime\fP. -.RE -.RE -.sp -Whether maintaining precision time with NTP daemon or not, it makes sense to configure the system to keep reasonably good date\-time on its own. -.sp -The first step in making that happen is having a clear understanding of the big picture. There are two completely separate hardware devices running at their own speed and drifting away from the \(aqcorrect\(aq time at their own rates. The methods and software for drift correction are different for each of them. However, most systems are configured to exchange values between these two clocks at startup and shutdown. Now the individual device\(cqs time keeping errors are transferred back and forth between each other. Attempt to configure drift correction for only one of them, and the other\(cqs drift will be overlaid upon it. -.sp -This problem can be avoided when configuring drift correction for the System Clock by simply not shutting down the machine. This, plus the fact that all of \fBhwclock\fP\(aqs precision (including calculating drift factors) depends upon the System Clock\(cqs rate being correct, means that configuration of the System Clock should be done first. -.sp -The System Clock drift is corrected with the \fBadjtimex\fP(8) command\(cqs \fB\-\-tick\fP and \fB\-\-frequency\fP options. These two work together: tick is the coarse adjustment and frequency is the fine adjustment. (For systems that do not have an \fBadjtimex\fP package, \fBntptime \-f\fP \fIppm\fP may be used instead.) -.sp -Some Linux distributions attempt to automatically calculate the System Clock drift with \fBadjtimex\fP\(aqs compare operation. Trying to correct one drifting clock by using another drifting clock as a reference is akin to a dog trying to catch its own tail. Success may happen eventually, but great effort and frustration will likely precede it. This automation may yield an improvement over no configuration, but expecting optimum results would be in error. A better choice for manual configuration would be \fBadjtimex\fP\(aqs \fB\-\-log\fP options. -.sp -It may be more effective to simply track the System Clock drift with \fBsntp\fP, or \fBdate \-Ins\fP and a precision timepiece, and then calculate the correction manually. -.sp -After setting the tick and frequency values, continue to test and refine the adjustments until the System Clock keeps good time. See \fBadjtimex\fP(2) for more information and the example demonstrating manual drift calculations. -.sp -Once the System Clock is ticking smoothly, move on to the Hardware Clock. -.sp -As a rule, cold drift will work best for most use cases. This should be true even for 24/7 machines whose normal downtime consists of a reboot. In that case the drift factor value makes little difference. But on the rare occasion that the machine is shut down for an extended period, then cold drift should yield better results. -.sp -\fBSteps to calculate cold drift:\fP -.sp -1 -.RS 4 -\fBEnsure that NTP daemon will not be launched at startup.\fP -.RE -.sp -2 -.RS 4 -The \fISystem Clock\fP time must be correct at shutdown! -.RE -.sp -3 -.RS 4 -Shut down the system. -.RE -.sp -4 -.RS 4 -Let an extended period pass without changing the Hardware Clock. -.RE -.sp -5 -.RS 4 -Start the system. -.RE -.sp -6 -.RS 4 -Immediately use \fBhwclock\fP to set the correct time, adding the \fB\-\-update\-drift\fP option. -.RE -.sp -Note: if step 6 uses \fB\-\-systohc\fP, then the System Clock must be set correctly (step 6a) just before doing so. -.sp -Having \fBhwclock\fP calculate the drift factor is a good starting point, but for optimal results it will likely need to be adjusted by directly editing the \fI/etc/adjtime\fP file. Continue to test and refine the drift factor until the Hardware Clock is corrected properly at startup. To check this, first make sure that the System Time is correct before shutdown and then use \fBsntp\fP, or \fBdate \-Ins\fP and a precision timepiece, immediately after startup. -.SS "LOCAL vs UTC" -.sp -Keeping the Hardware Clock in a local timescale causes inconsistent daylight saving time results: -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -If Linux is running during a daylight saving time change, the time written to the Hardware Clock will be adjusted for the change. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -If Linux is NOT running during a daylight saving time change, the time read from the Hardware Clock will NOT be adjusted for the change. -.RE -.sp -The Hardware Clock on an ISA compatible system keeps only a date and time, it has no concept of timezone nor daylight saving. Therefore, when \fBhwclock\fP is told that it is in local time, it assumes it is in the \(aqcorrect\(aq local time and makes no adjustments to the time read from it. -.sp -Linux handles daylight saving time changes transparently only when the Hardware Clock is kept in the UTC timescale. Doing so is made easy for system administrators as \fBhwclock\fP uses local time for its output and as the argument to the \fB\-\-date\fP option. -.sp -POSIX systems, like Linux, are designed to have the System Clock operate in the UTC timescale. The Hardware Clock\(cqs purpose is to initialize the System Clock, so also keeping it in UTC makes sense. -.sp -Linux does, however, attempt to accommodate the Hardware Clock being in the local timescale. This is primarily for dual\-booting with older versions of MS Windows. From Windows 7 on, the RealTimeIsUniversal registry key is supposed to be working properly so that its Hardware Clock can be kept in UTC. -.SS "POSIX vs \(aqRIGHT\(aq" -.sp -A discussion on date\-time configuration would be incomplete without addressing timezones, this is mostly well covered by \fBtzset\fP(3). One area that seems to have no documentation is the \(aqright\(aq directory of the Time Zone Database, sometimes called tz or zoneinfo. -.sp -There are two separate databases in the zoneinfo system, posix and \(aqright\(aq. \(aqRight\(aq (now named zoneinfo\-leaps) includes leap seconds and posix does not. To use the \(aqright\(aq database the System Clock must be set to (UTC + leap seconds), which is equivalent to (TAI \- 10). This allows calculating the exact number of seconds between two dates that cross a leap second epoch. The System Clock is then converted to the correct civil time, including UTC, by using the \(aqright\(aq timezone files which subtract the leap seconds. Note: this configuration is considered experimental and is known to have issues. -.sp -To configure a system to use a particular database all of the files located in its directory must be copied to the root of \fI/usr/share/zoneinfo\fP. Files are never used directly from the posix or \(aqright\(aq subdirectories, e.g., TZ=\(aq\fIright/Europe/Dublin\fP\(aq. This habit was becoming so common that the upstream zoneinfo project restructured the system\(cqs file tree by moving the posix and \(aqright\(aq subdirectories out of the zoneinfo directory and into sibling directories: -.sp -\fI/usr/share/zoneinfo\fP, \fI/usr/share/zoneinfo\-posix\fP, \fI/usr/share/zoneinfo\-leaps\fP -.sp -Unfortunately, some Linux distributions are changing it back to the old tree structure in their packages. So the problem of system administrators reaching into the \(aqright\(aq subdirectory persists. This causes the system timezone to be configured to include leap seconds while the zoneinfo database is still configured to exclude them. Then when an application such as a World Clock needs the South_Pole timezone file; or an email MTA, or \fBhwclock\fP needs the UTC timezone file; they fetch it from the root of \fI/usr/share/zoneinfo\fP , because that is what they are supposed to do. Those files exclude leap seconds, but the System Clock now includes them, causing an incorrect time conversion. -.sp -Attempting to mix and match files from these separate databases will not work, because they each require the System Clock to use a different timescale. The zoneinfo database must be configured to use either posix or \(aqright\(aq, as described above, or by assigning a database path to the \fITZDIR\fP environment variable. -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -One of the following exit values will be returned: -.sp -\fBEXIT_SUCCESS\fP (\(aq0\(aq on POSIX systems) -.RS 4 -Successful program execution. -.RE -.sp -\fBEXIT_FAILURE\fP (\(aq1\(aq on POSIX systems) -.RS 4 -The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid. -.RE -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -\fBTZ\fP -.RS 4 -If this variable is set its value takes precedence over the system configured timezone. -.RE -.sp -\fBTZDIR\fP -.RS 4 -If this variable is set its value takes precedence over the system configured timezone database directory path. -.RE -.SH "FILES" -.sp -\fI/etc/adjtime\fP -.RS 4 -The configuration and state file for hwclock. -.RE -.sp -\fI/etc/localtime\fP -.RS 4 -The system timezone file. -.RE -.sp -\fI/usr/share/zoneinfo/\fP -.RS 4 -The system timezone database directory. -.RE -.sp -Device files \fBhwclock\fP may try for Hardware Clock access: \fI/dev/rtc0\fP \fI/dev/rtc\fP \fI/dev/misc/rtc\fP \fI/dev/efirtc\fP \fI/dev/misc/efirtc\fP -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBdate\fP(1), -\fBadjtimex\fP(8), -\fBgettimeofday\fP(2), -\fBsettimeofday\fP(2), -\fBcrontab\fP(1p), -\fBtzset\fP(3) -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -Written by \c -.MTO "bryanh\(atgiraffe\-data.com" "Bryan Henderson" "," -September 1996, based on work done on the \fBclock\fP(8) program by Charles Hedrick, Rob Hooft, and Harald Koenig. See the source code for complete history and credits. -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBhwclock\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/idmapd.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/idmapd.8 index d4ab8944..8215d259 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/idmapd.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/idmapd.8 @@ -24,13 +24,13 @@ the NFSv4 kernel client and server, to which it communicates via upcalls, by translating user and group IDs to names, and vice versa. .Pp The system derives the -.I user +.Em user part of the string by performing a password or group lookup. The lookup mechanism is configured in .Pa /etc/idmapd.conf .Pp By default, the -.I domain +.Em domain part of the string is the system's DNS domain name. It can also be specified in .Pa /etc/idmapd.conf @@ -73,11 +73,28 @@ The default value is \&"/var/lib/nfs/rpc_pipefs\&". .It Fl c Ar path Use configuration file .Ar path . +This option is deprecated. .It Fl C Client-only: perform no idmapping for any NFS server, even if one is detected. .It Fl S Server-only: perform no idmapping for any NFS client, even if one is detected. .El +.Sh CONFIGURATION FILES +.Nm +recognizes the following value from the +.Sy [general] +section of the +.Pa /etc/nfs.conf +configuration file: +.Bl -tag -width Ds_imagedir +.It Sy pipefs-directory +Equivalent to +.Sy -p . +.El +.Pp +All other settings related to id mapping are found in the +.Pa /etc/idmapd.conf +configuration file. .Sh EXAMPLES .Cm rpc.idmapd -f -vvv .Pp @@ -94,9 +111,11 @@ messages to console, and with a verbosity level of 3. .\" This next request is for sections 1, 6, 7 & 8 only. .\" .Sh ENVIRONMENT .Sh FILES -.Pa /etc/idmapd.conf +.Pa /etc/idmapd.conf , +.Pa /etc/nfs.conf .Sh SEE ALSO .Xr idmapd.conf 5 , +.Xr nfs.conf 5 , .Xr nfsidmap 8 .\".Sh SEE ALSO .\".Xr nylon.conf 4 diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/isosize.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/isosize.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 4b80cd62..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/isosize.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,79 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: isosize -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "ISOSIZE" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -isosize \- output the length of an iso9660 filesystem -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBisosize\fP [options] \fIiso9660_image_file\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -This command outputs the length of an iso9660 filesystem that is contained in the specified file. This file may be a normal file or a block device (e.g. \fI/dev/hdd\fP or \fI/dev/sr0\fP). In the absence of any options (and errors), it will output the size of the iso9660 filesystem in bytes. This can now be a large number (>> 4 GB). -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-x\fP, \fB\-\-sectors\fP -.RS 4 -Show the block count and block size in human\-readable form. The output uses the term "sectors" for "blocks". -.RE -.sp -\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-divisor\fP \fInumber\fP -.RS 4 -Only has an effect when \fB\-x\fP is not given. The value shown (if no errors) is the iso9660 file size in bytes divided by \fInumber\fP. So if \fInumber\fP is the block size then the shown value will be the block count. -.sp -The size of the file (or block device) holding an iso9660 filesystem can be marginally larger than the actual size of the iso9660 filesystem. One reason for this is that cd writers are allowed to add "run out" sectors at the end of an iso9660 image. -.RE -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -\fB0\fP -.RS 4 -success -.RE -.sp -\fB1\fP -.RS 4 -generic failure, such as invalid usage -.RE -.sp -\fB32\fP -.RS 4 -all failed -.RE -.sp -\fB64\fP -.RS 4 -some failed -.RE -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBisosize\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/ldattach.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/ldattach.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 0fbbcae1..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/ldattach.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,198 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: ldattach -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "LDATTACH" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -ldattach \- attach a line discipline to a serial line -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBldattach\fP [\fB\-1278denoVh\fP] [\fB\-i\fP \fIiflag\fP] [\fB\-s\fP \fIspeed\fP] \fIldisc device\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -The \fBldattach\fP daemon opens the specified \fIdevice\fP file (which should refer to a serial device) and attaches the line discipline \fIldisc\fP to it for processing of the sent and/or received data. It then goes into the background keeping the device open so that the line discipline stays loaded. -.sp -The line discipline \fIldisc\fP may be specified either by name or by number. -.sp -In order to detach the line discipline, \fBkill\fP(1) the \fBldattach\fP process. -.sp -With no arguments, \fBldattach\fP prints usage information. -.SH "LINE DISCIPLINES" -.sp -Depending on the kernel release, the following line disciplines are supported: -.sp -\fBTTY\fP(\fB0\fP) -.RS 4 -The default line discipline, providing transparent operation (raw mode) as well as the habitual terminal line editing capabilities (cooked mode). -.RE -.sp -\fBSLIP\fP(\fB1\fP) -.RS 4 -Serial Line IP (SLIP) protocol processor for transmitting TCP/IP packets over serial lines. -.RE -.sp -\fBMOUSE\fP(\fB2\fP) -.RS 4 -Device driver for RS232 connected pointing devices (serial mice). -.RE -.sp -\fBPPP\fP(\fB3\fP) -.RS 4 -Point to Point Protocol (PPP) processor for transmitting network packets over serial lines. -.RE -.sp -\fBSTRIP\fP(\fB4\fP); \fBAX25\fP(\fB5\fP); \fBX25\fP(\fB6\fP) -.RS 4 -Line driver for transmitting X.25 packets over asynchronous serial lines. -.RE -.sp -\fB6PACK\fP(\fB7\fP); \fBR3964\fP(\fB9\fP) -.RS 4 -Driver for Simatic R3964 module. -.RE -.sp -\fBIRDA\fP(\fB11\fP) -.RS 4 -Linux IrDa (infrared data transmission) driver \- see \c -.URL "http://irda.sourceforge.net/" "" "" -.RE -.sp -\fBHDLC\fP(\fB13\fP) -.RS 4 -Synchronous HDLC driver. -.RE -.sp -\fBSYNC_PPP\fP(\fB14\fP) -.RS 4 -Synchronous PPP driver. -.RE -.sp -\fBHCI\fP(\fB15\fP) -.RS 4 -Bluetooth HCI UART driver. -.RE -.sp -\fBGIGASET_M101\fP(\fB16\fP) -.RS 4 -Driver for Siemens Gigaset M101 serial DECT adapter. -.RE -.sp -\fBPPS\fP(\fB18\fP) -.RS 4 -Driver for serial line Pulse Per Second (PPS) source. -.RE -.sp -\fBGSM0710\fP(\fB21\fP) -.RS 4 -Driver for GSM 07.10 multiplexing protocol modem (CMUX). -.RE -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-1\fP, \fB\-\-onestopbit\fP -.RS 4 -Set the number of stop bits of the serial line to one. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-2\fP, \fB\-\-twostopbits\fP -.RS 4 -Set the number of stop bits of the serial line to two. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-7\fP, \fB\-\-sevenbits\fP -.RS 4 -Set the character size of the serial line to 7 bits. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-8\fP, \fB\-\-eightbits\fP -.RS 4 -Set the character size of the serial line to 8 bits. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-debug\fP -.RS 4 -Keep \fBldattach\fP in the foreground so that it can be interrupted or debugged, and to print verbose messages about its progress to standard error output. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-e\fP, \fB\-\-evenparity\fP -.RS 4 -Set the parity of the serial line to even. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-i\fP, \fB\-\-iflag\fP \fIvalue\fP... -.RS 4 -Set the specified bits in the c_iflag word of the serial line. The given \fIvalue\fP may be a number or a symbolic name. If \fIvalue\fP is prefixed by a minus sign, the specified bits are cleared instead. Several comma\-separated values may be given in order to set and clear multiple bits. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-noparity\fP -.RS 4 -Set the parity of the serial line to none. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-oddparity\fP -.RS 4 -Set the parity of the serial line to odd. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-speed\fP \fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Set the speed (the baud rate) of the serial line to the specified \fIvalue\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-intro\-command\fP \fIstring\fP -.RS 4 -Define an intro command that is sent through the serial line before the invocation of ldattach. E.g. in conjunction with line discipline GSM0710, the command \(aqAT+CMUX=0\(rsr\(aq is commonly suitable to switch the modem into the CMUX mode. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-pause\fP \fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Sleep for \fIvalue\fP seconds before the invocation of ldattach. Default is one second. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "tilman\(atimap.cc" "Tilman Schmidt" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBinputattach\fP(1), -\fBttys\fP(4) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBldattach\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/losetup.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/losetup.8 deleted file mode 100644 index c75f3aac..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/losetup.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,240 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: losetup -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "LOSETUP" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -losetup \- set up and control loop devices -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -Get info: -.sp -\fBlosetup\fP [\fIloopdev\fP] -.sp -\fBlosetup\fP \fB\-l\fP [\fB\-a\fP] -.sp -\fBlosetup\fP \fB\-j\fP \fIfile\fP [\fB\-o\fP \fIoffset\fP] -.sp -Detach a loop device: -.sp -\fBlosetup\fP \fB\-d\fP \fIloopdev\fP ... -.sp -Detach all associated loop devices: -.sp -\fBlosetup\fP \fB\-D\fP -.sp -Set up a loop device: -.sp -\fBlosetup\fP [\fB\-o\fP \fIoffset\fP] [\fB\-\-sizelimit\fP \fIsize\fP] [\fB\-\-sector\-size\fP \fIsize\fP] [\fB\-Pr\fP] [\fB\-\-show\fP] \fB\-f\fP \fIloopdev file\fP -.sp -Resize a loop device: -.sp -\fBlosetup\fP \fB\-c\fP \fIloopdev\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBlosetup\fP is used to associate loop devices with regular files or block devices, to detach loop devices, and to query the status of a loop device. If only the \fIloopdev\fP argument is given, the status of the corresponding loop device is shown. If no option is given, all loop devices are shown. -.sp -Note that the old output format (i.e., \fBlosetup \-a\fP) with comma\-delimited strings is deprecated in favour of the \fB\-\-list\fP output format. -.sp -It\(cqs possible to create more independent loop devices for the same backing file. \fBThis setup may be dangerous, can cause data loss, corruption and overwrites.\fP Use \fB\-\-nooverlap\fP with \fB\-\-find\fP during setup to avoid this problem. -.sp -The loop device setup is not an atomic operation when used with \fB\-\-find\fP, and \fBlosetup\fP does not protect this operation by any lock. The number of attempts is internally restricted to a maximum of 16. It is recommended to use for example flock1 to avoid a collision in heavily parallel use cases. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -The \fIsize\fP and \fIoffset\fP arguments may be followed by the multiplicative suffixes KiB (=1024), MiB (=1024*1024), and so on for GiB, TiB, PiB, EiB, ZiB and YiB (the "iB" is optional, e.g., "K" has the same meaning as "KiB") or the suffixes KB (=1000), MB (=1000*1000), and so on for GB, TB, PB, EB, ZB and YB. -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-all\fP -.RS 4 -Show the status of all loop devices. Note that not all information is accessible for non\-root users. See also \fB\-\-list\fP. The old output format (as printed without \fB\-\-list)\fP is deprecated. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-detach\fP \fIloopdev\fP... -.RS 4 -Detach the file or device associated with the specified loop device(s). Note that since Linux v3.7 kernel uses "lazy device destruction". The detach operation does not return \fBEBUSY\fP error anymore if device is actively used by system, but it is marked by autoclear flag and destroyed later. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-D\fP, \fB\-\-detach\-all\fP -.RS 4 -Detach all associated loop devices. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-find\fP [\fIfile\fP] -.RS 4 -Find the first unused loop device. If a \fIfile\fP argument is present, use the found device as loop device. Otherwise, just print its name. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-show\fP -.RS 4 -Display the name of the assigned loop device if the \fB\-f\fP option and a \fIfile\fP argument are present. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-L\fP, \fB\-\-nooverlap\fP -.RS 4 -Check for conflicts between loop devices to avoid situation when the same backing file is shared between more loop devices. If the file is already used by another device then re\-use the device rather than a new one. The option makes sense only with \fB\-\-find\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-j\fP, \fB\-\-associated\fP \fIfile\fP [\fB\-o\fP \fIoffset\fP] -.RS 4 -Show the status of all loop devices associated with the given \fIfile\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-offset\fP \fIoffset\fP -.RS 4 -The data start is moved \fIoffset\fP bytes into the specified file or device. The \fIoffset\fP may be followed by the multiplicative suffixes; see above. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-sizelimit\fP \fIsize\fP -.RS 4 -The data end is set to no more than \fIsize\fP bytes after the data start. The \fIsize\fP may be followed by the multiplicative suffixes; see above. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-b\fP, \fB\-\-sector\-size\fP \fIsize\fP -.RS 4 -Set the logical sector size of the loop device in bytes (since Linux 4.14). The option may be used when create a new loop device as well as stand\-alone command to modify sector size of the already existing loop device. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-set\-capacity\fP \fIloopdev\fP -.RS 4 -Force the loop driver to reread the size of the file associated with the specified loop device. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-P\fP, \fB\-\-partscan\fP -.RS 4 -Force the kernel to scan the partition table on a newly created loop device. Note that the partition table parsing depends on sector sizes. The default is sector size is 512 bytes, otherwise you need to use the option \fB\-\-sector\-size\fP together with \fB\-\-partscan\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-read\-only\fP -.RS 4 -Set up a read\-only loop device. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-direct\-io\fP[\fB=on\fP|\fBoff\fP] -.RS 4 -Enable or disable direct I/O for the backing file. The optional argument can be either \fBon\fP or \fBoff\fP. If the argument is omitted, it defaults to \fBoff\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Verbose mode. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-list\fP -.RS 4 -If a loop device or the \fB\-a\fP option is specified, print the default columns for either the specified loop device or all loop devices; the default is to print info about all devices. See also \fB\-\-output\fP, \fB\-\-noheadings\fP, \fB\-\-raw\fP, and \fB\-\-json\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-O\fP, \fB\-\-output\fP \fIcolumn\fP[,\fIcolumn\fP]... -.RS 4 -Specify the columns that are to be printed for the \fB\-\-list\fP output. Use \fB\-\-help\fP to get a list of all supported columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-output\-all\fP -.RS 4 -Output all available columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-noheadings\fP -.RS 4 -Don\(cqt print headings for \fB\-\-list\fP output format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-raw\fP -.RS 4 -Use the raw \fB\-\-list\fP output format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-J\fP, \fB\-\-json\fP -.RS 4 -Use JSON format for \fB\-\-list\fP output. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "ENCRYPTION" -.sp -\fBCryptoloop is no longer supported in favor of dm\-crypt.\fP For more details see \fBcryptsetup\fP(8). -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -\fBlosetup\fP returns 0 on success, nonzero on failure. When \fBlosetup\fP displays the status of a loop device, it returns 1 if the device is not configured and 2 if an error occurred which prevented determining the status of the device. -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -Since version 2.37 \fBlosetup\fP uses \fBLOOP_CONFIGURE\fP ioctl to setup a new loop device by one ioctl call. The old versions use \fBLOOP_SET_FD\fP and \fBLOOP_SET_STATUS64\fP ioctls to do the same. -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -LOOPDEV_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables debug output. -.RE -.SH "FILES" -.sp -\fI/dev/loop[0..N]\fP -.RS 4 -loop block devices -.RE -.sp -\fI/dev/loop\-control\fP -.RS 4 -loop control device -.RE -.SH "EXAMPLE" -.sp -The following commands can be used as an example of using the loop device. -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -# dd if=/dev/zero of=~/file.img bs=1024k count=10 -# losetup \-\-find \-\-show ~/file.img -/dev/loop0 -# mkfs \-t ext2 /dev/loop0 -# mount /dev/loop0 /mnt -\&... -# umount /dev/loop0 -# losetup \-\-detach /dev/loop0 -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "," -based on the original version from -.MTO "tytso\(atathena.mit.edu" "Theodore Ts\(cqo" "." -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBlosetup\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/lsblk.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/lsblk.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 9b51a995..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/lsblk.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,266 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: lsblk -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "LSBLK" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -lsblk \- list block devices -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBlsblk\fP [options] [\fIdevice\fP...] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBlsblk\fP lists information about all available or the specified block devices. The \fBlsblk\fP command reads the \fBsysfs\fP filesystem and \fBudev db\fP to gather information. If the udev db is not available or \fBlsblk\fP is compiled without udev support, then it tries to read LABELs, UUIDs and filesystem types from the block device. In this case root permissions are necessary. -.sp -The command prints all block devices (except RAM disks) in a tree\-like format by default. Use \fBlsblk \-\-help\fP to get a list of all available columns. -.sp -The default output, as well as the default output from options like \fB\-\-fs\fP and \fB\-\-topology\fP, is subject to change. So whenever possible, you should avoid using default outputs in your scripts. Always explicitly define expected columns by using \fB\-\-output\fP \fIcolumns\-list\fP and \fB\-\-list\fP in environments where a stable output is required. -.sp -Note that \fBlsblk\fP might be executed in time when \fBudev\fP does not have all information about recently added or modified devices yet. In this case it is recommended to use \fBudevadm settle\fP before \fBlsblk\fP to synchronize with udev. -.sp -The relationship between block devices and filesystems is not always one\-to\-one. The filesystem may use more block devices, or the same filesystem may be accessible by more paths. This is the reason why \fBlsblk\fP provides MOUNTPOINT and MOUNTPOINTS (pl.) columns. The column MOUNTPOINT displays only one mount point (usually the last mounted instance of the filesystem), and the column MOUNTPOINTS displays by multi\-line cell all mount points associated with the device. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-all\fP -.RS 4 -Also list empty devices and RAM disk devices. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-b\fP, \fB\-\-bytes\fP -.RS 4 -Print the SIZE column in bytes rather than in a human\-readable format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-D\fP, \fB\-\-discard\fP -.RS 4 -Print information about the discarding capabilities (TRIM, UNMAP) for each device. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-nodeps\fP -.RS 4 -Do not print holder devices or slaves. For example, \fBlsblk \-\-nodeps /dev/sda\fP prints information about the sda device only. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-E\fP, \fB\-\-dedup\fP \fIcolumn\fP -.RS 4 -Use \fIcolumn\fP as a de\-duplication key to de\-duplicate output tree. If the key is not available for the device, or the device is a partition and parental whole\-disk device provides the same key than the device is always printed. -.sp -The usual use case is to de\-duplicate output on system multi\-path devices, for example by \fB\-E WWN\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-e\fP, \fB\-\-exclude\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Exclude the devices specified by the comma\-separated \fIlist\fP of major device numbers. Note that RAM disks (major=1) are excluded by default if \fB\-\-all\fP is not specified. The filter is applied to the top\-level devices only. This may be confusing for \fB\-\-list\fP output format where hierarchy of the devices is not obvious. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-fs\fP -.RS 4 -Output info about filesystems. This option is equivalent to \fB\-o NAME,FSTYPE,FSVER,LABEL,UUID,FSAVAIL,FSUSE%,MOUNTPOINTS\fP. The authoritative information about filesystems and raids is provided by the \fBblkid\fP(8) command. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-I\fP, \fB\-\-include\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Include devices specified by the comma\-separated \fIlist\fP of major device numbers. The filter is applied to the top\-level devices only. This may be confusing for \fB\-\-list\fP output format where hierarchy of the devices is not obvious. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-i\fP, \fB\-\-ascii\fP -.RS 4 -Use ASCII characters for tree formatting. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-J\fP, \fB\-\-json\fP -.RS 4 -Use JSON output format. It\(cqs strongly recommended to use \fB\-\-output\fP and also \fB\-\-tree\fP if necessary. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-list\fP -.RS 4 -Produce output in the form of a list. The output does not provide information about relationships between devices and since version 2.34 every device is printed only once if \fB\-\-pairs\fP or \fB\-\-raw\fP not specified (the parsable outputs are maintained in backwardly compatible way). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-M\fP, \fB\-\-merge\fP -.RS 4 -Group parents of sub\-trees to provide more readable output for RAIDs and Multi\-path devices. The tree\-like output is required. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-m\fP, \fB\-\-perms\fP -.RS 4 -Output info about device owner, group and mode. This option is equivalent to \fB\-o NAME,SIZE,OWNER,GROUP,MODE\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-noheadings\fP -.RS 4 -Do not print a header line. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-output\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Specify which output columns to print. Use \fB\-\-help\fP to get a list of all supported columns. The columns may affect tree\-like output. The default is to use tree for the column \(aqNAME\(aq (see also \fB\-\-tree\fP). -.sp -The default list of columns may be extended if \fIlist\fP is specified in the format \fI+list\fP (e.g., \fBlsblk \-o +UUID\fP). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-O\fP, \fB\-\-output\-all\fP -.RS 4 -Output all available columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-P\fP, \fB\-\-pairs\fP -.RS 4 -Produce output in the form of key="value" pairs. The output lines are still ordered by dependencies. All potentially unsafe value characters are hex\-escaped (\(rsx<code>). The key (variable name) will be modified to contain only characters allowed for a shell variable identifiers, for example, MIN_IO and FSUSE_PCT instead of MIN\-IO and FSUSE%. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-paths\fP -.RS 4 -Print full device paths. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-raw\fP -.RS 4 -Produce output in raw format. The output lines are still ordered by dependencies. All potentially unsafe characters are hex\-escaped (\(rsx<code>) in the NAME, KNAME, LABEL, PARTLABEL and MOUNTPOINT columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-S\fP, \fB\-\-scsi\fP -.RS 4 -Output info about SCSI devices only. All partitions, slaves and holder devices are ignored. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-inverse\fP -.RS 4 -Print dependencies in inverse order. If the \fB\-\-list\fP output is requested then the lines are still ordered by dependencies. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-T\fP, \fB\-\-tree\fP[\fB=\fP\fIcolumn\fP] -.RS 4 -Force tree\-like output format. If \fIcolumn\fP is specified, then a tree is printed in the column. The default is NAME column. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-topology\fP -.RS 4 -Output info about block\-device topology. This option is equivalent to -.sp -\fB\-o NAME,ALIGNMENT,MIN\-IO,OPT\-IO,PHY\-SEC,LOG\-SEC,ROTA,SCHED,RQ\-SIZE,RA,WSAME\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-w\fP, \fB\-\-width\fP \fInumber\fP -.RS 4 -Specifies output width as a number of characters. The default is the number of the terminal columns, and if not executed on a terminal, then output width is not restricted at all by default. This option also forces \fBlsblk\fP to assume that terminal control characters and unsafe characters are not allowed. The expected use\-case is for example when \fBlsblk\fP is used by the \fBwatch\fP(1) command. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-x\fP, \fB\-\-sort\fP \fIcolumn\fP -.RS 4 -Sort output lines by \fIcolumn\fP. This option enables \fB\-\-list\fP output format by default. It is possible to use the option \fB\-\-tree\fP to force tree\-like output and than the tree branches are sorted by the \fIcolumn\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-z\fP, \fB\-\-zoned\fP -.RS 4 -Print the zone model for each device. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-sysroot\fP \fIdirectory\fP -.RS 4 -Gather data for a Linux instance other than the instance from which the \fBlsblk\fP command is issued. The specified directory is the system root of the Linux instance to be inspected. The real device nodes in the target directory can be replaced by text files with udev attributes. -.RE -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -0 -.RS 4 -success -.RE -.sp -1 -.RS 4 -failure -.RE -.sp -32 -.RS 4 -none of specified devices found -.RE -.sp -64 -.RS 4 -some specified devices found, some not found -.RE -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -LSBLK_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables \fBlsblk\fP debug output. -.RE -.sp -LIBBLKID_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables \fBlibblkid\fP debug output. -.RE -.sp -LIBMOUNT_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables \fBlibmount\fP debug output. -.RE -.sp -LIBSMARTCOLS_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables \fBlibsmartcols\fP debug output. -.RE -.sp -LIBSMARTCOLS_DEBUG_PADDING=on -.RS 4 -use visible padding characters. -.RE -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -For partitions, some information (e.g., queue attributes) is inherited from the parent device. -.sp -The \fBlsblk\fP command needs to be able to look up each block device by major:minor numbers, which is done by using \fI/sys/dev/block\fP. This sysfs block directory appeared in kernel 2.6.27 (October 2008). In case of problems with a new enough kernel, check that CONFIG_SYSFS was enabled at the time of the kernel build. -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "mbroz\(atredhat.com" "Milan Broz" "," -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBls\fP(1), -\fBblkid\fP(8), -\fBfindmnt\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBlsblk\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/lslocks.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/lslocks.8 deleted file mode 100644 index a42c8363..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/lslocks.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,169 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: lslocks -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "LSLOCKS" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -lslocks \- list local system locks -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBlslocks\fP [options] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBlslocks\fP lists information about all the currently held file locks in a Linux system. -.sp -Note that lslocks also lists OFD (Open File Description) locks, these locks are not associated with any process (PID is \-1). OFD locks are associated with the open file description on which they are acquired. This lock type is available since Linux 3.15, see \fBfcntl\fP(2) for more details. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-b\fP, \fB\-\-bytes\fP -.RS 4 -Print the SIZE column in bytes rather than in a human\-readable format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-i\fP, \fB\-\-noinaccessible\fP -.RS 4 -Ignore lock files which are inaccessible for the current user. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-J\fP, \fB\-\-json\fP -.RS 4 -Use JSON output format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-noheadings\fP -.RS 4 -Do not print a header line. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-output\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Specify which output columns to print. Use \fB\-\-help\fP to get a list of all supported columns. -.sp -The default list of columns may be extended if \fIlist\fP is specified in the format \fI+list\fP (e.g., \fBlslocks \-o +BLOCKER\fP). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-output\-all\fP -.RS 4 -Output all available columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-pid\fP \fIpid\fP -.RS 4 -Display only the locks held by the process with this \fIpid\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-raw\fP -.RS 4 -Use the raw output format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-u\fP, \fB\-\-notruncate\fP -.RS 4 -Do not truncate text in columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "OUTPUT" -.sp -COMMAND -.RS 4 -The command name of the process holding the lock. -.RE -.sp -PID -.RS 4 -The process ID of the process which holds the lock or \-1 for OFDLCK. -.RE -.sp -TYPE -.RS 4 -The type of lock; can be FLOCK (created with \fBflock\fP(2)), POSIX (created with \fBfcntl\fP(2) and \fBlockf\fP(3)) or OFDLCK (created with \fBfcntl\fP(2)). -.RE -.sp -SIZE -.RS 4 -Size of the locked file. -.RE -.sp -MODE -.RS 4 -The lock\(cqs access permissions (read, write). If the process is blocked and waiting for the lock, then the mode is postfixed with an \(aq*\(aq (asterisk). -.RE -.sp -M -.RS 4 -Whether the lock is mandatory; 0 means no (meaning the lock is only advisory), 1 means yes. (See \fBfcntl\fP(2).) -.RE -.sp -START -.RS 4 -Relative byte offset of the lock. -.RE -.sp -END -.RS 4 -Ending offset of the lock. -.RE -.sp -PATH -.RS 4 -Full path of the lock. If none is found, or there are no permissions to read the path, it will fall back to the device\(cqs mountpoint and "..." is appended to the path. The path might be truncated; use \fB\-\-notruncate\fP to get the full path. -.RE -.sp -BLOCKER -.RS 4 -The PID of the process which blocks the lock. -.RE -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -The \fBlslocks\fP command is meant to replace the \fBlslk\fP(8) command, originally written by \c -.MTO "abe\(atpurdue.edu" "Victor A. Abell" "" -and unmaintained since 2001. -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "dave\(atgnu.org" "Davidlohr Bueso" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBflock\fP(1), -\fBfcntl\fP(2), -\fBlockf\fP(3) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBlslocks\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/lsns.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/lsns.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 9a2875cf..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/lsns.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,124 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: lsns -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "LSNS" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -lsns \- list namespaces -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBlsns\fP [options] \fInamespace\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBlsns\fP lists information about all the currently accessible namespaces or about the given \fInamespace\fP. The \fInamespace\fP identifier is an inode number. -.sp -The default output is subject to change. So whenever possible, you should avoid using default outputs in your scripts. Always explicitly define expected columns by using the \fB\-\-output\fP option together with a columns list in environments where a stable output is required. -.sp -The \fBNSFS\fP column, printed when \fBnet\fP is specified for the \fB\-\-type\fP option, is special; it uses multi\-line cells. Use the option \fB\-\-nowrap\fP to switch to ","\-separated single\-line representation. -.sp -Note that \fBlsns\fP reads information directly from the \fI/proc\fP filesystem and for non\-root users it may return incomplete information. The current \fI/proc\fP filesystem may be unshared and affected by a PID namespace (see \fBunshare \-\-mount\-proc\fP for more details). \fBlsns\fP is not able to see persistent namespaces without processes where the namespace instance is held by a bind mount to /proc/\fIpid\fP/ns/\fItype\fP. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-J\fP, \fB\-\-json\fP -.RS 4 -Use JSON output format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-list\fP -.RS 4 -Use list output format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-noheadings\fP -.RS 4 -Do not print a header line. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-output\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Specify which output columns to print. Use \fB\-\-help\fP to get a list of all supported columns. -.sp -The default list of columns may be extended if \fIlist\fP is specified in the format \fB+\fP\fIlist\fP (e.g., \fBlsns \-o +PATH\fP). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-output\-all\fP -.RS 4 -Output all available columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-task\fP \fIPID\fP -.RS 4 -Display only the namespaces held by the process with this \fIPID\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-raw\fP -.RS 4 -Use the raw output format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-type\fP \fItype\fP -.RS 4 -Display the specified \fItype\fP of namespaces only. The supported types are \fBmnt\fP, \fBnet\fP, \fBipc\fP, \fBuser\fP, \fBpid\fP, \fButs\fP, \fBcgroup\fP and \fBtime\fP. This option may be given more than once. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-u\fP, \fB\-\-notruncate\fP -.RS 4 -Do not truncate text in columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-W\fP, \fB\-\-nowrap\fP -.RS 4 -Do not use multi\-line text in columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBnsenter\fP(1), -\fBunshare\fP(1), -\fBclone\fP(2), -\fBnamespaces\fP(7), -\fBioctl_ns(2)\fP -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBlsns\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mkfs.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mkfs.8 deleted file mode 100644 index c73300c6..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mkfs.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,102 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: mkfs -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "MKFS" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -mkfs \- build a Linux filesystem -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBmkfs\fP [options] [\fB\-t\fP \fItype\fP] [\fIfs\-options\fP] \fIdevice\fP [\fIsize\fP] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBThis mkfs frontend is deprecated in favour of filesystem specific mkfs.<type> utils.\fP -.sp -\fBmkfs\fP is used to build a Linux filesystem on a device, usually a hard disk partition. The \fIdevice\fP argument is either the device name (e.g., \fI/dev/hda1\fP, \fI/dev/sdb2\fP), or a regular file that shall contain the filesystem. The \fIsize\fP argument is the number of blocks to be used for the filesystem. -.sp -The exit status returned by \fBmkfs\fP is 0 on success and 1 on failure. -.sp -In actuality, \fBmkfs\fP is simply a front\-end for the various filesystem builders (\fBmkfs.\fP\fIfstype\fP) available under Linux. The filesystem\-specific builder is searched for via your \fBPATH\fP environment setting only. Please see the filesystem\-specific builder manual pages for further details. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-type\fP \fItype\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the \fItype\fP of filesystem to be built. If not specified, the default filesystem type (currently ext2) is used. -.RE -.sp -\fIfs\-options\fP -.RS 4 -Filesystem\-specific options to be passed to the real filesystem builder. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Produce verbose output, including all filesystem\-specific commands that are executed. Specifying this option more than once inhibits execution of any filesystem\-specific commands. This is really only useful for testing. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. (Option \fB\-V\fP will display version information only when it is the only parameter, otherwise it will work as \fB\-\-verbose\fP.) -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "BUGS" -.sp -All generic options must precede and not be combined with filesystem\-specific options. Some filesystem\-specific programs do not automatically detect the device size and require the \fIsize\fP parameter to be specified. -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "david\(atods.com" "David Engel" "," -.MTO "waltje\(atuwalt.nl.mugnet.org" "Fred N. van Kempen" "," -.MTO "sommel\(atsci.kun.nl" "Ron Sommeling" "." -.sp -The manual page was shamelessly adapted from Remy Card\(cqs version for the ext2 filesystem. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBfs\fP(5), -\fBbadblocks\fP(8), -\fBfsck\fP(8), -\fBmkdosfs\fP(8), -\fBmke2fs\fP(8), -\fBmkfs.bfs\fP(8), -\fBmkfs.ext2\fP(8), -\fBmkfs.ext3\fP(8), -\fBmkfs.ext4\fP(8), -\fBmkfs.minix\fP(8), -\fBmkfs.msdos\fP(8), -\fBmkfs.vfat\fP(8), -\fBmkfs.xfs\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBmkfs\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mkfs.bfs.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mkfs.bfs.8 deleted file mode 100644 index b95d359f..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mkfs.bfs.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,94 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: mkfs.bfs -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "MKFS.BFS" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -mkfs.bfs \- make an SCO bfs filesystem -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBmkfs.bfs\fP [options] \fIdevice\fP [\fIblock\-count\fP] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBmkfs.bfs\fP creates an SCO bfs filesystem on a block device (usually a disk partition or a file accessed via the loop device). -.sp -The \fIblock\-count\fP parameter is the desired size of the filesystem, in blocks. If nothing is specified, the entire partition will be used. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-N\fP, \fB\-\-inodes\fP \fInumber\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the desired \fInumber\fP of inodes (at most 512). If nothing is specified, some default number in the range 48\-512 is picked depending on the size of the partition. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-vname\fP \fIlabel\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the volume \fIlabel\fP. I have no idea if/where this is used. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-F\fP, \fB\-\-fname\fP \fIname\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the filesystem \fIname\fP. I have no idea if/where this is used. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Explain what is being done. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-c\fP -.RS 4 -This option is silently ignored. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l\fP -.RS 4 -This option is silently ignored. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. Option \fB\-V\fP only works as \fB\-\-version\fP when it is the only option. -.RE -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -The exit status returned by \fBmkfs.bfs\fP is 0 when all went well, and 1 when something went wrong. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBmkfs\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBmkfs.bfs\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mkfs.cramfs.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mkfs.cramfs.8 deleted file mode 100644 index da550c2d..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mkfs.cramfs.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,132 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: mkfs.cramfs -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "MKFS.CRAMFS" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -mkfs.cramfs \- make compressed ROM file system -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBmkfs.cramfs\fP [options] \fIdirectory file\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -Files on cramfs file systems are zlib\-compressed one page at a time to allow random read access. The metadata is not compressed, but is expressed in a terse representation that is more space\-efficient than conventional file systems. -.sp -The file system is intentionally read\-only to simplify its design; random write access for compressed files is difficult to implement. cramfs ships with a utility (\fBmkcramfs\fP(8)) to pack files into new cramfs images. -.sp -File sizes are limited to less than 16 MB. -.sp -Maximum file system size is a little under 272 MB. (The last file on the file system must begin before the 256 MB block, but can extend past it.) -.SH "ARGUMENTS" -.sp -The \fIdirectory\fP is simply the root of the directory tree that we want to generate a compressed filesystem out of. -.sp -The \fIfile\fP will contain the cram file system, which later can be mounted. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-v\fP -.RS 4 -Enable verbose messaging. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-E\fP -.RS 4 -Treat all warnings as errors, which are reflected as command exit status. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-b\fP \fIblocksize\fP -.RS 4 -Use defined block size, which has to be divisible by page size. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-e\fP \fIedition\fP -.RS 4 -Use defined file system edition number in superblock. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-N\fP \fIbig, little, host\fP -.RS 4 -Use defined endianness. Value defaults to \fIhost\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-i\fP \fIfile\fP -.RS 4 -Insert a \fIfile\fP to cramfs file system. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP \fIname\fP -.RS 4 -Set name of the cramfs file system. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP -.RS 4 -Pad by 512 bytes for boot code. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP -.RS 4 -This option is ignored. Originally the \fB\-s\fP turned on directory entry sorting. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-z\fP -.RS 4 -Make explicit holes. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -\fB0\fP -.RS 4 -success -.RE -.sp -\fB8\fP -.RS 4 -operation error, such as unable to allocate memory -.RE -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBfsck.cramfs\fP(8), -\fBmount\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBmkfs.cramfs\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mkfs.minix.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mkfs.minix.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 8faafa4a..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mkfs.minix.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,142 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: mkfs.minix -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "MKFS.MINIX" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -mkfs.minix \- make a Minix filesystem -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBmkfs.minix\fP [options] \fIdevice\fP [\fIsize\-in\-blocks\fP] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBmkfs.minix\fP creates a Linux MINIX filesystem on a device (usually a disk partition). -.sp -The \fIdevice\fP is usually of the following form: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -/dev/hda[1\-8] (IDE disk 1) -/dev/hdb[1\-8] (IDE disk 2) -/dev/sda[1\-8] (SCSI disk 1) -/dev/sdb[1\-8] (SCSI disk 2) -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -The device may be a block device or an image file of one, but this is not enforced. Expect not much fun on a character device :\-). -.sp -The \fIsize\-in\-blocks\fP parameter is the desired size of the file system, in blocks. It is present only for backwards compatibility. If omitted the size will be determined automatically. Only block counts strictly greater than 10 and strictly less than 65536 are allowed. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-check\fP -.RS 4 -Check the device for bad blocks before creating the filesystem. If any are found, the count is printed. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-namelength\fP \fIlength\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the maximum length of filenames. Currently, the only allowable values are 14 and 30 for file system versions 1 and 2. Version 3 allows only value 60. The default is 30. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-lock\fP[=\fImode\fP] -.RS 4 -Use exclusive BSD lock for device or file it operates. The optional argument \fImode\fP can be \fByes\fP, \fBno\fP (or 1 and 0) or \fBnonblock\fP. If the \fImode\fP argument is omitted, it defaults to \fB"yes"\fP. This option overwrites environment variable \fB$LOCK_BLOCK_DEVICE\fP. The default is not to use any lock at all, but it\(cqs recommended to avoid collisions with udevd or other tools. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-i\fP, \fB\-\-inodes\fP \fInumber\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the number of inodes for the filesystem. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-badblocks\fP \fIfilename\fP -.RS 4 -Read the list of bad blocks from \fIfilename\fP. The file has one bad\-block number per line. The count of bad blocks read is printed. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-1\fP -.RS 4 -Make a Minix version 1 filesystem. This is the default. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-2\fP, \fB\-v\fP -.RS 4 -Make a Minix version 2 filesystem. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-3\fP -.RS 4 -Make a Minix version 3 filesystem. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. The long option cannot be combined with other options. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -LOCK_BLOCK_DEVICE=<mode> -.RS 4 -use exclusive BSD lock. The mode is "1" or "0". See \fB\-\-lock\fP for more details. -.RE -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -The exit status returned by \fBmkfs.minix\fP is one of the following: -.sp -0 -.RS 4 -No errors -.RE -.sp -8 -.RS 4 -Operational error -.RE -.sp -16 -.RS 4 -Usage or syntax error -.RE -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBfsck\fP(8), -\fBmkfs\fP(8), -\fBreboot\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBmkfs.minix\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mkswap.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mkswap.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 816fe6d9..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mkswap.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,151 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: mkswap -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "MKSWAP" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -mkswap \- set up a Linux swap area -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBmkswap\fP [options] \fIdevice\fP [\fIsize\fP] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBmkswap\fP sets up a Linux swap area on a device or in a file. -.sp -The \fIdevice\fP argument will usually be a disk partition (something like \fI/dev/sdb7\fP) but can also be a file. The Linux kernel does not look at partition IDs, but many installation scripts will assume that partitions of hex type 82 (LINUX_SWAP) are meant to be swap partitions. (\fBWarning: Solaris also uses this type. Be careful not to kill your Solaris partitions.\fP) -.sp -The \fIsize\fP parameter is superfluous but retained for backwards compatibility. (It specifies the desired size of the swap area in 1024\-byte blocks. \fBmkswap\fP will use the entire partition or file if it is omitted. Specifying it is unwise \- a typo may destroy your disk.) -.sp -After creating the swap area, you need the \fBswapon\fP command to start using it. Usually swap areas are listed in \fI/etc/fstab\fP so that they can be taken into use at boot time by a \fBswapon \-a\fP command in some boot script. -.SH "WARNING" -.sp -The swap header does not touch the first block. A boot loader or disk label can be there, but it is not a recommended setup. The recommended setup is to use a separate partition for a Linux swap area. -.sp -\fBmkswap\fP, like many others mkfs\-like utils, \fBerases the first partition block to make any previous filesystem invisible.\fP -.sp -However, \fBmkswap\fP refuses to erase the first block on a device with a disk label (SUN, BSD, ...). -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-check\fP -.RS 4 -Check the device (if it is a block device) for bad blocks before creating the swap area. If any bad blocks are found, the count is printed. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-force\fP -.RS 4 -Go ahead even if the command is stupid. This allows the creation of a swap area larger than the file or partition it resides on. -.sp -Also, without this option, \fBmkswap\fP will refuse to erase the first block on a device with a partition table. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-L\fP, \fB\-\-label\fP \fIlabel\fP -.RS 4 -Specify a \fIlabel\fP for the device, to allow \fBswapon\fP by label. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-lock\fP[=\fImode\fP] -.RS 4 -Use exclusive BSD lock for device or file it operates. The optional argument \fImode\fP can be \fByes\fP, \fBno\fP (or 1 and 0) or \fBnonblock\fP. If the \fImode\fP argument is omitted, it defaults to \fB"yes"\fP. This option overwrites environment variable \fB$LOCK_BLOCK_DEVICE\fP. The default is not to use any lock at all, but it\(cqs recommended to avoid collisions with udevd or other tools. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-pagesize\fP \fIsize\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the page \fIsize\fP (in bytes) to use. This option is usually unnecessary; \fBmkswap\fP reads the size from the kernel. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-U\fP, \fB\-\-uuid\fP \fIUUID\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the \fIUUID\fP to use. The default is to generate a UUID. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-swapversion 1\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the swap\-space version. (This option is currently pointless, as the old \fB\-v 0\fP option has become obsolete and now only \fB\-v 1\fP is supported. The kernel has not supported v0 swap\-space format since 2.5.22 (June 2002). The new version v1 is supported since 2.1.117 (August 1998).) -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Verbose execution. With this option \fBmkswap\fP will output more details about detected problems during swap area set up. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -LIBBLKID_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables libblkid debug output. -.RE -.sp -LOCK_BLOCK_DEVICE=<mode> -.RS 4 -use exclusive BSD lock. The mode is "1" or "0". See \fB\-\-lock\fP for more details. -.RE -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -The maximum useful size of a swap area depends on the architecture and the kernel version. -.sp -The maximum number of the pages that is possible to address by swap area header is 4294967295 (32\-bit unsigned int). The remaining space on the swap device is ignored. -.sp -Presently, Linux allows 32 swap areas. The areas in use can be seen in the file \fI/proc/swaps\fP. -.sp -\fBmkswap\fP refuses areas smaller than 10 pages. -.sp -If you don\(cqt know the page size that your machine uses, you may be able to look it up with \fBcat /proc/cpuinfo\fP (or you may not \- the contents of this file depend on architecture and kernel version). -.sp -To set up a swap file, it is necessary to create that file before initializing it with \fBmkswap\fP, e.g. using a command like -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -# dd if=/dev/zero of=swapfile bs=1MiB count=$((8*1024)) -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -to create 8GiB swapfile. -.sp -Please read notes from \fBswapon\fP(8) about \fBthe swap file use restrictions\fP (holes, preallocation and copy\-on\-write issues). -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBfdisk\fP(8), -\fBswapon\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBmkswap\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mount.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mount.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 7ea8535b..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mount.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,2425 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: mount -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "MOUNT" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -mount \- mount a filesystem -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBmount\fP [\fB\-h\fP|\fB\-V\fP] -.sp -\fBmount\fP [\fB\-l\fP] [\fB\-t\fP \fIfstype\fP] -.sp -\fBmount\fP \fB\-a\fP [\fB\-fFnrsvw\fP] [\fB\-t\fP \fIfstype\fP] [\fB\-O\fP \fIoptlist\fP] -.sp -\fBmount\fP [\fB\-fnrsvw\fP] [\fB\-o\fP \fIoptions\fP] \fIdevice\fP|\fImountpoint\fP -.sp -\fBmount\fP [\fB\-fnrsvw\fP] [\fB\-t\fP \fIfstype\fP] [\fB\-o\fP \fIoptions\fP] \fIdevice mountpoint\fP -.sp -\fBmount\fP \fB\-\-bind\fP|\fB\-\-rbind\fP|\fB\-\-move\fP \fIolddir newdir\fP -.sp -\fBmount\fP \fB\-\-make\fP\-[\fBshared\fP|\fBslave\fP|\fBprivate\fP|\fBunbindable\fP|\fBrshared\fP|\fBrslave\fP|\fBrprivate\fP|\fBrunbindable\fP] \fImountpoint\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -All files accessible in a Unix system are arranged in one big tree, the file hierarchy, rooted at \fI/\fP. These files can be spread out over several devices. The \fBmount\fP command serves to attach the filesystem found on some device to the big file tree. Conversely, the \fBumount\fP(8) command will detach it again. The filesystem is used to control how data is stored on the device or provided in a virtual way by network or other services. -.sp -The standard form of the \fBmount\fP command is: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBmount \-t\fP \fItype device dir\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -This tells the kernel to attach the filesystem found on \fIdevice\fP (which is of type \fItype\fP) at the directory \fIdir\fP. The option \fB\-t\fP \fItype\fP is optional. The \fBmount\fP command is usually able to detect a filesystem. The root permissions are necessary to mount a filesystem by default. See section "Non\-superuser mounts" below for more details. The previous contents (if any) and owner and mode of \fIdir\fP become invisible, and as long as this filesystem remains mounted, the pathname \fIdir\fP refers to the root of the filesystem on \fIdevice\fP. -.sp -If only the directory or the device is given, for example: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBmount /dir\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -then \fBmount\fP looks for a mountpoint (and if not found then for a device) in the \fI/etc/fstab\fP file. It\(cqs possible to use the \fB\-\-target\fP or \fB\-\-source\fP options to avoid ambiguous interpretation of the given argument. For example: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBmount \-\-target /mountpoint\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -The same filesystem may be mounted more than once, and in some cases (e.g., network filesystems) the same filesystem may be mounted on the same mountpoint multiple times. The \fBmount\fP command does not implement any policy to control this behavior. All behavior is controlled by the kernel and it is usually specific to the filesystem driver. The exception is \fB\-\-all\fP, in this case already mounted filesystems are ignored (see \fB\-\-all\fP below for more details). -.SS "Listing the mounts" -.sp -The listing mode is maintained for backward compatibility only. -.sp -For more robust and customizable output use \fBfindmnt\fP(8), \fBespecially in your scripts\fP. Note that control characters in the mountpoint name are replaced with \(aq?\(aq. -.sp -The following command lists all mounted filesystems (of type \fItype\fP): -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBmount\fP [\fB\-l\fP] [\fB\-t\fP \fItype\fP] -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -The option \fB\-l\fP adds labels to this listing. See below. -.SS "Indicating the device and filesystem" -.sp -Most devices are indicated by a filename (of a block special device), like \fI/dev/sda1\fP, but there are other possibilities. For example, in the case of an NFS mount, \fIdevice\fP may look like \fIknuth.cwi.nl:/dir\fP. -.sp -The device names of disk partitions are unstable; hardware reconfiguration, and adding or removing a device can cause changes in names. This is the reason why it\(cqs strongly recommended to use filesystem or partition identifiers like UUID or LABEL. Currently supported identifiers (tags): -.sp -LABEL=\fIlabel\fP -.RS 4 -Human readable filesystem identifier. See also \fB\-L\fP. -.RE -.sp -UUID=\fIuuid\fP -.RS 4 -Filesystem universally unique identifier. The format of the UUID is usually a series of hex digits separated by hyphens. See also \fB\-U\fP. -.sp -Note that \fBmount\fP uses UUIDs as strings. The UUIDs from the command line or from \fBfstab\fP(5) are not converted to internal binary representation. The string representation of the UUID should be based on lower case characters. -.RE -.sp -PARTLABEL=\fIlabel\fP -.RS 4 -Human readable partition identifier. This identifier is independent on filesystem and does not change by mkfs or mkswap operations It\(cqs supported for example for GUID Partition Tables (GPT). -.RE -.sp -PARTUUID=\fIuuid\fP -.RS 4 -Partition universally unique identifier. This identifier is independent on filesystem and does not change by mkfs or mkswap operations It\(cqs supported for example for GUID Partition Tables (GPT). -.RE -.sp -ID=\fIid\fP -.RS 4 -Hardware block device ID as generated by udevd. This identifier is usually based on WWN (unique storage identifier) and assigned by the hardware manufacturer. See \fBls /dev/disk/by\-id\fP for more details, this directory and running udevd is required. This identifier is not recommended for generic use as the identifier is not strictly defined and it depends on udev, udev rules and hardware. -.RE -.sp -The command \fBlsblk \-\-fs\fP provides an overview of filesystems, LABELs and UUIDs on available block devices. The command \fBblkid \-p <device>\fP provides details about a filesystem on the specified device. -.sp -Don\(cqt forget that there is no guarantee that UUIDs and labels are really unique, especially if you move, share or copy the device. Use \fBlsblk \-o +UUID,PARTUUID\fP to verify that the UUIDs are really unique in your system. -.sp -The recommended setup is to use tags (e.g. \fBUUID\fP=\fIuuid\fP) rather than \fI/dev/disk/by\-{label,uuid,id,partuuid,partlabel}\fP udev symlinks in the \fI/etc/fstab\fP file. Tags are more readable, robust and portable. The \fBmount\fP(8) command internally uses udev symlinks, so the use of symlinks in \fI/etc/fstab\fP has no advantage over tags. For more details see \fBlibblkid\fP(3). -.sp -The \fIproc\fP filesystem is not associated with a special device, and when mounting it, an arbitrary keyword \- for example, \fIproc\fP \- can be used instead of a device specification. (The customary choice \fInone\fP is less fortunate: the error message \(aqnone already mounted\(aq from \fBmount\fP can be confusing.) -.SS "The files /etc/fstab, /etc/mtab and /proc/mounts" -.sp -The file \fI/etc/fstab\fP (see \fBfstab\fP(5)), may contain lines describing what devices are usually mounted where, using which options. The default location of the \fBfstab\fP(5) file can be overridden with the \fB\-\-fstab\fP \fIpath\fP command\-line option (see below for more details). -.sp -The command -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBmount \-a\fP [\fB\-t\fP \fItype\fP] [\fB\-O\fP \fIoptlist\fP] -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -(usually given in a bootscript) causes all filesystems mentioned in \fIfstab\fP (of the proper type and/or having or not having the proper options) to be mounted as indicated, except for those whose line contains the \fBnoauto\fP keyword. Adding the \fB\-F\fP option will make \fBmount\fP fork, so that the filesystems are mounted in parallel. -.sp -When mounting a filesystem mentioned in \fIfstab\fP or \fImtab\fP, it suffices to specify on the command line only the device, or only the mount point. -.sp -The programs \fBmount\fP and \fBumount\fP(8) traditionally maintained a list of currently mounted filesystems in the file \fI/etc/mtab\fP. The support for regular classic \fI/etc/mtab\fP is completely disabled at compile time by default, because on current Linux systems it is better to make \fI/etc/mtab\fP a symlink to \fI/proc/mounts\fP instead. The regular \fImtab\fP file maintained in userspace cannot reliably work with namespaces, containers and other advanced Linux features. If the regular \fImtab\fP support is enabled, then it\(cqs possible to use the file as well as the symlink. -.sp -If no arguments are given to \fBmount\fP, the list of mounted filesystems is printed. -.sp -If you want to override mount options from \fI/etc/fstab\fP, you have to use the \fB\-o\fP option: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBmount\fP \fIdevice\fP*\fB*\fP|\fIdir\fP \fB\-o\fP \fIoptions\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -and then the mount options from the command line will be appended to the list of options from \fI/etc/fstab\fP. This default behaviour can be changed using the \fB\-\-options\-mode\fP command\-line option. The usual behavior is that the last option wins if there are conflicting ones. -.sp -The \fBmount\fP program does not read the \fI/etc/fstab\fP file if both \fIdevice\fP (or LABEL, UUID, ID, PARTUUID or PARTLABEL) and \fIdir\fP are specified. For example, to mount device \fBfoo\fP at \fB/dir\fP: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBmount /dev/foo /dir\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -This default behaviour can be changed by using the \fB\-\-options\-source\-force\fP command\-line option to always read configuration from \fIfstab\fP. For non\-root users \fBmount\fP always reads the \fIfstab\fP configuration. -.SS "Non\-superuser mounts" -.sp -Normally, only the superuser can mount filesystems. However, when \fIfstab\fP contains the \fBuser\fP option on a line, anybody can mount the corresponding filesystem. -.sp -Thus, given a line -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fB/dev/cdrom /cd iso9660 ro,user,noauto,unhide\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -any user can mount the iso9660 filesystem found on an inserted CDROM using the command: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBmount /cd\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -Note that \fBmount\fP is very strict about non\-root users and all paths specified on command line are verified before \fIfstab\fP is parsed or a helper program is executed. It\(cqs strongly recommended to use a valid mountpoint to specify filesystem, otherwise \fBmount\fP may fail. For example it\(cqs a bad idea to use NFS or CIFS source on command line. -.sp -Since util\-linux 2.35, \fBmount\fP does not exit when user permissions are inadequate according to libmount\(cqs internal security rules. Instead, it drops suid permissions and continues as regular non\-root user. This behavior supports use\-cases where root permissions are not necessary (e.g., fuse filesystems, user namespaces, etc). -.sp -For more details, see \fBfstab\fP(5). Only the user that mounted a filesystem can unmount it again. If any user should be able to unmount it, then use \fBusers\fP instead of \fBuser\fP in the \fIfstab\fP line. The \fBowner\fP option is similar to the \fBuser\fP option, with the restriction that the user must be the owner of the special file. This may be useful e.g. for \fI/dev/fd\fP if a login script makes the console user owner of this device. The \fBgroup\fP option is similar, with the restriction that the user must be a member of the group of the special file. -.SS Blacklisted file systems -In the Linux kernel, file system types are implemented as kernel -modules. While many of these file systems are well maintained, -some of the older and less frequently used ones are not. This -poses a security risk, because maliciously crafted file system -images might open security holes when mounted either automatically -or by an inadvertent user. The -.B mount -command prints "unsupported file system type 'somefs'" in this case, -because it can't distinguish between a really unsupported file system -(kernel module non-existent) and a blacklisted file system. - -Users who need the blacklisted file systems and therefore want -to override the blacklisting can either load the blacklisted module -directly: -.RS - -.br -.BI "modprobe -v" " somefs" -.br - -.RE -or override the blacklist configuration by editing files under the -.I /etc/modprobe.d -directory. - -.SS "Bind mount operation" -.sp -Remount part of the file hierarchy somewhere else. The call is: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBmount \-\-bind\fP \fIolddir newdir\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -or by using this \fIfstab\fP entry: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fB/\fP\fIolddir\fP \fB/\fP\fInewdir\fP \fBnone bind\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -After this call the same contents are accessible in two places. -.sp -It is important to understand that "bind" does not create any second\-class or special node in the kernel VFS. The "bind" is just another operation to attach a filesystem. There is nowhere stored information that the filesystem has been attached by a "bind" operation. The \fIolddir\fP and \fInewdir\fP are independent and the \fIolddir\fP may be unmounted. -.sp -One can also remount a single file (on a single file). It\(cqs also possible to use a bind mount to create a mountpoint from a regular directory, for example: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBmount \-\-bind foo foo\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -The bind mount call attaches only (part of) a single filesystem, not possible submounts. The entire file hierarchy including submounts can be attached a second place by using: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBmount \-\-rbind\fP \fIolddir newdir\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -Note that the filesystem mount options maintained by the kernel will remain the same as those on the original mount point. The userspace mount options (e.g., _netdev) will not be copied by \fBmount\fP and it\(cqs necessary to explicitly specify the options on the \fBmount\fP command line. -.sp -Since util\-linux 2.27 \fBmount\fP permits changing the mount options by passing the relevant options along with \fB\-\-bind\fP. For example: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBmount \-o bind,ro foo foo\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -This feature is not supported by the Linux kernel; it is implemented in userspace by an additional \fBmount\fP(2) remounting system call. This solution is not atomic. -.sp -The alternative (classic) way to create a read\-only bind mount is to use the remount operation, for example: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBmount \-\-bind\fP \fIolddir newdir\fP \fBmount \-o remount,bind,ro\fP \fIolddir newdir\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -Note that a read\-only bind will create a read\-only mountpoint (VFS entry), but the original filesystem superblock will still be writable, meaning that the \fIolddir\fP will be writable, but the \fInewdir\fP will be read\-only. -.sp -It\(cqs also possible to change nosuid, nodev, noexec, noatime, nodiratime and relatime VFS entry flags via a "remount,bind" operation. The other flags (for example filesystem\-specific flags) are silently ignored. It\(cqs impossible to change mount options recursively (for example with \fB\-o rbind,ro\fP). -.sp -Since util\-linux 2.31, \fBmount\fP ignores the \fBbind\fP flag from \fI/etc/fstab\fP on a \fBremount\fP operation (if "\-o remount" is specified on command line). This is necessary to fully control mount options on remount by command line. In previous versions the bind flag has been always applied and it was impossible to re\-define mount options without interaction with the bind semantic. This \fBmount\fP behavior does not affect situations when "remount,bind" is specified in the \fI/etc/fstab\fP file. -.SS "The move operation" -.sp -Move a \fBmounted tree\fP to another place (atomically). The call is: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBmount \-\-move\fP \fIolddir newdir\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -This will cause the contents which previously appeared under \fIolddir\fP to now be accessible under \fInewdir\fP. The physical location of the files is not changed. Note that \fIolddir\fP has to be a mountpoint. -.sp -Note also that moving a mount residing under a shared mount is invalid and unsupported. Use \fBfindmnt \-o TARGET,PROPAGATION\fP to see the current propagation flags. -.SS "Shared subtree operations" -.sp -Since Linux 2.6.15 it is possible to mark a mount and its submounts as shared, private, slave or unbindable. A shared mount provides the ability to create mirrors of that mount such that mounts and unmounts within any of the mirrors propagate to the other mirror. A slave mount receives propagation from its master, but not vice versa. A private mount carries no propagation abilities. An unbindable mount is a private mount which cannot be cloned through a bind operation. The detailed semantics are documented in \fIDocumentation/filesystems/sharedsubtree.txt\fP file in the kernel source tree; see also \fBmount_namespaces\fP(7). -.sp -Supported operations are: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -mount \-\-make\-shared mountpoint -mount \-\-make\-slave mountpoint -mount \-\-make\-private mountpoint -mount \-\-make\-unbindable mountpoint -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -The following commands allow one to recursively change the type of all the mounts under a given mountpoint. -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -mount \-\-make\-rshared mountpoint -mount \-\-make\-rslave mountpoint -mount \-\-make\-rprivate mountpoint -mount \-\-make\-runbindable mountpoint -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -\fBmount\fP(8) \fBdoes not read\fP \fBfstab\fP(5) when a \fB\-\-make\-\fP* operation is requested. All necessary information has to be specified on the command line. -.sp -Note that the Linux kernel does not allow changing multiple propagation flags with a single \fBmount\fP(2) system call, and the flags cannot be mixed with other mount options and operations. -.sp -Since util\-linux 2.23 the \fBmount\fP command can be used to do more propagation (topology) changes by one \fBmount\fP(8) call and do it also together with other mount operations. The propagation flags are applied by additional \fBmount\fP(2) system calls when the preceding mount operations were successful. Note that this use case is not atomic. It is possible to specify the propagation flags in \fBfstab\fP(5) as mount options (\fBprivate\fP, \fBslave\fP, \fBshared\fP, \fBunbindable\fP, \fBrprivate\fP, \fBrslave\fP, \fBrshared\fP, \fBrunbindable\fP). -.sp -For example: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -mount \-\-make\-private \-\-make\-unbindable /dev/sda1 /foo -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -is the same as: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -mount /dev/sda1 /foo -mount \-\-make\-private /foo -mount \-\-make\-unbindable /foo -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.SH "COMMAND\-LINE OPTIONS" -.sp -The full set of mount options used by an invocation of \fBmount\fP is determined by first extracting the mount options for the filesystem from the \fIfstab\fP table, then applying any options specified by the \fB\-o\fP argument, and finally applying a \fB\-r\fP or \fB\-w\fP option, when present. -.sp -The \fBmount\fP command does not pass all command\-line options to the \fB/sbin/mount.\fP\fIsuffix\fP mount helpers. The interface between \fBmount\fP and the mount helpers is described below in the section \fBEXTERNAL HELPERS\fP. -.sp -Command\-line options available for the \fBmount\fP command are: -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-all\fP -.RS 4 -Mount all filesystems (of the given types) mentioned in \fIfstab\fP (except for those whose line contains the \fBnoauto\fP keyword). The filesystems are mounted following their order in \fIfstab\fP. The \fBmount\fP command compares filesystem source, target (and fs root for bind mount or btrfs) to detect already mounted filesystems. The kernel table with already mounted filesystems is cached during \fBmount \-\-all\fP. This means that all duplicated \fIfstab\fP entries will be mounted. -.sp -The option \fB\-\-all\fP is possible to use for remount operation too. In this case all filters (\fB\-t\fP and \fB\-O\fP) are applied to the table of already mounted filesystems. -.sp -Since version 2.35 is possible to use the command line option \fB\-o\fP to alter mount options from \fIfstab\fP (see also \fB\-\-options\-mode\fP). -.sp -Note that it is a bad practice to use \fBmount \-a\fP for \fIfstab\fP checking. The recommended solution is \fBfindmnt \-\-verify\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-B\fP, \fB\-\-bind\fP -.RS 4 -Remount a subtree somewhere else (so that its contents are available in both places). See above, under \fBBind mounts\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-no\-canonicalize\fP -.RS 4 -Don\(cqt canonicalize paths. The \fBmount\fP command canonicalizes all paths (from the command line or \fIfstab\fP) by default. This option can be used together with the \fB\-f\fP flag for already canonicalized absolute paths. The option is designed for mount helpers which call \fBmount \-i\fP. It is strongly recommended to not use this command\-line option for normal mount operations. -.sp -Note that \fBmount\fP does not pass this option to the \fB/sbin/mount.\fP\fItype\fP helpers. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-F\fP, \fB\-\-fork\fP -.RS 4 -(Used in conjunction with \fB\-a\fP.) Fork off a new incarnation of \fBmount\fP for each device. This will do the mounts on different devices or different NFS servers in parallel. This has the advantage that it is faster; also NFS timeouts proceed in parallel. A disadvantage is that the order of the mount operations is undefined. Thus, you cannot use this option if you want to mount both \fI/usr\fP and \fI/usr/spool\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f, \-\-fake\fP -.RS 4 -Causes everything to be done except for the actual system call; if it\(cqs not obvious, this "fakes" mounting the filesystem. This option is useful in conjunction with the \fB\-v\fP flag to determine what the \fBmount\fP command is trying to do. It can also be used to add entries for devices that were mounted earlier with the \fB\-n\fP option. The \fB\-f\fP option checks for an existing record in \fI/etc/mtab\fP and fails when the record already exists (with a regular non\-fake mount, this check is done by the kernel). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-i, \-\-internal\-only\fP -.RS 4 -Don\(cqt call the \fB/sbin/mount.\fP\fIfilesystem\fP helper even if it exists. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-L\fP, \fB\-\-label\fP \fIlabel\fP -.RS 4 -Mount the partition that has the specified \fIlabel\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-show\-labels\fP -.RS 4 -Add the labels in the mount output. \fBmount\fP must have permission to read the disk device (e.g. be set\-user\-ID root) for this to work. One can set such a label for ext2, ext3 or ext4 using the \fBe2label\fP(8) utility, or for XFS using \fBxfs_admin\fP(8), or for reiserfs using \fBreiserfstune\fP(8). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-M\fP, \fB\-\-move\fP -.RS 4 -Move a subtree to some other place. See above, the subsection \fBThe move operation\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-no\-mtab\fP -.RS 4 -Mount without writing in \fI/etc/mtab\fP. This is necessary for example when \fI/etc\fP is on a read\-only filesystem. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-N\fP, \fB\-\-namespace\fP \fIns\fP -.RS 4 -Perform the mount operation in the mount namespace specified by \fIns\fP. \fIns\fP is either PID of process running in that namespace or special file representing that namespace. -.sp -\fBmount\fP switches to the mount namespace when it reads \fI/etc/fstab\fP, writes \fI/etc/mtab: (or writes to _/run/mount\fP) and calls the \fBmount\fP(2) system call, otherwise it runs in the original mount namespace. This means that the target namespace does not have to contain any libraries or other requirements necessary to execute the \fBmount\fP(2) call. -.sp -See \fBmount_namespaces\fP(7) for more information. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-O\fP, \fB\-\-test\-opts\fP \fIopts\fP -.RS 4 -Limit the set of filesystems to which the \fB\-a\fP option applies. In this regard it is like the \fB\-t\fP option except that \fB\-O\fP is useless without \fB\-a\fP. For example, the command -.sp -\fBmount \-a \-O no_netdev\fP -.sp -mounts all filesystems except those which have the option \fInetdev\fP specified in the options field in the \fI/etc/fstab\fP file. -.sp -It is different from \fB\-t\fP in that each option is matched exactly; a leading \fBno\fP at the beginning of one option does not negate the rest. -.sp -The \fB\-t\fP and \fB\-O\fP options are cumulative in effect; that is, the command -.sp -\fBmount \-a \-t ext2 \-O _netdev\fP -.sp -mounts all ext2 filesystems with the _netdev option, not all filesystems that are either ext2 or have the _netdev option specified. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-options\fP \fIopts\fP -.RS 4 -Use the specified mount options. The \fIopts\fP argument is a comma\-separated list. For example: -.sp -\fBmount LABEL=mydisk \-o noatime,nodev,nosuid\fP -.sp -For more details, see the \fBFILESYSTEM\-INDEPENDENT MOUNT OPTIONS\fP and \fBFILESYSTEM\-SPECIFIC MOUNT OPTIONS\fP sections. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-options\-mode\fP \fImode\fP -.RS 4 -Controls how to combine options from \fIfstab\fP/\fImtab\fP with options from the command line. \fImode\fP can be one of \fBignore\fP, \fBappend\fP, \fBprepend\fP or \fBreplace\fP. For example, \fBappend\fP means that options from \fIfstab\fP are appended to options from the command line. The default value is \fBprepend\fP \(em it means command line options are evaluated after \fIfstab\fP options. Note that the last option wins if there are conflicting ones. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-options\-source\fP \fIsource\fP -.RS 4 -Source of default options. \fIsource\fP is a comma\-separated list of \fBfstab\fP, \fBmtab\fP and \fBdisable\fP. \fBdisable\fP disables \fBfstab\fP and \fBmtab\fP and disables \fB\-\-options\-source\-force\fP. The default value is \fBfstab,mtab\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-options\-source\-force\fP -.RS 4 -Use options from \fIfstab\fP/\fImtab\fP even if both \fIdevice\fP and \fIdir\fP are specified. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-R\fP, \fB\-\-rbind\fP -.RS 4 -Remount a subtree and all possible submounts somewhere else (so that its contents are available in both places). See above, the subsection \fBBind mounts\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-read\-only\fP -.RS 4 -Mount the filesystem read\-only. A synonym is \fB\-o ro\fP. -.sp -Note that, depending on the filesystem type, state and kernel behavior, the system may still write to the device. For example, ext3 and ext4 will replay the journal if the filesystem is dirty. To prevent this kind of write access, you may want to mount an ext3 or ext4 filesystem with the \fBro,noload\fP mount options or set the block device itself to read\-only mode, see the \fBblockdev\fP(8) command. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP -.RS 4 -Tolerate sloppy mount options rather than failing. This will ignore mount options not supported by a filesystem type. Not all filesystems support this option. Currently it\(cqs supported by the \fBmount.nfs\fP mount helper only. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-source\fP \fIdevice\fP -.RS 4 -If only one argument for the \fBmount\fP command is given, then the argument might be interpreted as the target (mountpoint) or source (device). This option allows you to explicitly define that the argument is the mount source. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-target\fP \fIdirectory\fP -.RS 4 -If only one argument for the mount command is given, then the argument might be interpreted as the target (mountpoint) or source (device). This option allows you to explicitly define that the argument is the mount target. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-target\-prefix\fP \fIdirectory\fP -.RS 4 -Prepend the specified directory to all mount targets. This option can be used to follow \fIfstab\fP, but mount operations are done in another place, for example: -.sp -\fBmount \-\-all \-\-target\-prefix /chroot \-o X\-mount.mkdir\fP -.sp -mounts all from system \fIfstab\fP to \fI/chroot\fP, all missing mountpoint are created (due to X\-mount.mkdir). See also \fB\-\-fstab\fP to use an alternative \fIfstab\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-T\fP, \fB\-\-fstab\fP \fIpath\fP -.RS 4 -Specifies an alternative \fIfstab\fP file. If \fIpath\fP is a directory, then the files in the directory are sorted by \fBstrverscmp\fP(3); files that start with "." or without an \fI.fstab\fP extension are ignored. The option can be specified more than once. This option is mostly designed for initramfs or chroot scripts where additional configuration is specified beyond standard system configuration. -.sp -Note that \fBmount\fP does not pass the option \fB\-\-fstab\fP to the \fB/sbin/mount.\fP\fItype\fP helpers, meaning that the alternative \fIfstab\fP files will be invisible for the helpers. This is no problem for normal mounts, but user (non\-root) mounts always require \fIfstab\fP to verify the user\(cqs rights. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-types\fP \fIfstype\fP -.RS 4 -The argument following the \fB\-t\fP is used to indicate the filesystem type. The filesystem types which are currently supported depend on the running kernel. See \fI/proc/filesystems\fP and \fI/lib/modules/$(uname \-r)/kernel/fs\fP for a complete list of the filesystems. The most common are ext2, ext3, ext4, xfs, btrfs, vfat, sysfs, proc, nfs and cifs. -.sp -The programs \fBmount\fP and \fBumount\fP(8) support filesystem subtypes. The subtype is defined by a \(aq.subtype\(aq suffix. For example \(aqfuse.sshfs\(aq. It\(cqs recommended to use subtype notation rather than add any prefix to the mount source (for example \(aqsshfs#example.com\(aq is deprecated). -.sp -If no \fB\-t\fP option is given, or if the \fBauto\fP type is specified, \fBmount\fP will try to guess the desired type. \fBmount\fP uses the \fBlibblkid\fP(3) library for guessing the filesystem type; if that does not turn up anything that looks familiar, \fBmount\fP will try to read the file \fI/etc/filesystems\fP, or, if that does not exist, \fI/proc/filesystems\fP. All of the filesystem types listed there will be tried, except for those that are labeled "nodev" (e.g. \fIdevpts\fP, \fIproc\fP and \fInfs\fP). If \fI/etc/filesystems\fP ends in a line with a single *, mount will read \fI/proc/filesystems\fP afterwards. While trying, all filesystem types will be mounted with the mount option \fBsilent\fP. -.sp -The \fBauto\fP type may be useful for user\-mounted floppies. Creating a file \fI/etc/filesystems\fP can be useful to change the probe order (e.g., to try vfat before msdos or ext3 before ext2) or if you use a kernel module autoloader. -.sp -More than one type may be specified in a comma\-separated list, for the \fB\-t\fP option as well as in an \fI/etc/fstab\fP entry. The list of filesystem types for the \fB\-t\fP option can be prefixed with \fBno\fP to specify the filesystem types on which no action should be taken. The prefix \fBno\fP has no effect when specified in an \fI/etc/fstab\fP entry. -.sp -The prefix \fBno\fP can be meaningful with the \fB\-a\fP option. For example, the command -.sp -\fBmount \-a \-t nomsdos,smbfs\fP -.sp -mounts all filesystems except those of type \fImsdos\fP and \fIsmbfs\fP. -.sp -For most types all the \fBmount\fP program has to do is issue a simple \fBmount\fP(2) system call, and no detailed knowledge of the filesystem type is required. For a few types however (like nfs, nfs4, cifs, smbfs, ncpfs) an ad hoc code is necessary. The nfs, nfs4, cifs, smbfs, and ncpfs filesystems have a separate mount program. In order to make it possible to treat all types in a uniform way, \fBmount\fP will execute the program \fB/sbin/mount.\fP\fItype\fP (if that exists) when called with type \fItype\fP. Since different versions of the \fBsmbmount\fP program have different calling conventions, \fB/sbin/mount.smbfs\fP may have to be a shell script that sets up the desired call. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-U\fP, \fB\-\-uuid\fP \fIuuid\fP -.RS 4 -Mount the partition that has the specified \fIuuid\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Verbose mode. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-w\fP, \fB\-\-rw\fP, \fB\-\-read\-write\fP -.RS 4 -Mount the filesystem read/write. Read\-write is the kernel default and the \fBmount\fP default is to try read\-only if the previous mount syscall with read\-write flags on write\-protected devices of filesystems failed. -.sp -A synonym is \fB\-o rw\fP. -.sp -Note that specifying \fB\-w\fP on the command line forces \fBmount\fP to never try read\-only mount on write\-protected devices or already mounted read\-only filesystems. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "FILESYSTEM\-INDEPENDENT MOUNT OPTIONS" -.sp -Some of these options are only useful when they appear in the \fI/etc/fstab\fP file. -.sp -Some of these options could be enabled or disabled by default in the system kernel. To check the current setting see the options in \fI/proc/mounts\fP. Note that filesystems also have per\-filesystem specific default mount options (see for example \fBtune2fs \-l\fP output for ext_N_ filesystems). -.sp -The following options apply to any filesystem that is being mounted (but not every filesystem actually honors them \- e.g., the \fBsync\fP option today has an effect only for ext2, ext3, ext4, fat, vfat, ufs and xfs): -.sp -\fBasync\fP -.RS 4 -All I/O to the filesystem should be done asynchronously. (See also the \fBsync\fP option.) -.RE -.sp -\fBatime\fP -.RS 4 -Do not use the \fBnoatime\fP feature, so the inode access time is controlled by kernel defaults. See also the descriptions of the \fBrelatime\fP and \fBstrictatime\fP mount options. -.RE -.sp -\fBnoatime\fP -.RS 4 -Do not update inode access times on this filesystem (e.g. for faster access on the news spool to speed up news servers). This works for all inode types (directories too), so it implies \fBnodiratime\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBauto\fP -.RS 4 -Can be mounted with the \fB\-a\fP option. -.RE -.sp -\fBnoauto\fP -.RS 4 -Can only be mounted explicitly (i.e., the \fB\-a\fP option will not cause the filesystem to be mounted). -.RE -.sp -\fBcontext=\fP\fIcontext\fP, \fBfscontext=\fP\fIcontext\fP, \fBdefcontext=\fP\fIcontext\fP, and \fBrootcontext=\fP\fIcontext\fP -.RS 4 -The \fBcontext=\fP option is useful when mounting filesystems that do not support extended attributes, such as a floppy or hard disk formatted with VFAT, or systems that are not normally running under SELinux, such as an ext3 or ext4 formatted disk from a non\-SELinux workstation. You can also use \fBcontext=\fP on filesystems you do not trust, such as a floppy. It also helps in compatibility with xattr\-supporting filesystems on earlier 2.4.<x> kernel versions. Even where xattrs are supported, you can save time not having to label every file by assigning the entire disk one security context. -.sp -A commonly used option for removable media is \fBcontext="system_u:object_r:removable_t\fP. -.sp -The \fBfscontext=\fP option works for all filesystems, regardless of their xattr support. The fscontext option sets the overarching filesystem label to a specific security context. This filesystem label is separate from the individual labels on the files. It represents the entire filesystem for certain kinds of permission checks, such as during mount or file creation. Individual file labels are still obtained from the xattrs on the files themselves. The context option actually sets the aggregate context that fscontext provides, in addition to supplying the same label for individual files. -.sp -You can set the default security context for unlabeled files using \fBdefcontext=\fP option. This overrides the value set for unlabeled files in the policy and requires a filesystem that supports xattr labeling. -.sp -The \fBrootcontext=\fP option allows you to explicitly label the root inode of a FS being mounted before that FS or inode becomes visible to userspace. This was found to be useful for things like stateless Linux. -.sp -Note that the kernel rejects any remount request that includes the context option, \fBeven\fP when unchanged from the current context. -.sp -\fBWarning: the\fP \fIcontext\fP \fBvalue might contain commas\fP, in which case the value has to be properly quoted, otherwise \fBmount\fP will interpret the comma as a separator between mount options. Don\(cqt forget that the shell strips off quotes and thus \fBdouble quoting is required\fP. For example: -.RE -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -mount \-t tmpfs none /mnt \-o \(rs -\(aqcontext="system_u:object_r:tmp_t:s0:c127,c456",noexec\(aq -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -For more details, see \fBselinux\fP(8). -.sp -\fBdefaults\fP -.RS 4 -Use the default options: \fBrw\fP, \fBsuid\fP, \fBdev\fP, \fBexec\fP, \fBauto\fP, \fBnouser\fP, and \fBasync\fP. -.sp -Note that the real set of all default mount options depends on the kernel and filesystem type. See the beginning of this section for more details. -.RE -.sp -\fBdev\fP -.RS 4 -Interpret character or block special devices on the filesystem. -.RE -.sp -\fBnodev\fP -.RS 4 -Do not interpret character or block special devices on the filesystem. -.RE -.sp -\fBdiratime\fP -.RS 4 -Update directory inode access times on this filesystem. This is the default. (This option is ignored when \fBnoatime\fP is set.) -.RE -.sp -\fBnodiratime\fP -.RS 4 -Do not update directory inode access times on this filesystem. (This option is implied when \fBnoatime\fP is set.) -.RE -.sp -\fBdirsync\fP -.RS 4 -All directory updates within the filesystem should be done synchronously. This affects the following system calls: \fBcreat\fP(2), \fBlink\fP(2), \fBunlink\fP(2), \fBsymlink\fP(2), \fBmkdir\fP(2), \fBrmdir\fP(2), \fBmknod\fP(2) and \fBrename\fP(2). -.RE -.sp -\fBexec\fP -.RS 4 -Permit execution of binaries. -.RE -.sp -\fBnoexec\fP -.RS 4 -Do not permit direct execution of any binaries on the mounted filesystem. -.RE -.sp -\fBgroup\fP -.RS 4 -Allow an ordinary user to mount the filesystem if one of that user\(cqs groups matches the group of the device. This option implies the options \fBnosuid\fP and \fBnodev\fP (unless overridden by subsequent options, as in the option line \fBgroup,dev,suid\fP). -.RE -.sp -\fBiversion\fP -.RS 4 -Every time the inode is modified, the i_version field will be incremented. -.RE -.sp -\fBnoiversion\fP -.RS 4 -Do not increment the i_version inode field. -.RE -.sp -\fBmand\fP -.RS 4 -Allow mandatory locks on this filesystem. See \fBfcntl\fP(2). -.RE -.sp -\fBnomand\fP -.RS 4 -Do not allow mandatory locks on this filesystem. -.RE -.sp -\fB_netdev\fP -.RS 4 -The filesystem resides on a device that requires network access (used to prevent the system from attempting to mount these filesystems until the network has been enabled on the system). -.RE -.sp -\fBnofail\fP -.RS 4 -Do not report errors for this device if it does not exist. -.RE -.sp -\fBrelatime\fP -.RS 4 -Update inode access times relative to modify or change time. Access time is only updated if the previous access time was earlier than the current modify or change time. (Similar to \fBnoatime\fP, but it doesn\(cqt break \fBmutt\fP(1) or other applications that need to know if a file has been read since the last time it was modified.) -.sp -Since Linux 2.6.30, the kernel defaults to the behavior provided by this option (unless \fBnoatime\fP was specified), and the \fBstrictatime\fP option is required to obtain traditional semantics. In addition, since Linux 2.6.30, the file\(cqs last access time is always updated if it is more than 1 day old. -.RE -.sp -\fBnorelatime\fP -.RS 4 -Do not use the \fBrelatime\fP feature. See also the \fBstrictatime\fP mount option. -.RE -.sp -\fBstrictatime\fP -.RS 4 -Allows to explicitly request full atime updates. This makes it possible for the kernel to default to \fBrelatime\fP or \fBnoatime\fP but still allow userspace to override it. For more details about the default system mount options see \fI/proc/mounts\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBnostrictatime\fP -.RS 4 -Use the kernel\(cqs default behavior for inode access time updates. -.RE -.sp -\fBlazytime\fP -.RS 4 -Only update times (atime, mtime, ctime) on the in\-memory version of the file inode. -.sp -This mount option significantly reduces writes to the inode table for workloads that perform frequent random writes to preallocated files. -.sp -The on\-disk timestamps are updated only when: -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -the inode needs to be updated for some change unrelated to file timestamps -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -the application employs \fBfsync\fP(2), \fBsyncfs\fP(2), or \fBsync\fP(2) -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -an undeleted inode is evicted from memory -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -more than 24 hours have passed since the inode was written to disk. -.RE -.RE -.sp -\fBnolazytime\fP -.RS 4 -Do not use the lazytime feature. -.RE -.sp -\fBsuid\fP -.RS 4 -Honor set\-user\-ID and set\-group\-ID bits or file capabilities when executing programs from this filesystem. -.RE -.sp -\fBnosuid\fP -.RS 4 -Do not honor set\-user\-ID and set\-group\-ID bits or file capabilities when executing programs from this filesystem. In addition, SELinux domain transitions require permission nosuid_transition, which in turn needs also policy capability nnp_nosuid_transition. -.RE -.sp -\fBsilent\fP -.RS 4 -Turn on the silent flag. -.RE -.sp -\fBloud\fP -.RS 4 -Turn off the silent flag. -.RE -.sp -\fBowner\fP -.RS 4 -Allow an ordinary user to mount the filesystem if that user is the owner of the device. This option implies the options \fBnosuid\fP and \fBnodev\fP (unless overridden by subsequent options, as in the option line \fBowner,dev,suid\fP). -.RE -.sp -\fBremount\fP -.RS 4 -Attempt to remount an already\-mounted filesystem. This is commonly used to change the mount flags for a filesystem, especially to make a readonly filesystem writable. It does not change device or mount point. -.sp -The remount operation together with the \fBbind\fP flag has special semantics. See above, the subsection \fBBind mounts\fP. -.sp -The remount functionality follows the standard way the \fBmount\fP command works with options from \fIfstab\fP. This means that \fBmount\fP does not read \fIfstab\fP (or \fImtab\fP) only when both \fIdevice\fP and \fIdir\fP are specified. -.sp -\fBmount \-o remount,rw /dev/foo /dir\fP -.sp -After this call all old mount options are replaced and arbitrary stuff from \fIfstab\fP (or \fImtab\fP) is ignored, except the loop= option which is internally generated and maintained by the mount command. -.sp -\fBmount \-o remount,rw /dir\fP -.sp -After this call, mount reads \fIfstab\fP and merges these options with the options from the command line (\fB\-o\fP). If no mountpoint is found in \fIfstab\fP, then a remount with unspecified source is allowed. -.sp -\fBmount\fP allows the use of \fB\-\-all\fP to remount all already mounted filesystems which match a specified filter (\fB\-O\fP and \fB\-t\fP). For example: -.sp -\fBmount \-\-all \-o remount,ro \-t vfat\fP -.sp -remounts all already mounted vfat filesystems in read\-only mode. Each of the filesystems is remounted by \fBmount \-o remount,ro /dir\fP semantic. This means the \fBmount\fP command reads \fIfstab\fP or \fImtab\fP and merges these options with the options from the command line. -.RE -.sp -\fBro\fP -.RS 4 -Mount the filesystem read\-only. -.RE -.sp -\fBrw\fP -.RS 4 -Mount the filesystem read\-write. -.RE -.sp -\fBsync\fP -.RS 4 -All I/O to the filesystem should be done synchronously. In the case of media with a limited number of write cycles (e.g. some flash drives), \fBsync\fP may cause life\-cycle shortening. -.RE -.sp -\fBuser\fP -.RS 4 -Allow an ordinary user to mount the filesystem. The name of the mounting user is written to the \fImtab\fP file (or to the private libmount file in \fI/run/mount\fP on systems without a regular \fImtab\fP) so that this same user can unmount the filesystem again. This option implies the options \fBnoexec\fP, \fBnosuid\fP, and \fBnodev\fP (unless overridden by subsequent options, as in the option line \fBuser,exec,dev,suid\fP). -.RE -.sp -\fBnouser\fP -.RS 4 -Forbid an ordinary user to mount the filesystem. This is the default; it does not imply any other options. -.RE -.sp -\fBusers\fP -.RS 4 -Allow any user to mount and to unmount the filesystem, even when some other ordinary user mounted it. This option implies the options \fBnoexec\fP, \fBnosuid\fP, and \fBnodev\fP (unless overridden by subsequent options, as in the option line \fBusers,exec,dev,suid\fP). -.RE -.sp -\fBX\-\fP* -.RS 4 -All options prefixed with "X\-" are interpreted as comments or as userspace application\-specific options. These options are not stored in user space (e.g., \fImtab\fP file), nor sent to the mount.\fItype\fP helpers nor to the \fBmount\fP(2) system call. The suggested format is \fBX\-\fP\fIappname\fP.\fIoption\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBx\-\fP* -.RS 4 -The same as \fBX\-\fP* options, but stored permanently in user space. This means the options are also available for \fBumount\fP(8) or other operations. Note that maintaining mount options in user space is tricky, because it\(cqs necessary use libmount\-based tools and there is no guarantee that the options will be always available (for example after a move mount operation or in unshared namespace). -.sp -Note that before util\-linux v2.30 the x\-* options have not been maintained by libmount and stored in user space (functionality was the same as for X\-* now), but due to the growing number of use\-cases (in initrd, systemd etc.) the functionality has been extended to keep existing \fIfstab\fP configurations usable without a change. -.RE -.sp -\fBX\-mount.mkdir\fP[=\fImode\fP] -.RS 4 -Allow to make a target directory (mountpoint) if it does not exit yet. The optional argument \fImode\fP specifies the filesystem access mode used for \fBmkdir\fP(2) in octal notation. The default mode is 0755. This functionality is supported only for root users or when mount executed without suid permissions. The option is also supported as x\-mount.mkdir, this notation is deprecated since v2.30. -.RE -.sp -\fBnosymfollow\fP -.RS 4 -Do not follow symlinks when resolving paths. Symlinks can still be created, and \fBreadlink\fP(1), \fBreadlink\fP(2), \fBrealpath\fP(1), and \fBrealpath\fP(3) all still work properly. -.RE -.SH "FILESYSTEM\-SPECIFIC MOUNT OPTIONS" -.sp -This section lists options that are specific to particular filesystems. Where possible, you should first consult filesystem\-specific manual pages for details. Some of those pages are listed in the following table. -.TS -allbox tab(:); -lt lt. -T{ -.sp -\fBFilesystem(s)\fP -T}:T{ -.sp -\fBManual page\fP -T} -T{ -.sp -btrfs -T}:T{ -.sp -\fBbtrfs\fP(5) -T} -T{ -.sp -cifs -T}:T{ -.sp -\fBmount.cifs\fP(8) -T} -T{ -.sp -ext2, ext3, ext4 -T}:T{ -.sp -\fBext4\fP(5) -T} -T{ -.sp -fuse -T}:T{ -.sp -\fBfuse\fP(8) -T} -T{ -.sp -nfs -T}:T{ -.sp -\fBnfs\fP(5) -T} -T{ -.sp -tmpfs -T}:T{ -.sp -\fBtmpfs\fP(5) -T} -T{ -.sp -xfs -T}:T{ -.sp -\fBxfs\fP(5) -T} -.TE -.sp -.sp -Note that some of the pages listed above might be available only after you install the respective userland tools. -.sp -The following options apply only to certain filesystems. We sort them by filesystem. All options follow the \fB\-o\fP flag. -.sp -What options are supported depends a bit on the running kernel. Further information may be available in filesystem\-specific files in the kernel source subdirectory \fIDocumentation/filesystems\fP. -.SS "Mount options for adfs" -.sp -\fBuid=\fP\fIvalue\fP and \fBgid=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Set the owner and group of the files in the filesystem (default: uid=gid=0). -.RE -.sp -\fBownmask=\fP\fIvalue\fP and \fBothmask=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Set the permission mask for ADFS \(aqowner\(aq permissions and \(aqother\(aq permissions, respectively (default: 0700 and 0077, respectively). See also \fI/usr/src/linux/Documentation/filesystems/adfs.rst\fP. -.RE -.SS "Mount options for affs" -.sp -\fBuid=\fP\fIvalue\fP and \fBgid=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Set the owner and group of the root of the filesystem (default: uid=gid=0, but with option \fBuid\fP or \fBgid\fP without specified value, the UID and GID of the current process are taken). -.RE -.sp -\fBsetuid=\fP\fIvalue\fP and \fBsetgid=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Set the owner and group of all files. -.RE -.sp -\fBmode=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Set the mode of all files to \fIvalue\fP & 0777 disregarding the original permissions. Add search permission to directories that have read permission. The value is given in octal. -.RE -.sp -\fBprotect\fP -.RS 4 -Do not allow any changes to the protection bits on the filesystem. -.RE -.sp -\fBusemp\fP -.RS 4 -Set UID and GID of the root of the filesystem to the UID and GID of the mount point upon the first sync or umount, and then clear this option. Strange... -.RE -.sp -\fBverbose\fP -.RS 4 -Print an informational message for each successful mount. -.RE -.sp -\fBprefix=\fP\fIstring\fP -.RS 4 -Prefix used before volume name, when following a link. -.RE -.sp -\fBvolume=\fP\fIstring\fP -.RS 4 -Prefix (of length at most 30) used before \(aq/\(aq when following a symbolic link. -.RE -.sp -\fBreserved=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -(Default: 2.) Number of unused blocks at the start of the device. -.RE -.sp -\fBroot=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Give explicitly the location of the root block. -.RE -.sp -\fBbs=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Give blocksize. Allowed values are 512, 1024, 2048, 4096. -.RE -.sp -\fBgrpquota\fP|\fBnoquota\fP|\fBquota\fP|\fBusrquota\fP -.RS 4 -These options are accepted but ignored. (However, quota utilities may react to such strings in \fI/etc/fstab\fP.) -.RE -.SS "Mount options for debugfs" -.sp -The debugfs filesystem is a pseudo filesystem, traditionally mounted on \fI/sys/kernel/debug\fP. As of kernel version 3.4, debugfs has the following options: -.sp -\fBuid=\fP\fIn\fP\fB, gid=\fP\fIn\fP -.RS 4 -Set the owner and group of the mountpoint. -.RE -.sp -\fBmode=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Sets the mode of the mountpoint. -.RE -.SS "Mount options for devpts" -.sp -The devpts filesystem is a pseudo filesystem, traditionally mounted on \fI/dev/pts\fP. In order to acquire a pseudo terminal, a process opens \fI/dev/ptmx\fP; the number of the pseudo terminal is then made available to the process and the pseudo terminal slave can be accessed as \fI/dev/pts/\fP<number>. -.sp -\fBuid=\fP\fIvalue\fP and \fBgid=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -This sets the owner or the group of newly created pseudo terminals to the specified values. When nothing is specified, they will be set to the UID and GID of the creating process. For example, if there is a tty group with GID 5, then \fBgid=5\fP will cause newly created pseudo terminals to belong to the tty group. -.RE -.sp -\fBmode=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Set the mode of newly created pseudo terminals to the specified value. The default is 0600. A value of \fBmode=620\fP and \fBgid=5\fP makes "mesg y" the default on newly created pseudo terminals. -.RE -.sp -\fBnewinstance\fP -.RS 4 -Create a private instance of the devpts filesystem, such that indices of pseudo terminals allocated in this new instance are independent of indices created in other instances of devpts. -.sp -All mounts of devpts without this \fBnewinstance\fP option share the same set of pseudo terminal indices (i.e., legacy mode). Each mount of devpts with the \fBnewinstance\fP option has a private set of pseudo terminal indices. -.sp -This option is mainly used to support containers in the Linux kernel. It is implemented in Linux kernel versions starting with 2.6.29. Further, this mount option is valid only if \fBCONFIG_DEVPTS_MULTIPLE_INSTANCES\fP is enabled in the kernel configuration. -.sp -To use this option effectively, \fI/dev/ptmx\fP must be a symbolic link to \fIpts/ptmx\fP. See \fIDocumentation/filesystems/devpts.txt\fP in the Linux kernel source tree for details. -.RE -.sp -\fBptmxmode=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Set the mode for the new \fIptmx\fP device node in the devpts filesystem. -.sp -With the support for multiple instances of devpts (see \fBnewinstance\fP option above), each instance has a private \fIptmx\fP node in the root of the devpts filesystem (typically \fI/dev/pts/ptmx\fP). -.sp -For compatibility with older versions of the kernel, the default mode of the new \fIptmx\fP node is 0000. \fBptmxmode=\fP\fIvalue\fP specifies a more useful mode for the \fIptmx\fP node and is highly recommended when the \fBnewinstance\fP option is specified. -.sp -This option is only implemented in Linux kernel versions starting with 2.6.29. Further, this option is valid only if \fBCONFIG_DEVPTS_MULTIPLE_INSTANCES\fP is enabled in the kernel configuration. -.RE -.SS "Mount options for fat" -.sp -(Note: \fIfat\fP is not a separate filesystem, but a common part of the \fImsdos\fP, \fIumsdos\fP and \fIvfat\fP filesystems.) -.sp -\fBblocksize=\fP{\fB512\fP|\fB1024\fP|\fB2048\fP} -.RS 4 -Set blocksize (default 512). This option is obsolete. -.RE -.sp -\fBuid=\fP\fIvalue\fP and \fBgid=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Set the owner and group of all files. (Default: the UID and GID of the current process.) -.RE -.sp -\fBumask=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Set the umask (the bitmask of the permissions that are \fBnot\fP present). The default is the umask of the current process. The value is given in octal. -.RE -.sp -\fBdmask=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Set the umask applied to directories only. The default is the umask of the current process. The value is given in octal. -.RE -.sp -\fBfmask=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Set the umask applied to regular files only. The default is the umask of the current process. The value is given in octal. -.RE -.sp -\fBallow_utime=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -This option controls the permission check of mtime/atime. -.sp -\fB20\fP -.RS 4 -If current process is in group of file\(cqs group ID, you can change timestamp. -.RE -.sp -\fB2\fP -.RS 4 -Other users can change timestamp. -.RE -.RE -.sp -The default is set from \(aqdmask\(aq option. (If the directory is writable, \fButime\fP(2) is also allowed. I.e. ~dmask & 022) -.sp -Normally \fButime\fP(2) checks that the current process is owner of the file, or that it has the \fBCAP_FOWNER\fP capability. But FAT filesystems don\(cqt have UID/GID on disk, so the normal check is too inflexible. With this option you can relax it. -.sp -\fBcheck=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Three different levels of pickiness can be chosen: -.sp -\fBr\fP[\fBelaxed\fP] -.RS 4 -Upper and lower case are accepted and equivalent, long name parts are truncated (e.g. \fIverylongname.foobar\fP becomes \fIverylong.foo\fP), leading and embedded spaces are accepted in each name part (name and extension). -.RE -.sp -\fBn\fP[\fBormal\fP] -.RS 4 -Like "relaxed", but many special characters (*, ?, <, spaces, etc.) are rejected. This is the default. -.RE -.sp -\fBs\fP[\fBtrict\fP] -.RS 4 -Like "normal", but names that contain long parts or special characters that are sometimes used on Linux but are not accepted by MS\-DOS (+, =, etc.) are rejected. -.RE -.RE -.sp -\fBcodepage=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Sets the codepage for converting to shortname characters on FAT and VFAT filesystems. By default, codepage 437 is used. -.RE -.sp -\fBconv=\fP\fImode\fP -.RS 4 -This option is obsolete and may fail or be ignored. -.RE -.sp -\fBcvf_format=\fP\fImodule\fP -.RS 4 -Forces the driver to use the CVF (Compressed Volume File) module cvf__module_ instead of auto\-detection. If the kernel supports kmod, the cvf_format=xxx option also controls on\-demand CVF module loading. This option is obsolete. -.RE -.sp -\fBcvf_option=\fP\fIoption\fP -.RS 4 -Option passed to the CVF module. This option is obsolete. -.RE -.sp -\fBdebug\fP -.RS 4 -Turn on the \fIdebug\fP flag. A version string and a list of filesystem parameters will be printed (these data are also printed if the parameters appear to be inconsistent). -.RE -.sp -\fBdiscard\fP -.RS 4 -If set, causes discard/TRIM commands to be issued to the block device when blocks are freed. This is useful for SSD devices and sparse/thinly\-provisioned LUNs. -.RE -.sp -\fBdos1xfloppy\fP -.RS 4 -If set, use a fallback default BIOS Parameter Block configuration, determined by backing device size. These static parameters match defaults assumed by DOS 1.x for 160 kiB, 180 kiB, 320 kiB, and 360 kiB floppies and floppy images. -.RE -.sp -\fBerrors=\fP{\fBpanic\fP|\fBcontinue\fP|\fBremount\-ro\fP} -.RS 4 -Specify FAT behavior on critical errors: panic, continue without doing anything, or remount the partition in read\-only mode (default behavior). -.RE -.sp -\fBfat=\fP{\fB12\fP|\fB16\fP|\fB32\fP} -.RS 4 -Specify a 12, 16 or 32 bit fat. This overrides the automatic FAT type detection routine. Use with caution! -.RE -.sp -\fBiocharset=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Character set to use for converting between 8 bit characters and 16 bit Unicode characters. The default is iso8859\-1. Long filenames are stored on disk in Unicode format. -.RE -.sp -\fBnfs=\fP{\fBstale_rw\fP|\fBnostale_ro\fP} -.RS 4 -Enable this only if you want to export the FAT filesystem over NFS. -.sp -\fBstale_rw\fP: This option maintains an index (cache) of directory inodes which is used by the nfs\-related code to improve look\-ups. Full file operations (read/write) over NFS are supported but with cache eviction at NFS server, this could result in spurious \fBESTALE\fP errors. -.sp -\fBnostale_ro\fP: This option bases the inode number and file handle on the on\-disk location of a file in the FAT directory entry. This ensures that \fBESTALE\fP will not be returned after a file is evicted from the inode cache. However, it means that operations such as rename, create and unlink could cause file handles that previously pointed at one file to point at a different file, potentially causing data corruption. For this reason, this option also mounts the filesystem readonly. -.sp -To maintain backward compatibility, \fB\-o nfs\fP is also accepted, defaulting to \fBstale_rw\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBtz=UTC\fP -.RS 4 -This option disables the conversion of timestamps between local time (as used by Windows on FAT) and UTC (which Linux uses internally). This is particularly useful when mounting devices (like digital cameras) that are set to UTC in order to avoid the pitfalls of local time. -.RE -.sp -\fBtime_offset=\fP\fIminutes\fP -.RS 4 -Set offset for conversion of timestamps from local time used by FAT to UTC. I.e., \fIminutes\fP will be subtracted from each timestamp to convert it to UTC used internally by Linux. This is useful when the time zone set in the kernel via \fBsettimeofday\fP(2) is not the time zone used by the filesystem. Note that this option still does not provide correct time stamps in all cases in presence of DST \- time stamps in a different DST setting will be off by one hour. -.RE -.sp -\fBquiet\fP -.RS 4 -Turn on the \fIquiet\fP flag. Attempts to chown or chmod files do not return errors, although they fail. Use with caution! -.RE -.sp -\fBrodir\fP -.RS 4 -FAT has the \fBATTR_RO\fP (read\-only) attribute. On Windows, the \fBATTR_RO\fP of the directory will just be ignored, and is used only by applications as a flag (e.g. it\(cqs set for the customized folder). -.sp -If you want to use \fBATTR_RO\fP as read\-only flag even for the directory, set this option. -.RE -.sp -\fBshowexec\fP -.RS 4 -If set, the execute permission bits of the file will be allowed only if the extension part of the name is .EXE, .COM, or .BAT. Not set by default. -.RE -.sp -\fBsys_immutable\fP -.RS 4 -If set, \fBATTR_SYS\fP attribute on FAT is handled as \fBIMMUTABLE\fP flag on Linux. Not set by default. -.RE -.sp -\fBflush\fP -.RS 4 -If set, the filesystem will try to flush to disk more early than normal. Not set by default. -.RE -.sp -\fBusefree\fP -.RS 4 -Use the "free clusters" value stored on \fBFSINFO\fP. It\(cqll be used to determine number of free clusters without scanning disk. But it\(cqs not used by default, because recent Windows don\(cqt update it correctly in some case. If you are sure the "free clusters" on \fBFSINFO\fP is correct, by this option you can avoid scanning disk. -.RE -.sp -\fBdots\fP, \fBnodots\fP, \fBdotsOK=\fP[\fByes\fP|\fBno\fP] -.RS 4 -Various misguided attempts to force Unix or DOS conventions onto a FAT filesystem. -.RE -.SS "Mount options for hfs" -.sp -\fBcreator=\fP\fIcccc\fP\fB, type=\fP\fIcccc\fP -.RS 4 -Set the creator/type values as shown by the MacOS finder used for creating new files. Default values: \(aq????\(aq. -.RE -.sp -\fBuid=\fP\fIn\fP\fB, gid=\fP\fIn\fP -.RS 4 -Set the owner and group of all files. (Default: the UID and GID of the current process.) -.RE -.sp -\fBdir_umask=\fP\fIn\fP\fB, file_umask=\fP\fIn\fP\fB, umask=\fP\fIn\fP -.RS 4 -Set the umask used for all directories, all regular files, or all files and directories. Defaults to the umask of the current process. -.RE -.sp -\fBsession=\fP\fIn\fP -.RS 4 -Select the CDROM session to mount. Defaults to leaving that decision to the CDROM driver. This option will fail with anything but a CDROM as underlying device. -.RE -.sp -\fBpart=\fP\fIn\fP -.RS 4 -Select partition number n from the device. Only makes sense for CDROMs. Defaults to not parsing the partition table at all. -.RE -.sp -\fBquiet\fP -.RS 4 -Don\(cqt complain about invalid mount options. -.RE -.SS "Mount options for hpfs" -.sp -\fBuid=\fP\fIvalue\fP and \fBgid=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Set the owner and group of all files. (Default: the UID and GID of the current process.) -.RE -.sp -\fBumask=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Set the umask (the bitmask of the permissions that are \fBnot\fP present). The default is the umask of the current process. The value is given in octal. -.RE -.sp -\fBcase=\fP{\fBlower\fP|\fBasis\fP} -.RS 4 -Convert all files names to lower case, or leave them. (Default: \fBcase=lower\fP.) -.RE -.sp -\fBconv=\fP\fImode\fP -.RS 4 -This option is obsolete and may fail or being ignored. -.RE -.sp -\fBnocheck\fP -.RS 4 -Do not abort mounting when certain consistency checks fail. -.RE -.SS "Mount options for iso9660" -.sp -ISO 9660 is a standard describing a filesystem structure to be used on CD\-ROMs. (This filesystem type is also seen on some DVDs. See also the \fIudf\fP filesystem.) -.sp -Normal \fIiso9660\fP filenames appear in an 8.3 format (i.e., DOS\-like restrictions on filename length), and in addition all characters are in upper case. Also there is no field for file ownership, protection, number of links, provision for block/character devices, etc. -.sp -Rock Ridge is an extension to iso9660 that provides all of these UNIX\-like features. Basically there are extensions to each directory record that supply all of the additional information, and when Rock Ridge is in use, the filesystem is indistinguishable from a normal UNIX filesystem (except that it is read\-only, of course). -.sp -\fBnorock\fP -.RS 4 -Disable the use of Rock Ridge extensions, even if available. Cf. \fBmap\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBnojoliet\fP -.RS 4 -Disable the use of Microsoft Joliet extensions, even if available. Cf. \fBmap\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBcheck=\fP{\fBr\fP[\fBelaxed\fP]|\fBs\fP[\fBtrict\fP]} -.RS 4 -With \fBcheck=relaxed\fP, a filename is first converted to lower case before doing the lookup. This is probably only meaningful together with \fBnorock\fP and \fBmap=normal\fP. (Default: \fBcheck=strict\fP.) -.RE -.sp -\fBuid=\fP\fIvalue\fP and \fBgid=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Give all files in the filesystem the indicated user or group id, possibly overriding the information found in the Rock Ridge extensions. (Default: \fBuid=0,gid=0\fP.) -.RE -.sp -\fBmap=\fP{\fBn\fP[\fBormal\fP]|\fBo\fP[\fBff\fP]|\fBa\fP[\fBcorn\fP]} -.RS 4 -For non\-Rock Ridge volumes, normal name translation maps upper to lower case ASCII, drops a trailing \(aq;1\(aq, and converts \(aq;\(aq to \(aq.\(aq. With \fBmap=off\fP no name translation is done. See \fBnorock\fP. (Default: \fBmap=normal\fP.) \fBmap=acorn\fP is like \fBmap=normal\fP but also apply Acorn extensions if present. -.RE -.sp -\fBmode=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -For non\-Rock Ridge volumes, give all files the indicated mode. (Default: read and execute permission for everybody.) Octal mode values require a leading 0. -.RE -.sp -\fBunhide\fP -.RS 4 -Also show hidden and associated files. (If the ordinary files and the associated or hidden files have the same filenames, this may make the ordinary files inaccessible.) -.RE -.sp -\fBblock=\fP{\fB512\fP|\fB1024\fP|\fB2048\fP} -.RS 4 -Set the block size to the indicated value. (Default: \fBblock=1024\fP.) -.RE -.sp -\fBconv=\fP\fImode\fP -.RS 4 -This option is obsolete and may fail or being ignored. -.RE -.sp -\fBcruft\fP -.RS 4 -If the high byte of the file length contains other garbage, set this mount option to ignore the high order bits of the file length. This implies that a file cannot be larger than 16 MB. -.RE -.sp -\fBsession=\fP\fIx\fP -.RS 4 -Select number of session on a multisession CD. -.RE -.sp -\fBsbsector=\fP\fIxxx\fP -.RS 4 -Session begins from sector xxx. -.RE -.sp -The following options are the same as for vfat and specifying them only makes sense when using discs encoded using Microsoft\(cqs Joliet extensions. -.sp -\fBiocharset=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Character set to use for converting 16 bit Unicode characters on CD to 8 bit characters. The default is iso8859\-1. -.RE -.sp -\fButf8\fP -.RS 4 -Convert 16 bit Unicode characters on CD to UTF\-8. -.RE -.SS "Mount options for jfs" -.sp -\fBiocharset=\fP\fIname\fP -.RS 4 -Character set to use for converting from Unicode to ASCII. The default is to do no conversion. Use \fBiocharset=utf8\fP for UTF8 translations. This requires \fBCONFIG_NLS_UTF8\fP to be set in the kernel \fI.config\fP file. -.RE -.sp -\fBresize=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Resize the volume to \fIvalue\fP blocks. JFS only supports growing a volume, not shrinking it. This option is only valid during a remount, when the volume is mounted read\-write. The \fBresize\fP keyword with no value will grow the volume to the full size of the partition. -.RE -.sp -\fBnointegrity\fP -.RS 4 -Do not write to the journal. The primary use of this option is to allow for higher performance when restoring a volume from backup media. The integrity of the volume is not guaranteed if the system abnormally ends. -.RE -.sp -\fBintegrity\fP -.RS 4 -Default. Commit metadata changes to the journal. Use this option to remount a volume where the \fBnointegrity\fP option was previously specified in order to restore normal behavior. -.RE -.sp -\fBerrors=\fP{\fBcontinue\fP|\fBremount\-ro\fP|\fBpanic\fP} -.RS 4 -Define the behavior when an error is encountered. (Either ignore errors and just mark the filesystem erroneous and continue, or remount the filesystem read\-only, or panic and halt the system.) -.RE -.sp -\fBnoquota\fP|\fBquota\fP|\fBusrquota\fP|\fBgrpquota\fP -.RS 4 -These options are accepted but ignored. -.RE -.SS "Mount options for msdos" -.sp -See mount options for fat. If the \fImsdos\fP filesystem detects an inconsistency, it reports an error and sets the file system read\-only. The filesystem can be made writable again by remounting it. -.SS "Mount options for ncpfs" -.sp -Just like \fInfs\fP, the \fIncpfs\fP implementation expects a binary argument (a \fIstruct ncp_mount_data\fP) to the mount system call. This argument is constructed by \fBncpmount\fP(8) and the current version of \fBmount\fP (2.12) does not know anything about ncpfs. -.SS "Mount options for ntfs" -.sp -\fBiocharset=\fP\fIname\fP -.RS 4 -Character set to use when returning file names. Unlike VFAT, NTFS suppresses names that contain nonconvertible characters. Deprecated. -.RE -.sp -\fBnls=\fP\fIname\fP -.RS 4 -New name for the option earlier called \fIiocharset\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fButf8\fP -.RS 4 -Use UTF\-8 for converting file names. -.RE -.sp -\fBuni_xlate=\fP{\fB0\fP|\fB1\fP|\fB2\fP} -.RS 4 -For 0 (or \(aqno\(aq or \(aqfalse\(aq), do not use escape sequences for unknown Unicode characters. For 1 (or \(aqyes\(aq or \(aqtrue\(aq) or 2, use vfat\-style 4\-byte escape sequences starting with ":". Here 2 gives a little\-endian encoding and 1 a byteswapped bigendian encoding. -.RE -.sp -\fBposix=[0|1]\fP -.RS 4 -If enabled (posix=1), the filesystem distinguishes between upper and lower case. The 8.3 alias names are presented as hard links instead of being suppressed. This option is obsolete. -.RE -.sp -\fBuid=\fP\fIvalue\fP, \fBgid=\fP\fIvalue\fP and \fBumask=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Set the file permission on the filesystem. The umask value is given in octal. By default, the files are owned by root and not readable by somebody else. -.RE -.SS "Mount options for overlay" -.sp -Since Linux 3.18 the overlay pseudo filesystem implements a union mount for other filesystems. -.sp -An overlay filesystem combines two filesystems \- an \fBupper\fP filesystem and a \fBlower\fP filesystem. When a name exists in both filesystems, the object in the upper filesystem is visible while the object in the lower filesystem is either hidden or, in the case of directories, merged with the upper object. -.sp -The lower filesystem can be any filesystem supported by Linux and does not need to be writable. The lower filesystem can even be another overlayfs. The upper filesystem will normally be writable and if it is it must support the creation of trusted.* extended attributes, and must provide a valid d_type in readdir responses, so NFS is not suitable. -.sp -A read\-only overlay of two read\-only filesystems may use any filesystem type. The options \fBlowerdir\fP and \fBupperdir\fP are combined into a merged directory by using: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -mount \-t overlay overlay \(rs - \-olowerdir=/lower,upperdir=/upper,workdir=/work /merged -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -\fBlowerdir=\fP\fIdirectory\fP -.RS 4 -Any filesystem, does not need to be on a writable filesystem. -.RE -.sp -\fBupperdir=\fP\fIdirectory\fP -.RS 4 -The upperdir is normally on a writable filesystem. -.RE -.sp -\fBworkdir=\fP\fIdirectory\fP -.RS 4 -The workdir needs to be an empty directory on the same filesystem as upperdir. -.RE -.sp -\fBuserxattr\fP -.RS 4 -Use the "\fBuser.overlay.\fP" xattr namespace instead of "\fBtrusted.overlay.\fP". This is useful for unprivileged mounting of overlayfs. -.RE -.sp -\fBredirect_dir=\fP{\fBon\fP|\fBoff\fP|\fBfollow\fP|\fBnofollow\fP} -.RS 4 -If the \fIredirect_dir\fP feature is enabled, then the directory will be copied up (but not the contents). Then the "{\fBtrusted\fP|\fBuser\fP}.overlay.redirect" extended attribute is set to the path of the original location from the root of the overlay. Finally the directory is moved to the new location. -.sp -\fBon\fP -.RS 4 -Redirects are enabled. -.RE -.sp -\fBoff\fP -.RS 4 -Redirects are not created and only followed if "redirect_always_follow" feature is enabled in the kernel/module config. -.RE -.sp -\fBfollow\fP -.RS 4 -Redirects are not created, but followed. -.RE -.sp -\fBnofollow\fP -.RS 4 -Redirects are not created and not followed (equivalent to "redirect_dir=off" if "redirect_always_follow" feature is not enabled). -.RE -.RE -.sp -\fBindex=\fP{\fBon\fP|\fBoff\fP} -.RS 4 -Inode index. If this feature is disabled and a file with multiple hard links is copied up, then this will "break" the link. Changes will not be propagated to other names referring to the same inode. -.RE -.sp -\fBuuid=\fP{\fBon\fP|\fBoff\fP} -.RS 4 -Can be used to replace UUID of the underlying filesystem in file handles with null, and effectively disable UUID checks. This can be useful in case the underlying disk is copied and the UUID of this copy is changed. This is only applicable if all lower/upper/work directories are on the same filesystem, otherwise it will fallback to normal behaviour. -.RE -.sp -\fBnfs_export=\fP{\fBon\fP|\fBoff\fP} -.RS 4 -When the underlying filesystems supports NFS export and the "nfs_export" -feature is enabled, an overlay filesystem may be exported to NFS. -.sp -With the “nfs_export” feature, on copy_up of any lower object, an index entry -is created under the index directory. The index entry name is the hexadecimal -representation of the copy up origin file handle. For a non\-directory object, -the index entry is a hard link to the upper inode. For a directory object, the -index entry has an extended attribute "{\fBtrusted\fP|\fBuser\fP}.overlay.upper" -with an encoded file handle of the upper directory inode. -.sp -When encoding a file handle from an overlay filesystem object, the following rules apply -.RS 4 -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -For a non\-upper object, encode a lower file handle from lower inode -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -For an indexed object, encode a lower file handle from copy_up origin -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -For a pure\-upper object and for an existing non\-indexed upper object, encode an upper file handle from upper inode -.RE -.RE -.sp -The encoded overlay file handle includes -.RS 4 -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Header including path type information (e.g. lower/upper) -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -UUID of the underlying filesystem -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Underlying filesystem encoding of underlying inode -.RE -.RE -.sp -This encoding format is identical to the encoding format file handles that are stored in extended attribute "{\fBtrusted\fP|\fBuser\fP}.overlay.origin". When decoding an overlay file handle, the following steps are followed -.RS 4 -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Find underlying layer by UUID and path type information. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Decode the underlying filesystem file handle to underlying dentry. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -For a lower file handle, lookup the handle in index directory by name. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -If a whiteout is found in index, return ESTALE. This represents an overlay object that was deleted after its file handle was encoded. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -For a non\-directory, instantiate a disconnected overlay dentry from the decoded underlying dentry, the path type and index inode, if found. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -For a directory, use the connected underlying decoded dentry, path type and index, to lookup a connected overlay dentry. -.RE -.RE -.sp -Decoding a non\-directory file handle may return a disconnected dentry. copy_up -of that disconnected dentry will create an upper index entry with no upper -alias. -.sp -When overlay filesystem has multiple lower layers, a middle layer directory may -have a "redirect" to lower directory. Because middle layer "redirects" are not -indexed, a lower file handle that was encoded from the "redirect" origin -directory, cannot be used to find the middle or upper layer directory. -Similarly, a lower file handle that was encoded from a descendant of the -"redirect" origin directory, cannot be used to reconstruct a connected overlay -path. To mitigate the cases of directories that cannot be decoded from a lower -file handle, these directories are copied up on encode and encoded as an upper -file handle. On an overlay filesystem with no upper layer this mitigation -cannot be used NFS export in this setup requires turning off redirect follow -(e.g. "\fIredirect_dir=nofollow\fP"). -.sp -The overlay filesystem does not support non\-directory connectable file handles, so exporting with the \fIsubtree_check\fP exportfs configuration will cause failures to lookup files over NFS. -.sp -When the NFS export feature is enabled, all directory index entries are verified on mount time to check that upper file handles are not stale. This verification may cause significant overhead in some cases. -.sp -Note: the mount options \fIindex=off,nfs_export=on\fP are conflicting for a -read\-write mount and will result in an error. -.RE -.sp -\fBxinfo=\fP{\fBon\fP|\fBoff\fP|\fBauto\fP} -.RS 4 -The "xino" feature composes a unique object identifier from the real object st_ino and an underlying fsid index. The "xino" feature uses the high inode number bits for fsid, because the underlying filesystems rarely use the high inode number bits. In case the underlying inode number does overflow into the high xino bits, overlay filesystem will fall back to the non xino behavior for that inode. -.sp -For a detailed description of the effect of this option please refer to \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/doc/html/latest/filesystems/overlayfs.html?highlight=overlayfs" "" "" -.RE -.sp -\fBmetacopy=\fP{\fBon\fP|\fBoff\fP} -.RS 4 -When metadata only copy up feature is enabled, overlayfs will only copy up metadata (as opposed to whole file), when a metadata specific operation like chown/chmod is performed. Full file will be copied up later when file is opened for WRITE operation. -.sp -In other words, this is delayed data copy up operation and data is copied up when there is a need to actually modify data. -.RE -.sp -\fBvolatile\fP -.RS 4 -Volatile mounts are not guaranteed to survive a crash. It is strongly recommended that volatile mounts are only used if data written to the overlay can be recreated without significant effort. -.sp -The advantage of mounting with the "volatile" option is that all forms of sync calls to the upper filesystem are omitted. -.sp -In order to avoid a giving a false sense of safety, the syncfs (and fsync) semantics of volatile mounts are slightly different than that of the rest of VFS. If any writeback error occurs on the upperdir’s filesystem after a volatile mount takes place, all sync functions will return an error. Once this condition is reached, the filesystem will not recover, and every subsequent sync call will return an error, even if the upperdir has not experience a new error since the last sync call. -.sp -When overlay is mounted with "volatile" option, the directory "$workdir/work/incompat/volatile" is created. During next mount, overlay checks for this directory and refuses to mount if present. This is a strong indicator that user should throw away upper and work directories and create fresh one. In very limited cases where the user knows that the system has not crashed and contents of upperdir are intact, The "volatile" directory can be removed. -.RE -.SS "Mount options for reiserfs" -.sp -Reiserfs is a journaling filesystem. -.sp -\fBconv\fP -.RS 4 -Instructs version 3.6 reiserfs software to mount a version 3.5 filesystem, using the 3.6 format for newly created objects. This filesystem will no longer be compatible with reiserfs 3.5 tools. -.RE -.sp -\fBhash=\fP{\fBrupasov\fP|\fBtea\fP|\fBr5\fP|\fBdetect\fP} -.RS 4 -Choose which hash function reiserfs will use to find files within directories. -.sp -\fBrupasov\fP -.RS 4 -A hash invented by Yury Yu. Rupasov. It is fast and preserves locality, mapping lexicographically close file names to close hash values. This option should not be used, as it causes a high probability of hash collisions. -.RE -.sp -\fBtea\fP -.RS 4 -A Davis\-Meyer function implemented by Jeremy Fitzhardinge. It uses hash permuting bits in the name. It gets high randomness and, therefore, low probability of hash collisions at some CPU cost. This may be used if \fBEHASHCOLLISION\fP errors are experienced with the r5 hash. -.RE -.sp -\fBr5\fP -.RS 4 -A modified version of the rupasov hash. It is used by default and is the best choice unless the filesystem has huge directories and unusual file\-name patterns. -.RE -.sp -\fBdetect\fP -.RS 4 -Instructs \fBmount\fP to detect which hash function is in use by examining the filesystem being mounted, and to write this information into the reiserfs superblock. This is only useful on the first mount of an old format filesystem. -.RE -.RE -.sp -\fBhashed_relocation\fP -.RS 4 -Tunes the block allocator. This may provide performance improvements in some situations. -.RE -.sp -\fBno_unhashed_relocation\fP -.RS 4 -Tunes the block allocator. This may provide performance improvements in some situations. -.RE -.sp -\fBnoborder\fP -.RS 4 -Disable the border allocator algorithm invented by Yury Yu. Rupasov. This may provide performance improvements in some situations. -.RE -.sp -\fBnolog\fP -.RS 4 -Disable journaling. This will provide slight performance improvements in some situations at the cost of losing reiserfs\(cqs fast recovery from crashes. Even with this option turned on, reiserfs still performs all journaling operations, save for actual writes into its journaling area. Implementation of \fInolog\fP is a work in progress. -.RE -.sp -\fBnotail\fP -.RS 4 -By default, reiserfs stores small files and \(aqfile tails\(aq directly into its tree. This confuses some utilities such as \fBlilo\fP(8). This option is used to disable packing of files into the tree. -.RE -.sp -\fBreplayonly\fP -.RS 4 -Replay the transactions which are in the journal, but do not actually mount the filesystem. Mainly used by \fIreiserfsck\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBresize=\fP\fInumber\fP -.RS 4 -A remount option which permits online expansion of reiserfs partitions. Instructs reiserfs to assume that the device has \fInumber\fP blocks. This option is designed for use with devices which are under logical volume management (LVM). There is a special \fIresizer\fP utility which can be obtained from \fI\c -.URL "ftp://ftp.namesys.com/pub/reiserfsprogs" "" "\fP." -.RE -.sp -\fBuser_xattr\fP -.RS 4 -Enable Extended User Attributes. See the \fBattr\fP(1) manual page. -.RE -.sp -\fBacl\fP -.RS 4 -Enable POSIX Access Control Lists. See the \fBacl\fP(5) manual page. -.RE -.sp -\fBbarrier=none\fP / \fBbarrier=flush\fP -.RS 4 -This disables / enables the use of write barriers in the journaling code. \fBbarrier=none\fP disables, \fBbarrier=flush\fP enables (default). This also requires an IO stack which can support barriers, and if reiserfs gets an error on a barrier write, it will disable barriers again with a warning. Write barriers enforce proper on\-disk ordering of journal commits, making volatile disk write caches safe to use, at some performance penalty. If your disks are battery\-backed in one way or another, disabling barriers may safely improve performance. -.RE -.SS "Mount options for ubifs" -.sp -UBIFS is a flash filesystem which works on top of UBI volumes. Note that \fBatime\fP is not supported and is always turned off. -.sp -The device name may be specified as -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBubiX_Y\fP -.RS 4 -UBI device number \fBX\fP, volume number \fBY\fP -.RE -.sp -\fBubiY\fP -.RS 4 -UBI device number \fB0\fP, volume number \fBY\fP -.RE -.sp -\fBubiX:NAME\fP -.RS 4 -UBI device number \fBX\fP, volume with name \fBNAME\fP -.RE -.sp -\fBubi:NAME\fP -.RS 4 -UBI device number \fB0\fP, volume with name \fBNAME\fP -.RE -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -Alternative \fB!\fP separator may be used instead of \fB:\fP. -.sp -The following mount options are available: -.sp -\fBbulk_read\fP -.RS 4 -Enable bulk\-read. VFS read\-ahead is disabled because it slows down the filesystem. Bulk\-Read is an internal optimization. Some flashes may read faster if the data are read at one go, rather than at several read requests. For example, OneNAND can do "read\-while\-load" if it reads more than one NAND page. -.RE -.sp -\fBno_bulk_read\fP -.RS 4 -Do not bulk\-read. This is the default. -.RE -.sp -\fBchk_data_crc\fP -.RS 4 -Check data CRC\-32 checksums. This is the default. -.RE -.sp -\fBno_chk_data_crc\fP -.RS 4 -Do not check data CRC\-32 checksums. With this option, the filesystem does not check CRC\-32 checksum for data, but it does check it for the internal indexing information. This option only affects reading, not writing. CRC\-32 is always calculated when writing the data. -.RE -.sp -\fBcompr=\fP{\fBnone\fP|\fBlzo\fP|\fBzlib\fP} -.RS 4 -Select the default compressor which is used when new files are written. It is still possible to read compressed files if mounted with the \fBnone\fP option. -.RE -.SS "Mount options for udf" -.sp -UDF is the "Universal Disk Format" filesystem defined by OSTA, the Optical Storage Technology Association, and is often used for DVD\-ROM, frequently in the form of a hybrid UDF/ISO\-9660 filesystem. It is, however, perfectly usable by itself on disk drives, flash drives and other block devices. See also \fIiso9660\fP. -.sp -\fBuid=\fP -.RS 4 -Make all files in the filesystem belong to the given user. uid=forget can be specified independently of (or usually in addition to) uid=<user> and results in UDF not storing uids to the media. In fact the recorded uid is the 32\-bit overflow uid \-1 as defined by the UDF standard. The value is given as either <user> which is a valid user name or the corresponding decimal user id, or the special string "forget". -.RE -.sp -\fBgid=\fP -.RS 4 -Make all files in the filesystem belong to the given group. gid=forget can be specified independently of (or usually in addition to) gid=<group> and results in UDF not storing gids to the media. In fact the recorded gid is the 32\-bit overflow gid \-1 as defined by the UDF standard. The value is given as either <group> which is a valid group name or the corresponding decimal group id, or the special string "forget". -.RE -.sp -\fBumask=\fP -.RS 4 -Mask out the given permissions from all inodes read from the filesystem. The value is given in octal. -.RE -.sp -\fBmode=\fP -.RS 4 -If \fBmode=\fP is set the permissions of all non\-directory inodes read from the filesystem will be set to the given mode. The value is given in octal. -.RE -.sp -\fBdmode=\fP -.RS 4 -If \fBdmode=\fP is set the permissions of all directory inodes read from the filesystem will be set to the given dmode. The value is given in octal. -.RE -.sp -\fBbs=\fP -.RS 4 -Set the block size. Default value prior to kernel version 2.6.30 was 2048. Since 2.6.30 and prior to 4.11 it was logical device block size with fallback to 2048. Since 4.11 it is logical block size with fallback to any valid block size between logical device block size and 4096. -.sp -For other details see the \fBmkudffs\fP(8) 2.0+ manpage, sections \fBCOMPATIBILITY\fP and \fBBLOCK SIZE\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBunhide\fP -.RS 4 -Show otherwise hidden files. -.RE -.sp -\fBundelete\fP -.RS 4 -Show deleted files in lists. -.RE -.sp -\fBadinicb\fP -.RS 4 -Embed data in the inode. (default) -.RE -.sp -\fBnoadinicb\fP -.RS 4 -Don\(cqt embed data in the inode. -.RE -.sp -\fBshortad\fP -.RS 4 -Use short UDF address descriptors. -.RE -.sp -\fBlongad\fP -.RS 4 -Use long UDF address descriptors. (default) -.RE -.sp -\fBnostrict\fP -.RS 4 -Unset strict conformance. -.RE -.sp -\fBiocharset=\fP -.RS 4 -Set the NLS character set. This requires kernel compiled with \fBCONFIG_UDF_NLS\fP option. -.RE -.sp -\fButf8\fP -.RS 4 -Set the UTF\-8 character set. -.RE -.SS "Mount options for debugging and disaster recovery" -.sp -\fBnovrs\fP -.RS 4 -Ignore the Volume Recognition Sequence and attempt to mount anyway. -.RE -.sp -\fBsession=\fP -.RS 4 -Select the session number for multi\-session recorded optical media. (default= last session) -.RE -.sp -\fBanchor=\fP -.RS 4 -Override standard anchor location. (default= 256) -.RE -.sp -\fBlastblock=\fP -.RS 4 -Set the last block of the filesystem. -.RE -.SS "Unused historical mount options that may be encountered and should be removed" -.sp -\fBuid=ignore\fP -.RS 4 -Ignored, use uid=<user> instead. -.RE -.sp -\fBgid=ignore\fP -.RS 4 -Ignored, use gid=<group> instead. -.RE -.sp -\fBvolume=\fP -.RS 4 -Unimplemented and ignored. -.RE -.sp -\fBpartition=\fP -.RS 4 -Unimplemented and ignored. -.RE -.sp -\fBfileset=\fP -.RS 4 -Unimplemented and ignored. -.RE -.sp -\fBrootdir=\fP -.RS 4 -Unimplemented and ignored. -.RE -.SS "Mount options for ufs" -.sp -\fBufstype=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -UFS is a filesystem widely used in different operating systems. The problem are differences among implementations. Features of some implementations are undocumented, so its hard to recognize the type of ufs automatically. That\(cqs why the user must specify the type of ufs by mount option. Possible values are: -.sp -\fBold\fP -.RS 4 -Old format of ufs, this is the default, read only. (Don\(cqt forget to give the \fB\-r\fP option.) -.RE -.sp -\fB44bsd\fP -.RS 4 -For filesystems created by a BSD\-like system (NetBSD, FreeBSD, OpenBSD). -.RE -.sp -\fBufs2\fP -.RS 4 -Used in FreeBSD 5.x supported as read\-write. -.RE -.sp -\fB5xbsd\fP -.RS 4 -Synonym for ufs2. -.RE -.sp -\fBsun\fP -.RS 4 -For filesystems created by SunOS or Solaris on Sparc. -.RE -.sp -\fBsunx86\fP -.RS 4 -For filesystems created by Solaris on x86. -.RE -.sp -\fBhp\fP -.RS 4 -For filesystems created by HP\-UX, read\-only. -.RE -.sp -\fBnextstep\fP -.RS 4 -For filesystems created by NeXTStep (on NeXT station) (currently read only). -.RE -.sp -\fBnextstep\-cd\fP -.RS 4 -For NextStep CDROMs (block_size == 2048), read\-only. -.RE -.sp -\fBopenstep\fP -.RS 4 -For filesystems created by OpenStep (currently read only). The same filesystem type is also used by Mac OS X. -.RE -.RE -.sp -\fBonerror=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Set behavior on error: -.sp -\fBpanic\fP -.RS 4 -If an error is encountered, cause a kernel panic. -.RE -.sp -[\fBlock\fP|\fBumount\fP|\fBrepair\fP] -.RS 4 -These mount options don\(cqt do anything at present; when an error is encountered only a console message is printed. -.RE -.RE -.SS "Mount options for umsdos" -.sp -See mount options for msdos. The \fBdotsOK\fP option is explicitly killed by \fIumsdos\fP. -.SS "Mount options for vfat" -.sp -First of all, the mount options for \fIfat\fP are recognized. The \fBdotsOK\fP option is explicitly killed by \fIvfat\fP. Furthermore, there are -.sp -\fBuni_xlate\fP -.RS 4 -Translate unhandled Unicode characters to special escaped sequences. This lets you backup and restore filenames that are created with any Unicode characters. Without this option, a \(aq?\(aq is used when no translation is possible. The escape character is \(aq:\(aq because it is otherwise invalid on the vfat filesystem. The escape sequence that gets used, where u is the Unicode character, is: \(aq:\(aq, (u & 0x3f), ((u>>6) & 0x3f), (u>>12). -.RE -.sp -\fBposix\fP -.RS 4 -Allow two files with names that only differ in case. This option is obsolete. -.RE -.sp -\fBnonumtail\fP -.RS 4 -First try to make a short name without sequence number, before trying \fIname~num.ext\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fButf8\fP -.RS 4 -UTF8 is the filesystem safe 8\-bit encoding of Unicode that is used by the console. It can be enabled for the filesystem with this option or disabled with utf8=0, utf8=no or utf8=false. If \fIuni_xlate\fP gets set, UTF8 gets disabled. -.RE -.sp -\fBshortname=\fP\fImode\fP -.RS 4 -Defines the behavior for creation and display of filenames which fit into 8.3 characters. If a long name for a file exists, it will always be the preferred one for display. There are four \fImode\fPs: -.sp -\fBlower\fP -.RS 4 -Force the short name to lower case upon display; store a long name when the short name is not all upper case. -.RE -.sp -\fBwin95\fP -.RS 4 -Force the short name to upper case upon display; store a long name when the short name is not all upper case. -.RE -.sp -\fBwinnt\fP -.RS 4 -Display the short name as is; store a long name when the short name is not all lower case or all upper case. -.RE -.sp -\fBmixed\fP -.RS 4 -Display the short name as is; store a long name when the short name is not all upper case. This mode is the default since Linux 2.6.32. -.RE -.RE -.SS "Mount options for usbfs" -.sp -\fBdevuid=\fP\fIuid\fP and \fBdevgid=\fP\fIgid\fP and \fBdevmode=\fP\fImode\fP -.RS 4 -Set the owner and group and mode of the device files in the usbfs filesystem (default: uid=gid=0, mode=0644). The mode is given in octal. -.RE -.sp -\fBbusuid=\fP\fIuid\fP and \fBbusgid=\fP\fIgid\fP and \fBbusmode=\fP\fImode\fP -.RS 4 -Set the owner and group and mode of the bus directories in the usbfs filesystem (default: uid=gid=0, mode=0555). The mode is given in octal. -.RE -.sp -\fBlistuid=\fP\fIuid\fP and \fBlistgid=\fP\fIgid\fP and \fBlistmode=\fP\fImode\fP -.RS 4 -Set the owner and group and mode of the file \fIdevices\fP (default: uid=gid=0, mode=0444). The mode is given in octal. -.RE -.SH "DM\-VERITY SUPPORT (EXPERIMENTAL)" -.sp -The device\-mapper verity target provides read\-only transparent integrity checking of block devices using kernel crypto API. The \fBmount\fP command can open the dm\-verity device and do the integrity verification before on the device filesystem is mounted. Requires libcryptsetup with in libmount (optionally via \fBdlopen\fP(3)). If libcryptsetup supports extracting the root hash of an already mounted device, existing devices will be automatically reused in case of a match. Mount options for dm\-verity: -.sp -\fBverity.hashdevice=\fP\fIpath\fP -.RS 4 -Path to the hash tree device associated with the source volume to pass to dm\-verity. -.RE -.sp -\fBverity.roothash=\fP\fIhex\fP -.RS 4 -Hex\-encoded hash of the root of \fIverity.hashdevice\fP. Mutually exclusive with \fIverity.roothashfile.\fP -.RE -.sp -\fBverity.roothashfile=\fP\fIpath\fP -.RS 4 -Path to file containing the hex\-encoded hash of the root of \fIverity.hashdevice.\fP Mutually exclusive with \fIverity.roothash.\fP -.RE -.sp -\fBverity.hashoffset=\fP\fIoffset\fP -.RS 4 -If the hash tree device is embedded in the source volume, \fIoffset\fP (default: 0) is used by dm\-verity to get to the tree. -.RE -.sp -\fBverity.fecdevice=\fP\fIpath\fP -.RS 4 -Path to the Forward Error Correction (FEC) device associated with the source volume to pass to dm\-verity. Optional. Requires kernel built with \fBCONFIG_DM_VERITY_FEC\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBverity.fecoffset=\fP\fIoffset\fP -.RS 4 -If the FEC device is embedded in the source volume, \fIoffset\fP (default: 0) is used by dm\-verity to get to the FEC area. Optional. -.RE -.sp -\fBverity.fecroots=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Parity bytes for FEC (default: 2). Optional. -.RE -.sp -\fBverity.roothashsig=\fP\fIpath\fP -.RS 4 -Path to \fBpkcs7\fP(1ssl) signature of root hash hex string. Requires crypt_activate_by_signed_key() from cryptsetup and kernel built with \fBCONFIG_DM_VERITY_VERIFY_ROOTHASH_SIG\fP. For device reuse, signatures have to be either used by all mounts of a device or by none. Optional. -.RE -.sp -Supported since util\-linux v2.35. -.sp -For example commands: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -mksquashfs /etc /tmp/etc.squashfs -dd if=/dev/zero of=/tmp/etc.hash bs=1M count=10 -veritysetup format /tmp/etc.squashfs /tmp/etc.hash -openssl smime \-sign \-in <hash> \-nocerts \-inkey private.key \(rs -\-signer private.crt \-noattr \-binary \-outform der \-out /tmp/etc.roothash.p7s -mount \-o verity.hashdevice=/tmp/etc.hash,verity.roothash=<hash>,\(rs -verity.roothashsig=/tmp/etc.roothash.p7s /tmp/etc.squashfs /mnt -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -create squashfs image from \fI/etc\fP directory, verity hash device and mount verified filesystem image to \fI/mnt\fP. The kernel will verify that the root hash is signed by a key from the kernel keyring if roothashsig is used. -.SH "LOOP\-DEVICE SUPPORT" -.sp -One further possible type is a mount via the loop device. For example, the command -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBmount /tmp/disk.img /mnt \-t vfat \-o loop=/dev/loop3\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -will set up the loop device \fI/dev/loop3\fP to correspond to the file \fI/tmp/disk.img\fP, and then mount this device on \fI/mnt\fP. -.sp -If no explicit loop device is mentioned (but just an option \(aq\fB\-o loop\fP\(aq is given), then \fBmount\fP will try to find some unused loop device and use that, for example -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBmount /tmp/disk.img /mnt \-o loop\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -The \fBmount\fP command \fBautomatically\fP creates a loop device from a regular file if a filesystem type is not specified or the filesystem is known for libblkid, for example: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBmount /tmp/disk.img /mnt\fP -.sp -\fBmount \-t ext4 /tmp/disk.img /mnt\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -This type of mount knows about three options, namely \fBloop\fP, \fBoffset\fP and \fBsizelimit\fP, that are really options to \fBlosetup\fP(8). (These options can be used in addition to those specific to the filesystem type.) -.sp -Since Linux 2.6.25 auto\-destruction of loop devices is supported, meaning that any loop device allocated by \fBmount\fP will be freed by \fBumount\fP independently of \fI/etc/mtab\fP. -.sp -You can also free a loop device by hand, using \fBlosetup \-d\fP or \fBumount \-d\fP. -.sp -Since util\-linux v2.29, \fBmount\fP re\-uses the loop device rather than initializing a new device if the same backing file is already used for some loop device with the same offset and sizelimit. This is necessary to avoid a filesystem corruption. -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -\fBmount\fP has the following exit status values (the bits can be ORed): -.sp -\fB0\fP -.RS 4 -success -.RE -.sp -\fB1\fP -.RS 4 -incorrect invocation or permissions -.RE -.sp -\fB2\fP -.RS 4 -system error (out of memory, cannot fork, no more loop devices) -.RE -.sp -\fB4\fP -.RS 4 -internal \fBmount\fP bug -.RE -.sp -\fB8\fP -.RS 4 -user interrupt -.RE -.sp -\fB16\fP -.RS 4 -problems writing or locking \fI/etc/mtab\fP -.RE -.sp -\fB32\fP -.RS 4 -mount failure -.RE -.sp -\fB64\fP -.RS 4 -some mount succeeded -.sp -The command \fBmount \-a\fP returns 0 (all succeeded), 32 (all failed), or 64 (some failed, some succeeded). -.RE -.SH "EXTERNAL HELPERS" -.sp -The syntax of external mount helpers is: -.sp -\fB/sbin/mount.\fP\fIsuffix\fP \fIspec dir\fP [\fB\-sfnv\fP] [\fB\-N\fP \fInamespace\fP] [\fB\-o\fP \fIoptions\fP] [\fB\-t\fP \fItype\fP\fB.\fP\fIsubtype\fP] -.sp -where the \fIsuffix\fP is the filesystem type and the \fB\-sfnvoN\fP options have the same meaning as the normal mount options. The \fB\-t\fP option is used for filesystems with subtypes support (for example \fB/sbin/mount.fuse \-t fuse.sshfs\fP). -.sp -The command \fBmount\fP does not pass the mount options \fBunbindable\fP, \fBrunbindable\fP, \fBprivate\fP, \fBrprivate\fP, \fBslave\fP, \fBrslave\fP, \fBshared\fP, \fBrshared\fP, \fBauto\fP, \fBnoauto\fP, \fBcomment\fP, \fBx\-\fP*, \fBloop\fP, \fBoffset\fP and \fBsizelimit\fP to the mount.<suffix> helpers. All other options are used in a comma\-separated list as an argument to the \fB\-o\fP option. -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -LIBMOUNT_FSTAB=<path> -.RS 4 -overrides the default location of the \fIfstab\fP file (ignored for suid) -.RE -.sp -LIBMOUNT_MTAB=<path> -.RS 4 -overrides the default location of the \fImtab\fP file (ignored for suid) -.RE -.sp -LIBMOUNT_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables libmount debug output -.RE -.sp -LIBBLKID_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables libblkid debug output -.RE -.sp -LOOPDEV_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables loop device setup debug output -.RE -.SH "FILES" -.sp -See also "\fBThe files /etc/fstab, /etc/mtab and /proc/mounts\fP" section above. -.sp -\fI/etc/fstab\fP -.RS 4 -filesystem table -.RE -.sp -\fI/run/mount\fP -.RS 4 -libmount private runtime directory -.RE -.sp -\fI/etc/mtab\fP -.RS 4 -table of mounted filesystems or symlink to \fI/proc/mounts\fP -.RE -.sp -\fI/etc/mtab~\fP -.RS 4 -lock file (unused on systems with \fImtab\fP symlink) -.RE -.sp -\fI/etc/mtab.tmp\fP -.RS 4 -temporary file (unused on systems with \fImtab\fP symlink) -.RE -.sp -\fI/etc/filesystems\fP -.RS 4 -a list of filesystem types to try -.RE -.SH "HISTORY" -.sp -A \fBmount\fP command existed in Version 5 AT&T UNIX. -.SH "BUGS" -.sp -It is possible for a corrupted filesystem to cause a crash. -.sp -Some Linux filesystems don\(cqt support \fB\-o sync\fP and \fB\-o dirsync\fP (the ext2, ext3, ext4, fat and vfat filesystems \fIdo\fP support synchronous updates (a la BSD) when mounted with the \fBsync\fP option). -.sp -The \fB\-o remount\fP may not be able to change mount parameters (all \fIext2fs\fP\-specific parameters, except \fBsb\fP, are changeable with a remount, for example, but you can\(cqt change \fBgid\fP or \fBumask\fP for the \fIfatfs\fP). -.sp -It is possible that the files \fI/etc/mtab\fP and \fI/proc/mounts\fP don\(cqt match on systems with a regular \fImtab\fP file. The first file is based only on the \fBmount\fP command options, but the content of the second file also depends on the kernel and others settings (e.g. on a remote NFS server \(em in certain cases the \fBmount\fP command may report unreliable information about an NFS mount point and the \fI/proc/mount\fP file usually contains more reliable information.) This is another reason to replace the \fImtab\fP file with a symlink to the \fI/proc/mounts\fP file. -.sp -Checking files on NFS filesystems referenced by file descriptors (i.e. the \fBfcntl\fP and \fBioctl\fP families of functions) may lead to inconsistent results due to the lack of a consistency check in the kernel even if the \fBnoac\fP mount option is used. -.sp -The \fBloop\fP option with the \fBoffset\fP or \fBsizelimit\fP options used may fail when using older kernels if the \fBmount\fP command can\(cqt confirm that the size of the block device has been configured as requested. This situation can be worked around by using the \fBlosetup\fP(8) command manually before calling \fBmount\fP with the configured loop device. -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBmount\fP(2), -\fBumount\fP(2), -\fBfilesystems\fP(5), -\fBfstab\fP(5), -\fBnfs\fP(5), -\fBxfs\fP(5), -\fBmount_namespaces\fP(7), -\fBxattr\fP(7), -\fBe2label\fP(8), -\fBfindmnt\fP(8), -\fBlosetup\fP(8), -\fBlsblk\fP(8), -\fBmke2fs\fP(8), -\fBmountd\fP(8), -\fBnfsd\fP(8), -\fBswapon\fP(8), -\fBtune2fs\fP(8), -\fBumount\fP(8), -\fBxfs_admin\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBmount\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "." diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mount.nfs.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mount.nfs.8 index 0409c96f..a78a3b0d 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mount.nfs.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mount.nfs.8 @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ can mount all NFS file system versions. Under earlier Linux kernel versions, .BR mount.nfs4 must be used for mounting NFSv4 file systems while .BR mount.nfs -must be used for NFSv3 and v2. +must be used for NFSv3. .SH OPTIONS .TP diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mountd.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mountd.8 index 21daa15b..a206a3e2 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mountd.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mountd.8 @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ clients and provides details of access permissions. The NFS server .RI ( nfsd ) maintains a cache of authentication and authorization information which -is used to identify the source of each requent, and then what access +is used to identify the source of each request, and then what access permissions that source has to any local filesystem. When required information is not found in the cache, the server sends a request to .B mountd @@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ Instead, mount the nfsd filesystem on .IR /proc/fs/nfsd . .TP .BI "\-s," "" " \-\-state\-directory\-path " directory -Specify a directory in which to place statd state information. +Specify a directory in which to place state information (etab and rmtab). If this option is not specified the default of .I /var/lib/nfs is used. @@ -286,10 +286,9 @@ The values recognized in the section include .BR TCP , .BR UDP , -.BR vers2 , .BR vers3 ", and" .B vers4 -which each have same same meaning as given by +which each have the same meaning as given by .BR rpc.nfsd (8). .SH TCP_WRAPPERS SUPPORT diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mountstats.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mountstats.8 index a55130bb..d5595fc7 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mountstats.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mountstats.8 @@ -19,6 +19,8 @@ mountstats \- Displays various NFS client per-mount statistics .RB [ \-r | \-\-rpc ] | .RB [ \-R | \-\-raw ] +| +.RB [ \-x | \-\-xprt ] ] .RI [ mountpoint ] ... .P @@ -33,7 +35,7 @@ mountstats \- Displays various NFS client per-mount statistics .RI [ count ] .RI [ mountpoint ] ... .P -.B mounstats nfsstat +.B mountstats nfsstat .RB [ \-h | \-\-help ] .RB [ \-v | \-\-version ] .RB [ \-f | \-\-file @@ -110,6 +112,9 @@ Display only the raw statistics. This is intended for use with the and .BR \-S | \-\-since options. +.TP +.B \-x, \-\-xprt +Display only the transport statistics .SS Options specific to the iostat sub-command .IP "\fIinterval\fP" Specifies the amount of time in seconds between each report. The first report contains statistics for the time since each file system was mounted. Each subsequent report contains statistics collected during the interval since the previous report. This may not be used with the diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsconf.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsconf.8 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d44e86fb --- /dev/null +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsconf.8 @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ +.\" +.\" nfsconf(8) +.\" +.TH nfsconf 8 "2 May 2018" +.SH NAME +nfsconf \- Query various NFS configuration settings +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B nfsconf \-\-dump +.RB [ \-v | \-\-verbose ] +.RB [ \-f | \-\-file +.IR infile.conf ] +.RI [ outfile ] +.P +.B nfsconf \-\-entry +.RB [ \-\-arg +.IR subsection] +.IR section +.IR tag +.P +.B nfsconf \-\-get +.RB [ \-v | \-\-verbose ] +.RB [ \-f | \-\-file +.IR infile.conf ] +.RB [ \-a | \-\-arg +.IR subsection ] +.IR section +.IR tag +.P +.B nfsconf \-\-isset +.RB [ \-v | \-\-verbose ] +.RB [ \-f | \-\-file +.IR infile.conf ] +.RB [ \-a | \-\-arg +.IR subsection ] +.IR section +.IR tag +.P +.B nfsconf \-\-set +.RB [ \-v | \-\-verbose ] +.RB [ \-m | \-\-modified +.IR "Modified by text" ] +.RB [ \-f | \-\-file +.IR infile.conf ] +.RB [ \-a | \-\-arg +.IR subsection ] +.IR section +.IR tag +.IR value +.P +.B nfsconf \-\-unset +.RB [ \-v | \-\-verbose ] +.RB [ \-f | \-\-file +.IR infile.conf ] +.RB [ \-a | \-\-arg +.IR subsection ] +.IR section +.IR tag +.SH DESCRIPTION +The +.B nfsconf +command can be used to test for and retrieve configuration settings +from a range of nfs-utils configuration files. +.SS Modes +The following modes are available: +.IP "\fB\-d, \-\-dump\fP" +Output an alphabetically sorted dump of the current configuration in conf file format. Accepts an optional filename in which to write the output. +.IP "\fB\-e, \-\-entry\fP" +retrieve the config entry rather than its current expanded value +.IP "\fB\-i, \-\-isset\fP" +Test if a specific tag has a value set. +.IP "\fB\-g, \-\-get\fP" +Output the current value of the specified tag. +.IP "\fB\-s, \-\-set\fP" +Update or Add a tag and value to the config file in a specified section, creating the tag, section, and file if necessary. If the section is defined as '#' then a comment is appended to the file. If a comment is set with a tag name then any exiting tagged comment with a matching name is replaced. +.IP "\fB\-u, \-\-unset\fP" +Remove the specified tag and its value from the config file. +.SH OPTIONS +.SS Options valid in all modes +.TP +.B \-v, \-\-verbose +Increase verbosity and print debugging information. +.TP +.B \-f, \-\-file \fIinfile\fR +Select a different config file to operate upon, default is +.I /etc/nfs.conf +.SS Options only valid in \fB\-\-entry\fR and \fB\-\-get\fR and \fB\-\-isset\fR modes. +.TP +.B \-a, \-\-arg \fIsubsection\fR +Select a specific sub-section +.SS Options only valid in \fB\-\-set\fR mode. +.B \-m, \-\-modified \fI"Modified by nfsconf"\fR +Set the text on the Modified date comment in the file. Set to empty to remove. +.SH EXIT STATUS +.SS \fB\-\-isset\fR mode +In this mode the command will return success (0) if the selected tag has a value, any other exit code indicates the value is not set, or some other error has occurred. +.SS all other modes +Success is indicated by an exit status of zero, any other status indicates an error. Error messages are output on stderr, and increasing verbosity will give more detailed explanations if any are available. +.SH EXAMPLES +.TP +.B nfsconf -v --dump --file /tmp/testconf.conf sorted.conf +Check a new config file for syntax errors and output a sorted version for ease of comparison with existing settings. +.TP +.B if ! nfsconf --isset gssd preferred-realm ; then echo 'No preferred realm configured for gss'; fi +The tool allows for easy testing of configuration values from shell scripts, here we test if a specific value has been set. +.TP +.B nfsconf --file /etc/nfsmount.conf --get --arg /home MountPoint background +Show default value for \fIbackground\fR option for NFS mounts of the \fI/home\fR path. +.TP +.B nfsconf --file /etc/nfs.conf --set nfsd debug 1 +Enable debugging in nfsd +.SH FILES +.TP +.B /etc/nfs.conf +.SH SEE ALSO +.BR nfsd (8), +.BR exportfs (8), +.BR idmapd (8), +.BR statd (8) +.SH AUTHOR +Justin Mitchell <jumitche@redhat.com> diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsd.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsd.8 index 020092dc..6f4fc1df 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsd.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsd.8 @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ This option can be used to request that .B rpc.nfsd does not offer certain versions of NFS. The current version of .B rpc.nfsd -can support major NFS versions 2,3,4 and the minor versions 4.1 and 4.2. +can support major NFS versions 3,4 and the minor versions 4.0, 4.1 and 4.2. .TP .B \-s " or " \-\-syslog By default, @@ -75,22 +75,24 @@ logs error messages (and debug messages, if enabled) to stderr. This option make log these messages to syslog instead. Note that errors encountered during option processing will still be logged to stderr regardless of this option. .TP +.B \-t " or " \-\-tcp +Instruct the kernel nfs server to open and listen on a TCP socket. This is the default. +.TP .B \-T " or " \-\-no-tcp -Disable -.B rpc.nfsd -from accepting TCP connections from clients. +Instruct the kernel nfs server not to open and listen on a TCP socket. +.TP +.B \-u " or " \-\-udp +Instruct the kernel nfs server to open and listen on a UDP socket. .TP .B \-U " or " \-\-no-udp -Disable -.B rpc.nfsd -from accepting UDP connections from clients. +Instruct the kernel nfs server not to open and listen on a UDP socket. This is the default. .TP .B \-V " or " \-\-nfs-version vers This option can be used to request that .B rpc.nfsd offer certain versions of NFS. The current version of .B rpc.nfsd -can support major NFS versions 2,3,4 and the minor versions 4.1 and 4.2. +can support major NFS versions 3,4 and the minor versions 4.0, 4.1 and 4.2. .TP .B \-L " or " \-\-lease-time seconds Set the lease-time used for NFSv4. This corresponds to how often @@ -153,7 +155,11 @@ The lease time for NFSv4, in seconds. Set the port for TCP/UDP to bind to. .TP .B rdma -Set RDMA port. Use "rdma=nfsrdma" to enable standard port. +Enable RDMA port (with "on" or "yes" etc) on the standard port +("nfsrdma", port 20049). +.TP +.B rdma-port +Set an alternate RDMA port. .TP .B UDP Enable (with "on" or "yes" etc) or disable ("off", "no") UDP support. @@ -161,12 +167,12 @@ Enable (with "on" or "yes" etc) or disable ("off", "no") UDP support. .B TCP Enable or disable TCP support. .TP -.B vers2 -.TP .B vers3 .TP .B vers4 -Enable or disable a major NFS version. 3 and 4 are normally enabled +Enable or disable +.B all +NFSv4 versions. All versions are normally enabled by default. .TP .B vers4.1 diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsdcld.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsdcld.8 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..861f1c49 --- /dev/null +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsdcld.8 @@ -0,0 +1,221 @@ +.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man 2.22 (Pod::Simple 3.13) +.\" +.\" Standard preamble: +.\" ======================================================================== +.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) +.if t .sp .5v +.if n .sp +.. +.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text +.ft CW +.nf +.ne \\$1 +.. +.de Ve \" End verbatim text +.ft R +.fi +.. +.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will +.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left +.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. \*(C+ will +.\" give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to do unbreakable dashes and +.\" therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C' expand to `' in nroff, +.\" nothing in troff, for use with C<>. +.tr \(*W- +.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p' +.ie n \{\ +. ds -- \(*W- +. ds PI pi +. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch +. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch +. ds L" "" +. ds R" "" +. ds C` "" +. ds C' "" +'br\} +.el\{\ +. ds -- \|\(em\| +. ds PI \(*p +. ds L" `` +. ds R" '' +'br\} +.\" +.\" Escape single quotes in literal strings from groff's Unicode transform. +.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq +.el .ds Aq ' +.\" +.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for +.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.SS), items (.Ip), and index +.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the +.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion. +.ie \nF \{\ +. de IX +. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2" +.. +. nr % 0 +. rr F +.\} +.el \{\ +. de IX +.. +.\} +.\" +.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2). +.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts. +. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff +.if n \{\ +. ds #H 0 +. ds #V .8m +. ds #F .3m +. ds #[ \f1 +. ds #] \fP +.\} +.if t \{\ +. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m) +. ds #V .6m +. ds #F 0 +. ds #[ \& +. ds #] \& +.\} +. \" simple accents for nroff and troff +.if n \{\ +. ds ' \& +. ds ` \& +. ds ^ \& +. ds , \& +. ds ~ ~ +. ds / +.\} +.if t \{\ +. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u" +. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u' +. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u' +. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u' +. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u' +. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u' +.\} +. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents +.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V' +.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H' +.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#] +.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H' +.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u' +.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#] +.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#] +.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e +.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E +. \" corrections for vroff +.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u' +.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u' +. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr) +.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \ +\{\ +. ds : e +. ds 8 ss +. ds o a +. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga +. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy +. ds th \o'bp' +. ds Th \o'LP' +. ds ae ae +. ds Ae AE +.\} +.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C +.\" ======================================================================== +.\" +.IX Title "NFSDCLD 8" +.TH NFSDCLD 8 "2011-12-21" "" "" +.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes +.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents. +.if n .ad l +.nh +.SH "NAME" +nfsdcld \- NFSv4 Client Tracking Daemon +.SH "SYNOPSIS" +.IX Header "SYNOPSIS" +nfsdcld [\-d] [\-F] [\-p path] [\-s stable storage dir] +.SH "DESCRIPTION" +.IX Header "DESCRIPTION" +nfsdcld is the NFSv4 client tracking daemon. It is not necessary to run +this daemon on machines that are not acting as NFSv4 servers. +.PP +When a network partition is combined with a server reboot, there are +edge conditions that can cause the server to grant lock reclaims when +other clients have taken conflicting locks in the interim. A more detailed +explanation of this issue is described in \s-1RFC\s0 3530, section 8.6.3. +.PP +In order to prevent these problems, the server must track a small amount +of per-client information on stable storage. This daemon provides the +userspace piece of that functionality. +.SH "OPTIONS" +.IX Header "OPTIONS" +.IP "\fB\-d\fR, \fB\-\-debug\fR" 4 +.IX Item "-d, --debug" +Enable debug level logging. +.IP "\fB\-F\fR, \fB\-\-foreground\fR" 4 +.IX Item "-F, --foreground" +Runs the daemon in the foreground and prints all output to stderr +.IP "\fB\-p\fR \fIpath\fR, \fB\-\-pipefsdir\fR=\fIpath\fR" 4 +.IX Item "-p path, --pipefsdir=path" +Location of the rpc_pipefs filesystem. The default value is +\&\fI/var/lib/nfs/rpc_pipefs\fR. +.IP "\fB\-s\fR \fIstorage_dir\fR, \fB\-\-storagedir\fR=\fIstorage_dir\fR" 4 +.IX Item "-s storagedir, --storagedir=storage_dir" +Directory where stable storage information should be kept. The default +value is \fI/var/lib/nfs/nfsdcld\fR. +.SH "CONFIGURATION FILE" +.IX Header "CONFIGURATION FILE" +The following values are recognized in the \fB[nfsdcld]\fR section +of the \fI/etc/nfs.conf\fR configuration file: +.IP "\fBstoragedir\fR" 4 +.IX Item "storagedir" +Equivalent to \fB\-s\fR/\fB\-\-storagedir\fR. +.IP "\fBdebug\fR" 4 +.IX Item "debug" +Setting "debug = 1" is equivalent to \fB\-d\fR/\fB\-\-debug\fR. +.LP +In addition, the following value is recognized from the \fB[general]\fR section: +.IP "\fBpipefs\-directory\fR" 4 +.IX Item "pipefs-directory" +Equivalent to \fB\-p\fR/\fB\-\-pipefsdir\fR. +.SH "NOTES" +.IX Header "NOTES" +The Linux kernel NFSv4 server has historically tracked this information +on stable storage by manipulating information on the filesystem +directly, in the directory to which \fI/proc/fs/nfsd/nfsv4recoverydir\fR +points. +.PP +This changed with the original introduction of \fBnfsdcld\fR upcall in kernel version 3.4, +which was later deprecated in favor of the \fBnfsdcltrack\fR(8) usermodehelper +program, support for which was added in kernel version 3.8. However, since the +usermodehelper upcall does not work in containers, support for a new version of +the \fBnfsdcld\fR upcall was added in kernel version 5.2. +.PP +This daemon requires a kernel that supports the \fBnfsdcld\fR upcall. On older kernels, if +the legacy client name tracking code was in use, then the kernel would not create the +pipe that \fBnfsdcld\fR uses to talk to the kernel. On newer kernels, nfsd attempts to +initialize client tracking in the following order: First, the \fBnfsdcld\fR upcall. Second, +the \fBnfsdcltrack\fR usermodehelper upcall. Finally, the legacy client tracking. +.PP +This daemon should be run as root, as the pipe that it uses to communicate +with the kernel is only accessable by root. The daemon however does drop all +superuser capabilities after starting. Because of this, the \fIstoragedir\fR +should be owned by root, and be readable and writable by owner. +.PP +The daemon now supports different upcall versions to allow the kernel to pass additional +data to be stored in the on-disk database. The kernel will query the supported upcall +version from \fBnfsdcld\fR during client tracking initialization. A restart of \fBnfsd\fR is +not necessary after upgrading \fBnfsdcld\fR, however \fBnfsd\fR will not use a later upcall +version until restart. A restart of \fBnfsd is necessary\fR after downgrading \fBnfsdcld\fR, +to ensure that \fBnfsd\fR does not use an upcall version that \fBnfsdcld\fR does not support. +Additionally, a downgrade of \fBnfsdcld\fR requires the schema of the on-disk database to +be downgraded as well. That can be accomplished using the \fBnfsdclddb\fR(8) utility. +.SH FILES +.TP +.B /var/lib/nfs/nfsdcld/main.sqlite +.SH SEE ALSO +.BR nfsdcltrack "(8), " nfsdclddb (8) +.SH "AUTHORS" +.IX Header "AUTHORS" +The nfsdcld daemon was developed by Jeff Layton <jlayton@redhat.com> +with modifications from Scott Mayhew <smayhew@redhat.com>. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsdclddb.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsdclddb.8 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8ec7b187 --- /dev/null +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsdclddb.8 @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ +.\" +.\" nfsdclddb(8) +.\" +.TH nfsdclddb 8 "07 Aug 2019" +.SH NAME +nfsdclddb \- Tool for manipulating the nfsdcld sqlite database +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B nfsdclddb +.RB [ \-h | \-\-help ] +.P +.B nfsdclddb +.RB [ \-p | \-\-path +.IR dbpath ] +.B fix-table-names +.RB [ \-h | \-\-help ] +.P +.B nfsdclddb +.RB [ \-p | \-\-path +.IR dbpath ] +.B downgrade-schema +.RB [ \-h | \-\-help ] +.RB [ \-v | \-\-version +.IR to-version ] +.P +.B nfsdclddb +.RB [ \-p | \-\-path +.IR dbpath ] +.B print +.RB [ \-h | \-\-help ] +.RB [ \-s | \-\-summary ] +.P + +.SH DESCRIPTION +.RB "The " nfsdclddb " command is provided to perform some manipulation of the nfsdcld sqlite database schema and to print the contents of the database." +.SS Sub-commands +Valid +.B nfsdclddb +subcommands are: +.IP "\fBfix-table-names\fP" +.RB "A previous version of " nfsdcld "(8) contained a bug that corrupted the reboot epoch table names. This sub-command will fix those table names." +.IP "\fBdowngrade-schema\fP" +Downgrade the database schema. Currently the schema can only to downgraded from version 4 to version 3. +.IP "\fBprint\fP" +Display the contents of the database. Prints the schema version and the values of the current and recovery epochs. If the +.BR \-s | \-\-summary +option is not given, also prints the clients in the reboot epoch tables. +.SH OPTIONS +.SS Options valid for all sub-commands +.TP +.B \-h, \-\-help +Show the help message and exit +.TP +\fB\-p \fIdbpath\fR, \fB\-\-path \fIdbpath\fR +Open the sqlite database located at +.I dbpath +instead of +.IR /var/lib/nfs/nfsdcld/main.sqlite ". " +This is mainly for testing purposes. +.SS Options specific to the downgrade-schema sub-command +.TP +\fB\-v \fIto-version\fR, \fB\-\-version \fIto-version\fR +The schema version to downgrade to. Currently the schema can only be downgraded to version 3. +.SS Options specific to the print sub-command +.TP +.B \-s, \-\-summary +Do not list the clients in the reboot epoch tables in the output. +.SH NOTES +The +.B nfsdclddb +command will not allow the +.B fix-table-names +or +.B downgrade-schema +subcommands to be used if +.BR nfsdcld (8) +is running. +.SH FILES +.TP +.B /var/lib/nfs/nfsdcld/main.sqlite +.SH SEE ALSO +.BR nfsdcld (8) +.SH AUTHOR +Scott Mayhew <smayhew@redhat.com> diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsdclnts.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsdclnts.8 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c7efbd70 --- /dev/null +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsdclnts.8 @@ -0,0 +1,180 @@ +.\" +.\" nfsdclnts(8) +.\" +.TH "NFSDCLTS" "8" "2020-05-09" "nfsdclnts" "nfsdclnts" +.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq +.el .ds Aq ' +.ss \n[.ss] 0 +.nh +.ad l +.de URL +\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 +.. +.als MTO URL +.if \n[.g] \{\ +. mso www.tmac +. am URL +. ad l +. . +. am MTO +. ad l +. . +. LINKSTYLE blue R < > +.\} +.SH "NAME" +nfsdclnts \- print various nfs client information for knfsd server. +.SH "SYNOPSIS" +.sp +\fBnfsdclnts\fP [\fI\-h\fP] [\fI\-t type\fP] [\fI\-\-clientinfo\fP] [\fI\-\-hostname\fP] [\fI\-q\fP] +.SH "DESCRIPTION" +.sp +The nfsdclnts(8) command parses the content present in /proc/fs/nfsd/clients/ directories. nfsdclnts(8) displays files which are open, locked, delegated by the nfs\-client. It also prints useful client information such as hostname, clientID, NFS version mounted by the nfs\-client. +.SH "OPTIONS" +.sp +\fB\-t, \-\-type\fP=TYPE +.RS 4 +Specify the type of file to be displayed. Takes only one TYPE at a time. +.sp +\fIopen\fP, \fIlock\fP, \fIdeleg\fP, \fIlayout\fP, or \fIall\fP +.sp +open: displays the open files by nfs\-client(s). +.sp +lock: displays the files locked by nfs\-client(s). +.sp +layout: displays the files for which layout is given. +.sp +deleg: displays delegated files information and delegation type. +.sp +all: prints all the above type. +.RE +.sp +\fB\-\-clientinfo\fP +.RS 4 +displays various nfs\-client info fields such as version of nfs mounted at nfs\-client and clientID. +.RE +.sp +\fB\-\-hostname\fP +.RS 4 +Print hostname of nfs\-client instead of ip-address. +.RE +.sp +\fB\-q, \-\-quiet\fP +.RS 4 +Hide the header information. +.RE +.sp +\fB\-v, \-\-verbose\fP +.RS 4 +Verbose operation, show debug messages. +.RE +.sp +\fB\-f, \-\-file\fP +.RS 4 +Instead of processing all client directories under /proc/fs/nfsd/clients, one can provide a specific +states file to process. One should make sure that info file resides in the same directory as states file. +If the info file is not valid or present the fields would be marked as "N/A". +.RE +.sp +\fB\-h, \-\-help\fP +.RS 4 +Print help explaining the command line options. +.SH "EXAMPLES" +.sp +\fBnfsdclnts \-\-type open\fP +.RS 4 +List all files with open type only. +.RE +.sp +.if n .RS 4 +.nf +Inode number | Type | Access | Deny | ip address | Filename +33823232 | open | r\- | \-\- | [::1]:757 | testfile +.fi +.if n .RE +.sp +\fBnfsdclnts \-\-type deleg\fP +.RS 4 +List all files with deleg type only. +.RE +.sp +.if n .RS 4 +.nf +Inode number | Type | Access | ip address | Filename +33823232 | deleg | r | [::1]:757 | testfile +.fi +.if n .RE +.sp +\fBnfsdclnts \-\-hostname\fP +.RS 4 +Print hostname instead of ip\-address. +.RE +.sp +.if n .RS 4 +.nf +Inode number | Type | Access | Deny | Hostname | Filename +33823232 | open | r\- | \-\- | nfs\-server | testfile +33823232 | deleg | r | | nfs\-server | testfile +.fi +.if n .RE +.sp +\fBnfsdclnts \-\-clientinfo\fP +.RS 4 +Print client information. +.RE +.sp +.if n .RS 4 +.nf +Inode number | Type | Access | Deny | ip address | Client ID | vers | Filename +33823232 | open | r\- | \-\- | [::1]:757 | 0xc79a009f5eb65e84 | 4.2 | testfile +33823232 | deleg | r | | [::1]:757 | 0xc79a009f5eb65e84 | 4.2 | testfile +.fi +.if n .RE +.sp +\fBnfsdclnts \-\-file /proc/fs/nfsd/clients/3/states -t open\fP +.RS 4 +Process specific states file. +.RE +.sp +.if n .RS 4 +.nf +Inode number | Type | Access | Deny | ip address | Client ID | vers | Filename +33823232 | open | r\- | \-\- | [::1]:757 | 0xc79a009f5eb65e84 | 4.2 | testfile +.fi +.if n .RE +.sp +\fBnfsdclnts \-\-quiet \-\-hostname\fP +.RS 4 +Hide the header information. +.RE +.sp +.if n .RS 4 +.nf +33823232 | open | r\- | \-\- | nfs\-server | testfile +33823232 | deleg | r | | nfs\-server | testfile +.fi +.if n .RE +.SH "FILES" +.sp +\fB/proc/fs/nfsd/clients/\fP +.sp +Displays basic information about each NFSv4 client. +.sp +\fB/proc/fs/nfsd/clients/#/info\fP +.sp +Displays information about all the opens held by the given client, including open modes, device numbers, inode numbers, and open owners. +.sp +\fB/proc/fs/nfsd/clients/#/states\fP +.SH "NOTES" +.sp +/proc/fs/nfsd/clients/ support was initially introduced in 5.3 kernel and is only implemented for mount points using NFSv4. +.SH "BUGS" +Please report any BUGs to \c +.MTO "linux\-nfs\(atvger.kernel.org" "" "" +.SH SEE ALSO +.BR nfsd (8), +.BR exportfs (8), +.BR idmapd (8), +.BR statd (8) +.SH "AUTHORS" +Achilles Gaikwad <agaikwad@redhat.com> and +Kenneth D'souza <kdsouza@redhat.com> diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsidmap.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsidmap.8 index 2af16f31..1911c41b 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsidmap.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsidmap.8 @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ .\"@(#)nfsidmap(8) - The NFS idmapper upcall program .\" .\" Copyright (C) 2010 Bryan Schumaker <bjschuma@netapp.com> -.TH nfsidmap 5 "1 October 2010" +.TH nfsidmap 8 "1 October 2010" .SH NAME nfsidmap \- The NFS idmapper upcall program .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsiostat.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsiostat.8 index b477a9a0..940c0431 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsiostat.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsiostat.8 @@ -90,6 +90,21 @@ This is the duration from the time that NFS client does the RPC request to its k .RE .RE .RE +.RS 8 +- \fBavg queue (ms)\fR +.RS +This is the duration from the time the NFS client created the RPC request task to the time the request is transmitted. +.RE +.RE +.RE +.RS 8 +- \fBerrors\fR +.RS +This is the number of operations that completed with an error status (status < 0). This count is only available on kernels with RPC iostats version 1.1 or above. +.RS +.RE +.RE +.RE .TP Note that if an interval is used as argument to \fBnfsiostat\fR, then the diffrence from previous interval will be displayed, otherwise the results will be from the time that the share was mounted. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsref.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsref.8 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..12615497 --- /dev/null +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsref.8 @@ -0,0 +1,180 @@ +.\"@(#)nfsref.8" +.\" +.\" @file utils/nfsref/nfsref.man +.\" @brief man page for nfsref command +.\" + +.\" +.\" Copyright 2011, 2018 Oracle. All rights reserved. +.\" +.\" This file is part of nfs-utils. +.\" +.\" nfs-utils is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify +.\" it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2.0 as +.\" published by the Free Software Foundation. +.\" +.\" nfs-utils is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but +.\" WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +.\" MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +.\" GNU General Public License version 2.0 for more details. +.\" +.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +.\" version 2.0 along with nfs-utils. If not, see: +.\" +.\" http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/gpl-2.0.txt +.\" +.TH NFSREF 8 "9 Jan 2018" +.SH NAME +nfsref \- manage NFS referrals +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B nfsref +.RB [ \-?d ] +.RB [ \-t +.IB type ] +.B add +.I pathname server export +.RI [ " server" +.IR export " ... ]" +.P +.B nfsref +.RB [ \-?d ] +.RB [ \-t +.IB type ] +.B remove +.I pathname +.P +.B nfsref +.RB [ \-?d ] +.RB [ \-t +.IB type ] +.B lookup +.I pathname +.SH INTRODUCTION +NFS version 4 introduces the concept of +.I file system referrals +to NFS. +A file system referral is like a symbolic link on a file server +to another file system share, possibly on another file server. +On an NFS client, a referral behaves like an automounted directory. +The client, under the server's direction, mounts a new NFS export +automatically when an application first accesses that directory. +.P +Referrals are typically used to construct a single file name space +across multiple file servers. +Because file servers control the shape of the name space, +no client configuration is required, +and all clients see the same referral information. +.P +The Linux NFS server supports NFS version 4 referrals. +Administrators can specify the +.B refer= +export option in +.I /etc/exports +to configure a list of exports from which the client can choose. +See +.BR exports (5) +for details. +.P +.SH DESCRIPTION +The +.BR nfsref (8) +command is a simple way to get started managing junction metadata. +Other administrative commands provide richer access to junction information. +.SS Subcommands +Valid +.BR nfsref (8) +subcommands are: +.IP "\fBadd\fP" +Adds junction information to the directory named by +.IR pathname . +The named directory must already exist, +and must not already contain junction information. +Regular directory contents are obscured to NFS clients by this operation. +.IP +A list of one or more file server and export path pairs +is also specified on the command line. +When creating an NFS basic junction, this list is +stored in an extended attribute of the directory. +.IP +If junction creation is successful, the +.BR nfsref (8) +command flushes the kernel's export cache +to remove previously cached junction information. +.IP "\fBremove\fP" +Removes junction information from the directory named by +.IR pathname . +The named directory must exist, +and must contain junction information. +Regular directory contents are made visible to NFS clients again by this operation. +.IP +If junction deletion is successful, the +.BR nfsref (8) +command flushes the kernel's export cache +to remove previously cached junction information. +.IP "\fBlookup\fP" +Displays junction information stored in the directory named by +.IR pathname . +The named directory must exist, +and must contain junction information. +.IP +When looking up an NFS basic junction, the junction information +in the directory is listed on +.IR stdout . +.SS Command line options +.IP "\fB\-d, \-\-debug" +Enables debugging messages during operation. +.IP "\fB\-t, \-\-type=\fIjunction-type\fP" +Specifies the junction type for the operation. Valid values for +.I junction-type +are +.B nfs-basic +or +.BR nfs-fedfs . +.IP +For the +.B add +subcommand, the default value if this option is not specified is +.BR nfs-basic . +For the +.B remove +and +.B lookup +subcommands, the +.B \-\-type +option is not required. The +.BR nfsref (8) +command operates on whatever junction contents are available. +.SH EXAMPLES +Suppose you have two file servers, +.I top.example.net +and +.IR home.example.net . +You want all your clients to mount +.I top.example.net:/ +and then see the files under +.I home.example.net:/ +automatically in +.IR top:/home . +.P +On +.IR top.example.net , +you might issue this command as root: +.RS +.sp +# mkdir /home +.br +# nfsref --type=nfs-basic add /home home.example.net / +.br +Created junction /home. +.sp +.RE +.SH FILES +.TP +.I /etc/exports +NFS server export table +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.BR exports (5) +.sp +RFC 5661 for a description of NFS version 4 referrals +.SH "AUTHOR" +Chuck Lever <chuck.lever@oracle.com> diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nmbd.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nmbd.8 index 6d8537de..118e5908 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nmbd.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nmbd.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: nmbd .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "NMBD" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "NMBD" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -288,7 +288,7 @@ The debug log level of nmbd may be raised or lowered using (SIGUSR[1|2] signals are no longer used since Samba 2\&.2)\&. This is to allow transient problems to be diagnosed, whilst still running at a normally low log level\&. .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "SEE ALSO" .PP \fBinetd\fR(8), diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nologin.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nologin.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 97c378c7..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nologin.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,100 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: nologin -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "NOLOGIN" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -nologin \- politely refuse a login -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBnologin\fP [\fB\-V\fP] [\fB\-h\fP] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBnologin\fP displays a message that an account is not available and exits non\-zero. It is intended as a replacement shell field to deny login access to an account. -.sp -If the file \fI/etc/nologin.txt\fP exists, \fBnologin\fP displays its contents to the user instead of the default message. -.sp -The exit status returned by \fBnologin\fP is always 1. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-command\fP \fIcommand\fP -.sp -\fB\-\-init\-file\fP -.sp -\fB\-i\fP \fB\-\-interactive\fP -.sp -\fB\-\-init\-file\fP \fIfile\fP -.sp -\fB\-i\fP, \fB\-\-interactive\fP -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-login\fP -.sp -\fB\-\-noprofile\fP -.sp -\fB\-\-norc\fP -.sp -\fB\-\-posix\fP -.sp -\fB\-\-rcfile\fP \fIfile\fP -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-restricted\fP -.sp -These shell command\-line options are ignored to avoid \fBnologin\fP error. -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -\fBnologin\fP is a per\-account way to disable login (usually used for system accounts like http or ftp). \fBnologin\fP uses \fI/etc/nologin.txt\fP as an optional source for a non\-default message, the login access is always refused independently of the file. -.sp -\fBpam_nologin\fP(8) PAM module usually prevents all non\-root users from logging into the system. \fBpam_nologin\fP(8) functionality is controlled by \fI/var/run/nologin\fP or the \fI/etc/nologin\fP file. -.SH "HISTORY" -.sp -The \fBnologin\fP command appeared in 4.4BSD. -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBlogin\fP(1), -\fBpasswd\fP(5), -\fBpam_nologin\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBnologin\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/pam_systemd.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/pam_systemd.8 index 41c74edb..f5836b9e 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/pam_systemd.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/pam_systemd.8 @@ -353,8 +353,7 @@ account sufficient pam_unix\&.so account required pam_permit\&.so \-password sufficient pam_systemd_home\&.so -password sufficient pam_unix\&.so sha512 shadow try_first_pass use_authtok - +password sufficient pam_unix\&.so sha512 shadow try_first_pass password required pam_deny\&.so \-session optional pam_keyinit\&.so revoke diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/partx.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/partx.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 6e7ac4db..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/partx.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,222 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: partx -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "PARTX" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -partx \- tell the kernel about the presence and numbering of on\-disk partitions -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBpartx\fP [\fB\-a\fP|\fB\-d\fP|\fB\-P\fP|\fB\-r\fP|\fB\-s\fP|\fB\-u\fP] [\fB\-t\fP \fItype\fP] [\fB\-n\fP \fIM\fP:_N_] [\-] \fIdisk\fP -.sp -\fBpartx\fP [\fB\-a\fP|\fB\-d\fP|\fB\-P\fP|\fB\-r\fP|\fB\-s\fP|\fB\-u\fP] [\fB\-t\fP \fItype\fP] \fIpartition\fP [\fIdisk\fP] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -Given a device or disk\-image, \fBpartx\fP tries to parse the partition table and list its contents. It can also tell the kernel to add or remove partitions from its bookkeeping. -.sp -The \fIdisk\fP argument is optional when a \fIpartition\fP argument is provided. To force scanning a partition as if it were a whole disk (for example to list nested subpartitions), use the argument "\-" (hyphen\-minus). For example: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -partx \-\-show \- /dev/sda3 -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -This will see sda3 as a whole\-disk rather than as a partition. -.sp -\fBpartx is not an fdisk program\fP \- adding and removing partitions does not change the disk, it just tells the kernel about the presence and numbering of on\-disk partitions. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-add\fP -.RS 4 -Add the specified partitions, or read the disk and add all partitions. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-b\fP, \fB\-\-bytes\fP -.RS 4 -Print the SIZE column in bytes rather than in human\-readable format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-delete\fP -.RS 4 -Delete the specified partitions or all partitions. It is not error to remove non\-existing partitions, so this option is possible to use together with large \fB\-\-nr\fP ranges without care about the current partitions set on the device. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-g\fP, \fB\-\-noheadings\fP -.RS 4 -Do not print a header line with \fB\-\-show\fP or \fB\-\-raw\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-list\fP -.RS 4 -List the partitions. Note that all numbers are in 512\-byte sectors. This output format is DEPRECATED in favour of \fB\-\-show\fP. Do not use it in newly written scripts. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-nr\fP \fIM\fP\fB:\fP\fIN\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the range of partitions. For backward compatibility also the format \fIM\fP\fB\-\fP\fIN\fP is supported. The range may contain negative numbers, for example \fB\-\-nr \-1:\-1\fP means the last partition, and \fB\-\-nr \-2:\-1\fP means the last two partitions. Supported range specifications are: -.sp -\fIM\fP -.RS 4 -Specifies just one partition (e.g. \fB\-\-nr 3\fP). -.RE -.sp -\fIM\fP\fB:\fP -.RS 4 -Specifies the lower limit only (e.g. \fB\-\-nr 2:\fP). -.RE -.sp -\fB:\fP\fIN\fP -.RS 4 -Specifies the upper limit only (e.g. \fB\-\-nr :4\fP). -.RE -.sp -\fIM\fP\fB:\fP\fIN\fP -.RS 4 -Specifies the lower and upper limits (e.g. \fB\-\-nr 2:4\fP). -.RE -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-output\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Define the output columns to use for \fB\-\-show\fP, \fB\-\-pairs\fP and \fB\-\-raw\fP output. If no output arrangement is specified, then a default set is used. Use \fB\-\-help\fP to get \fIlist\fP of all supported columns. This option cannot be combined with the \fB\-\-add\fP, \fB\-\-delete\fP, \fB\-\-update\fP or \fB\-\-list\fP options. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-output\-all\fP -.RS 4 -Output all available columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-P\fP, \fB\-\-pairs\fP -.RS 4 -List the partitions using the KEY="value" format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-raw\fP -.RS 4 -List the partitions using the raw output format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-show\fP -.RS 4 -List the partitions. The output columns can be selected and rearranged with the \fB\-\-output\fP option. All numbers (except SIZE) are in 512\-byte sectors. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-type\fP \fItype\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the partition table type. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-list\-types\fP -.RS 4 -List supported partition types and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-u\fP, \fB\-\-update\fP -.RS 4 -Update the specified partitions. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-S\fP, \fB\-\-sector\-size\fP \fIsize\fP -.RS 4 -Overwrite default sector size. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Verbose mode. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -LIBBLKID_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables libblkid debug output. -.RE -.SH "EXAMPLE" -.sp -partx \-\-show /dev/sdb3, partx \-\-show \-\-nr 3 /dev/sdb, partx \-\-show /dev/sdb3 /dev/sdb -.RS 4 -All three commands list partition 3 of /dev/sdb. -.RE -.sp -partx \-\-show \- /dev/sdb3 -.RS 4 -Lists all subpartitions on \fI/dev/sdb3\fP (the device is used as whole\-disk). -.RE -.sp -partx \-o START \-g \-\-nr 5 /dev/sdb -.RS 4 -Prints the start sector of partition 5 on \fI/dev/sdb\fP without header. -.RE -.sp -partx \-o SECTORS,SIZE /dev/sda5 /dev/sda -.RS 4 -Lists the length in sectors and human\-readable size of partition 5 on \fI/dev/sda\fP. -.RE -.sp -partx \-\-add \-\-nr 3:5 /dev/sdd -.RS 4 -Adds all available partitions from 3 to 5 (inclusive) on \fI/dev/sdd\fP. -.RE -.sp -partx \-d \-\-nr :\-1 /dev/sdd -.RS 4 -Removes the last partition on \fI/dev/sdd\fP. -.RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "dave\(atgnu.org" "Davidlohr Bueso" "," -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.sp -The original version was written by \c -.MTO "aeb\(atcwi.nl" "Andries E. Brouwer" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBaddpart\fP(8), -\fBdelpart\fP(8), -\fBfdisk\fP(8), -\fBparted\fP(8), -\fBpartprobe\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBpartx\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/pivot_root.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/pivot_root.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 40459573..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/pivot_root.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,112 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: pivot_root -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "PIVOT_ROOT" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -pivot_root \- change the root filesystem -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBpivot_root\fP \fInew_root\fP \fIput_old\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBpivot_root\fP moves the root file system of the current process to the directory \fIput_old\fP and makes \fInew_root\fP the new root file system. Since \fBpivot_root\fP(8) simply calls \fBpivot_root\fP(2), we refer to the man page of the latter for further details. -.sp -Note that, depending on the implementation of \fBpivot_root\fP, root and current working directory of the caller may or may not change. The following is a sequence for invoking \fBpivot_root\fP that works in either case, assuming that \fBpivot_root\fP and \fBchroot\fP are in the current \fBPATH\fP: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -cd new_root -pivot_root . put_old -exec chroot . command -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -Note that \fBchroot\fP must be available under the old root and under the new root, because \fBpivot_root\fP may or may not have implicitly changed the root directory of the shell. -.sp -Note that \fBexec chroot\fP changes the running executable, which is necessary if the old root directory should be unmounted afterwards. Also note that standard input, output, and error may still point to a device on the old root file system, keeping it busy. They can easily be changed when invoking \fBchroot\fP (see below; note the absence of leading slashes to make it work whether \fBpivot_root\fP has changed the shell\(cqs root or not). -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "EXAMPLE" -.sp -Change the root file system to \fI/dev/hda1\fP from an interactive shell: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -mount /dev/hda1 /new\-root -cd /new\-root -pivot_root . old\-root -exec chroot . sh <dev/console >dev/console 2>&1 -umount /old\-root -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -Mount the new root file system over NFS from 10.0.0.1:/my_root and run \fBinit\fP: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -ifconfig lo 127.0.0.1 up # for portmap -# configure Ethernet or such -portmap # for lockd (implicitly started by mount) -mount \-o ro 10.0.0.1:/my_root /mnt -killall portmap # portmap keeps old root busy -cd /mnt -pivot_root . old_root -exec chroot . sh \-c \(aqumount /old_root; exec /sbin/init\(aq \(rs - <dev/console >dev/console 2>&1 -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBchroot\fP(1), -\fBpivot_root\fP(2), -\fBmount\fP(8), -\fBswitch_root\fP(8), -\fBumount\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBpivot_root\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/readprofile.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/readprofile.8 deleted file mode 100644 index d82b9a15..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/readprofile.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,190 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: readprofile -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "READPROFILE" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -readprofile \- read kernel profiling information -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBreadprofile\fP [options] -.SH "VERSION" -.sp -This manpage documents version 2.0 of the program. -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -The \fBreadprofile\fP command uses the \fI/proc/profile\fP information to print ascii data on standard output. The output is organized in three columns: the first is the number of clock ticks, the second is the name of the C function in the kernel where those many ticks occurred, and the third is the normalized `load\(aq of the procedure, calculated as a ratio between the number of ticks and the length of the procedure. The output is filled with blanks to ease readability. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-all\fP -.RS 4 -Print all symbols in the mapfile. By default the procedures with reported ticks are not printed. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-b\fP, \fB\-\-histbin\fP -.RS 4 -Print individual histogram\-bin counts. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-i\fP, \fB\-\-info\fP -.RS 4 -Info. This makes \fBreadprofile\fP only print the profiling step used by the kernel. The profiling step is the resolution of the profiling buffer, and is chosen during kernel configuration (through \fBmake config\fP), or in the kernel\(cqs command line. If the \fB\-t\fP (terse) switch is used together with \fB\-i\fP only the decimal number is printed. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-m\fP, \fB\-\-mapfile\fP \fImapfile\fP -.RS 4 -Specify a mapfile, which by default is \fI/usr/src/linux/System.map\fP. You should specify the map file on cmdline if your current kernel isn\(cqt the last one you compiled, or if you keep System.map elsewhere. If the name of the map file ends with \fI.gz\fP it is decompressed on the fly. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-M\fP, \fB\-\-multiplier\fP \fImultiplier\fP -.RS 4 -On some architectures it is possible to alter the frequency at which the kernel delivers profiling interrupts to each CPU. This option allows you to set the frequency, as a multiplier of the system clock frequency, HZ. Linux 2.6.16 dropped multiplier support for most systems. This option also resets the profiling buffer, and requires superuser privileges. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-profile\fP \fIpro\-file\fP -.RS 4 -Specify a different profiling buffer, which by default is \fI/proc/profile\fP. Using a different pro\-file is useful if you want to `freeze\(aq the kernel profiling at some time and read it later. The \fI/proc/profile\fP file can be copied using \fBcat\fP(1) or \fBcp\fP(1). There is no more support for compressed profile buffers, like in \fBreadprofile\-1.1\fP, because the program needs to know the size of the buffer in advance. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-reset\fP -.RS 4 -Reset the profiling buffer. This can only be invoked by root, because \fI/proc/profile\fP is readable by everybody but writable only by the superuser. However, you can make \fBreadprofile\fP set\-user\-ID 0, in order to reset the buffer without gaining privileges. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s, \-\-counters\fP -.RS 4 -Print individual counters within functions. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Verbose. The output is organized in four columns and filled with blanks. The first column is the RAM address of a kernel function, the second is the name of the function, the third is the number of clock ticks and the last is the normalized load. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "FILES" -.sp -\fI/proc/profile\fP -.RS 4 -A binary snapshot of the profiling buffer. -.RE -.sp -\fI/usr/src/linux/System.map\fP -.RS 4 -The symbol table for the kernel. -.RE -.sp -\fI/usr/src/linux/*\fP -.RS 4 -The program being profiled :\-) -.RE -.SH "BUGS" -.sp -\fBreadprofile\fP only works with a 1.3.x or newer kernel, because \fI/proc/profile\fP changed in the step from 1.2 to 1.3. -.sp -This program only works with ELF kernels. The change for a.out kernels is trivial, and left as an exercise to the a.out user. -.sp -To enable profiling, the kernel must be rebooted, because no profiling module is available, and it wouldn\(cqt be easy to build. To enable profiling, you can specify \fBprofile\fP=\fI2\fP (or another number) on the kernel commandline. The number you specify is the two\-exponent used as profiling step. -.sp -Profiling is disabled when interrupts are inhibited. This means that many profiling ticks happen when interrupts are re\-enabled. Watch out for misleading information. -.SH "EXAMPLE" -.sp -Browse the profiling buffer ordering by clock ticks: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C - readprofile | sort \-nr | less -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -Print the 20 most loaded procedures: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C - readprofile | sort \-nr +2 | head \-20 -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -Print only filesystem profile: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C - readprofile | grep _ext2 -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -Look at all the kernel information, with ram addresses: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C - readprofile \-av | less -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -Browse a \(aqfrozen\(aq profile buffer for a non current kernel: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C - readprofile \-p ~/profile.freeze \-m /zImage.map.gz -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -Request profiling at 2kHz per CPU, and reset the profiling buffer: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C - sudo readprofile \-M 20 -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBreadprofile\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/resizepart.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/resizepart.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 6d272cd9..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/resizepart.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,71 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: resizepart -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "RESIZEPART" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -resizepart \- tell the kernel about the new size of a partition -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBresizepart\fP \fIdevice partition length\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBresizepart\fP tells the Linux kernel about the new size of the specified partition. The command is a simple wrapper around the "resize partition" ioctl. -.sp -This command doesn\(cqt manipulate partitions on a block device. -.SH "PARAMETERS" -.sp -\fIdevice\fP -.RS 4 -The disk device. -.RE -.sp -\fIpartition\fP -.RS 4 -The partition number. -.RE -.sp -\fIlength\fP -.RS 4 -The new length of the partition (in 512\-byte sectors). -.RE -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBaddpart\fP(8), -\fBdelpart\fP(8), -\fBfdisk\fP(8), -\fBparted\fP(8), -\fBpartprobe\fP(8), -\fBpartx\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBresizepart\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/rfkill.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/rfkill.8 deleted file mode 100644 index eeeb2994..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/rfkill.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,148 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: rfkill -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "RFKILL" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -rfkill \- tool for enabling and disabling wireless devices -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBrfkill\fP [options] [\fIcommand\fP] [\fIID\fP|\fItype\fP ...] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBrfkill\fP lists, enabling and disabling wireless devices. -.sp -The command "list" output format is deprecated and maintained for backward compatibility only. The new output format is the default when no command is specified or when the option \fB\-\-output\fP is used. -.sp -The default output is subject to change. So whenever possible, you should avoid using default outputs in your scripts. Always explicitly define expected columns by using the \fB\-\-output\fP option together with a columns list in environments where a stable output is required. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-J\fP, \fB\-\-json\fP -.RS 4 -Use JSON output format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-noheadings\fP -.RS 4 -Do not print a header line. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-output\fP -.RS 4 -Specify which output columns to print. Use \fB\-\-help\fP to get a list of available columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-output\-all\fP -.RS 4 -Output all available columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-raw\fP -.RS 4 -Use the raw output format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.SH "COMMANDS" -.sp -\fBhelp\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fBevent\fP -.RS 4 -Listen for rfkill events and display them on stdout. -.RE -.sp -\fBlist\fP [\fIid\fP|\fItype\fP ...] -.RS 4 -List the current state of all available devices. The command output format is deprecated, see the section DESCRIPTION. It is a good idea to check with \fBlist\fP command \fIid\fP or \fItype\fP scope is appropriate before setting \fBblock\fP or \fBunblock\fP. Special \fIall\fP type string will match everything. Use of multiple \fIID\fP or \fItype\fP arguments is supported. -.RE -.sp -\fBblock id\fP|\fBtype\fP [...] -.RS 4 -Disable the corresponding device. -.RE -.sp -\fBunblock id\fP|\fBtype\fP [...] -.RS 4 -Enable the corresponding device. If the device is hard\-blocked, for example via a hardware switch, it will remain unavailable though it is now soft\-unblocked. -.RE -.sp -\fBtoggle id\fP|\fBtype\fP [...] -.RS 4 -Enable or disable the corresponding device. -.RE -.SH "EXAMPLE" -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C - rfkill \-\-output ID,TYPE - rfkill block all - rfkill unblock wlan - rfkill block bluetooth uwb wimax wwan gps fm nfc -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -\fBrfkill\fP was originally written by \c -.MTO "johannes\(atsipsolutions.net" "Johannes Berg" "" -and -.MTO "marcel\(atholtmann.org" "Marcel Holtmann" "." -The code has been later modified by -.MTO "kerolasa\(atiki.fi" "Sami Kerola" "" -and -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -for the util\-linux project. -.sp -This manual page was written by \c -.MTO "linux\(atyoumustbejoking.demon.co.uk" "Darren Salt" "" -for the Debian project (and may be used by others). -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBpowertop\fP(8), -\fBsystemd\-rfkill\fP(8), -.URL "https://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/torvalds/linux.git/tree/Documentation/driver\-api/rfkill.rst" "Linux kernel documentation" "" -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBrfkill\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/rpcctl.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/rpcctl.8 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b87ba0df --- /dev/null +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/rpcctl.8 @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ +.\" +.\" rpcctl(8) +.\" +.TH rpcctl 8 "15 Feb 2022" +.SH NAME +rpcctl \- Displays SunRPC connection information +.SH SYNOPSIS +.nf +.BR rpcctl " [ \fB\-h \fR| \fB\-\-help \fR] { \fBclient \fR| \fBswitch \fR| \fBxprt \fR}" +.P +.BR "rpcctl client" " \fR[ \fB\-h \fR| \fB\-\-help \fR] { \fBshow \fR}" +.BR "rpcctl client show " "\fR[ \fB\-h \f| \fB\-\-help \fR] [ \fIXPRT \fR]" +.P +.BR "rpcctl switch" " \fR[ \fB\-h \fR| \fB\-\-help \fR] { \fBset \fR| \fBshow \fR}" +.BR "rpcctl switch set" " \fR[ \fB\-h \fR| \fB\-\-help \fR] \fISWITCH \fBdstaddr \fINEWADDR" +.BR "rpcctl switch show" " \fR[ \fB\-h \fR| \fB\-\-help \fR] [ \fISWITCH \fR]" +.P +.BR "rpcctl xprt" " \fR[ \fB\-h \fR| \fB\-\-help \fR] { \fBremove \fR| \fBset \fR| \fBshow \fR}" +.BR "rpcctl xprt remove" " \fR[ \fB\-h \fR| \fB\-\-help \fR] \fIXPRT" +.BR "rpcctl xprt set" " \fR[ \fB\-h \fR| \fB\-\-help \fR] \fIXPRT \fR{ \fBdstaddr \fINEWADDR \fR| \fBoffline \fR| \fBonline \fR}" +.BR "rpcctl xprt show" " \fR[ \fB\-h \fR| \fB\-\-help \fR] [ \fIXPRT \fR]" +.fi +.SH DESCRIPTION +.RB "The " rpcctl " command displays information collected in the SunRPC sysfs files about the system's SunRPC objects. +.P +.SS rpcctl client \fR- \fBCommands operating on RPC clients +.IP "\fBshow \fR[ \fICLIENT \fR] \fB(default)" +Show detailed information about the RPC clients on this system. +If \fICLIENT \fRwas provided, then only show information about a single RPC client. +.P +.SS rpcctl switch \fR- \fBCommands operating on groups of transports +.IP "\fBset \fISWITCH \fBdstaddr \fINEWADDR" +Change the destination address of all transports in the \fISWITCH \fRto \fINEWADDR\fR. +\fINEWADDR \fRcan be an IP address, DNS name, or anything else resolvable by \fBgethostbyname\fR(3). +.IP "\fBshow \fR[ \fISWITCH \fR] \fB(default)" +Show detailed information about groups of transports on this system. +If \fISWITCH \fRwas provided, then only show information about a single transport group. +.P +.SS rpcctl xprt \fR- \fBCommands operating on individual transports +.IP "\fBremove \fIXPRT" +Removes the specified \fIXPRT \fRfrom the system. +Note that "main" transports cannot be removed. +.P +.IP "\fBset \fIXPRT \fBdstaddr \fINEWADDR" +Change the destination address of the specified \fIXPRT \fR to \fINEWADDR\fR. +\fINEWADDR \fRcan be an IP address, DNS name, or anything else resolvable by \fBgethostbyname\fR(3). +.P +.IP "\fBset \fIXPRT \fBoffline" +Sets the specified \fIXPRT\fR's state to offline. +.P +.IP "\fBset \fIXPRT \fBonline" +Sets the specified \fIXPRT\fR's state to online. +.IP "\fBshow \fR[ \fIXPRT \fR] \fB(default)" +Show detailed information about this system's transports. +If \fIXPRT \fRwas provided, then only show information about a single transport. +.SH EXAMPLES +.IP "\fBrpcctl switch show switch-2" +Show details about the RPC switch named "switch-2". +.IP "\fBrpcctl xprt remove xprt-4" +Remove the xprt named "xprt-4" from the system. +.IP "\fBrpcctl xprt set xprt-3 dstaddr https://linux-nfs.org +Change the dstaddr of the xprt named "xprt-3" to point to linux-nfs.org +.SH DIRECTORY +.TP +.B /sys/kernel/sunrpc/ +.SH AUTHOR +Anna Schumaker <Anna.Schumaker@Netapp.com> diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/rtcwake.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/rtcwake.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 1f0e284e..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/rtcwake.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,256 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: rtcwake -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "RTCWAKE" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -rtcwake \- enter a system sleep state until specified wakeup time -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBrtcwake\fP [options] [\fB\-d\fP \fIdevice\fP] [\fB\-m\fP \fIstandby_mode\fP] {\fB\-s\fP \fIseconds\fP|\fB\-t\fP \fItime_t\fP} -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -This program is used to enter a system sleep state and to automatically wake from it at a specified time. -.sp -This uses cross\-platform Linux interfaces to enter a system sleep state, and leave it no later than a specified time. It uses any RTC framework driver that supports standard driver model wakeup flags. -.sp -This is normally used like the old \fBapmsleep\fP utility, to wake from a suspend state like ACPI S1 (standby) or S3 (suspend\-to\-RAM). Most platforms can implement those without analogues of BIOS, APM, or ACPI. -.sp -On some systems, this can also be used like \fBnvram\-wakeup\fP, waking from states like ACPI S4 (suspend to disk). Not all systems have persistent media that are appropriate for such suspend modes. -.sp -Note that alarm functionality depends on hardware; not every RTC is able to setup an alarm up to 24 hours in the future. -.sp -The suspend setup may be interrupted by active hardware; for example wireless USB input devices that continue to send events for some fraction of a second after the return key is pressed. \fBrtcwake\fP tries to avoid this problem and it waits to terminal to settle down before entering a system sleep. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-A\fP, \fB\-\-adjfile\fP \fIfile\fP -.RS 4 -Specify an alternative path to the adjust file. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-auto\fP -.RS 4 -Read the clock mode (whether the hardware clock is set to UTC or local time) from the \fIadjtime\fP file, where \fBhwclock\fP(8) stores that information. This is the default. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-date\fP \fItimestamp\fP -.RS 4 -Set the wakeup time to the value of the timestamp. Format of the timestamp can be any of the following: -.RE -.TS -allbox tab(:); -lt lt. -T{ -.sp -YYYYMMDDhhmmss -T}:T{ -.sp - -T} -T{ -.sp -YYYY\-MM\-DD hh:mm:ss -T}:T{ -.sp - -T} -T{ -.sp -YYYY\-MM\-DD hh:mm -T}:T{ -.sp -(seconds will be set to 00) -T} -T{ -.sp -YYYY\-MM\-DD -T}:T{ -.sp -(time will be set to 00:00:00) -T} -T{ -.sp -hh:mm:ss -T}:T{ -.sp -(date will be set to today) -T} -T{ -.sp -hh:mm -T}:T{ -.sp -(date will be set to today, seconds to 00) -T} -T{ -.sp -tomorrow -T}:T{ -.sp -(time is set to 00:00:00) -T} -T{ -.sp -+5min -T}:T{ -.sp - -T} -.TE -.sp -.sp -\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-device\fP \fIdevice\fP -.RS 4 -Use the specified \fIdevice\fP instead of \fBrtc0\fP as realtime clock. This option is only relevant if your system has more than one RTC. You may specify \fBrtc1\fP, \fBrtc2\fP, ... here. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-local\fP -.RS 4 -Assume that the hardware clock is set to local time, regardless of the contents of the \fIadjtime\fP file. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-list\-modes\fP -.RS 4 -List available \fB\-\-mode\fP option arguments. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-m\fP, \fB\-\-mode\fP \fImode\fP -.RS 4 -Go into the given standby state. Valid values for \fImode\fP are: -.sp -\fBstandby\fP -.RS 4 -ACPI state S1. This state offers minimal, though real, power savings, while providing a very low\-latency transition back to a working system. This is the default mode. -.RE -.sp -\fBfreeze\fP -.RS 4 -The processes are frozen, all the devices are suspended and all the processors idled. This state is a general state that does not need any platform\-specific support, but it saves less power than Suspend\-to\-RAM, because the system is still in a running state. (Available since Linux 3.9.) -.RE -.sp -\fBmem\fP -.RS 4 -ACPI state S3 (Suspend\-to\-RAM). This state offers significant power savings as everything in the system is put into a low\-power state, except for memory, which is placed in self\-refresh mode to retain its contents. -.RE -.sp -\fBdisk\fP -.RS 4 -ACPI state S4 (Suspend\-to\-disk). This state offers the greatest power savings, and can be used even in the absence of low\-level platform support for power management. This state operates similarly to Suspend\-to\-RAM, but includes a final step of writing memory contents to disk. -.RE -.sp -\fBoff\fP -.RS 4 -ACPI state S5 (Poweroff). This is done by calling \(aq/sbin/shutdown\(aq. Not officially supported by ACPI, but it usually works. -.RE -.sp -\fBno\fP -.RS 4 -Don\(cqt suspend, only set the RTC wakeup time. -.RE -.sp -\fBon\fP -.RS 4 -Don\(cqt suspend, but read the RTC device until an alarm time appears. This mode is useful for debugging. -.RE -.sp -\fBdisable\fP -.RS 4 -Disable a previously set alarm. -.RE -.sp -\fBshow\fP -.RS 4 -Print alarm information in format: "alarm: off|on <time>". The time is in ctime() output format, e.g., "alarm: on Tue Nov 16 04:48:45 2010". -.RE -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-dry\-run\fP -.RS 4 -This option does everything apart from actually setting up the alarm, suspending the system, or waiting for the alarm. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-seconds\fP \fIseconds\fP -.RS 4 -Set the wakeup time to \fIseconds\fP in the future from now. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-time\fP \fItime_t\fP -.RS 4 -Set the wakeup time to the absolute time \fItime_t\fP. \fItime_t\fP is the time in seconds since 1970\-01\-01, 00:00 UTC. Use the \fBdate\fP(1) tool to convert between human\-readable time and \fItime_t\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-u\fP, \fB\-\-utc\fP -.RS 4 -Assume that the hardware clock is set to UTC (Universal Time Coordinated), regardless of the contents of the \fIadjtime\fP file. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Be verbose. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -Some PC systems can\(cqt currently exit sleep states such as \fBmem\fP using only the kernel code accessed by this driver. They need help from userspace code to make the framebuffer work again. -.SH "FILES" -.sp -\fI/etc/adjtime\fP -.SH "HISTORY" -.sp -The program was posted several times on LKML and other lists before appearing in kernel commit message for Linux 2.6 in the GIT commit 87ac84f42a7a580d0dd72ae31d6a5eb4bfe04c6d. -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -The program was written by \c -.MTO "dbrownell\(atusers.sourceforge.net" "David Brownell" "" -and improved by -.MTO "bwalle\(atsuse.de" "Bernhard Walle" "." -.SH "COPYRIGHT" -.sp -This is free software. You may redistribute copies of it under the terms of the \c -.URL "http://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl.html" "GNU General Public License" "." -There is NO WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBhwclock\fP(8), -\fBdate\fP(1) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBrtcwake\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/samba-bgqd.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/samba-bgqd.8 index d749bba8..1aa8284e 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/samba-bgqd.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/samba-bgqd.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: samba-bgqd .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "SAMBA\-BGQD" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "SAMBA\-BGQD" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/samba-dcerpcd.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/samba-dcerpcd.8 index 1a58a106..133e3b89 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/samba-dcerpcd.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/samba-dcerpcd.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: samba-dcerpcd .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "SAMBA\-DCERPCD" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "SAMBA\-DCERPCD" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/setarch.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/setarch.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 49f0586e..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/setarch.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,155 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: setarch -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "SETARCH" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -setarch \- change reported architecture in new program environment and/or set personality flags -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBsetarch\fP [\fIarch\fP] [options] [\fIprogram\fP [\fIargument\fP...]] -.sp -\fBsetarch\fP \fB\-\-list\fP|\fB\-h\fP|\fB\-V\fP -.sp -\fBarch\fP [options] [\fIprogram\fP [\fIargument\fP...]] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBsetarch\fP modifies execution domains and process personality flags. -.sp -The execution domains currently only affects the output of \fBuname \-m\fP. For example, on an AMD64 system, running \fBsetarch i386\fP \fIprogram\fP will cause \fIprogram\fP to see i686 instead of \fIx86_64\fP as the machine type. It can also be used to set various personality options. The default \fIprogram\fP is \fB/bin/sh\fP. -.sp -Since version 2.33 the \fIarch\fP command line argument is optional and \fBsetarch\fP may be used to change personality flags (ADDR_LIMIT_*, SHORT_INODE, etc) without modification of the execution domain. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-\-list\fP -.RS 4 -List the architectures that \fBsetarch\fP knows about. Whether \fBsetarch\fP can actually set each of these architectures depends on the running kernel. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-uname\-2.6\fP -.RS 4 -Causes the \fIprogram\fP to see a kernel version number beginning with 2.6. Turns on \fBUNAME26\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Be verbose. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-3\fP, \fB\-\-3gb\fP -.RS 4 -Specifies \fIprogram\fP should use a maximum of 3GB of address space. Supported on x86. Turns on \fBADDR_LIMIT_3GB\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-4gb\fP -.RS 4 -This option has no effect. It is retained for backward compatibility only, and may be removed in future releases. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-B\fP, \fB\-\-32bit\fP -.RS 4 -Limit the address space to 32 bits to emulate hardware. Supported on ARM and Alpha. Turns on \fBADDR_LIMIT_32BIT\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-F\fP, \fB\-\-fdpic\-funcptrs\fP -.RS 4 -Treat user\-space function pointers to signal handlers as pointers to address descriptors. This option has no effect on architectures that do not support \fBFDPIC\fP ELF binaries. In kernel v4.14 support is limited to ARM, Blackfin, Fujitsu FR\-V, and SuperH CPU architectures. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-I\fP, \fB\-\-short\-inode\fP -.RS 4 -Obsolete bug emulation flag. Turns on \fBSHORT_INODE\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-L\fP, \fB\-\-addr\-compat\-layout\fP -.RS 4 -Provide legacy virtual address space layout. Use when the \fIprogram\fP binary does not have \fBPT_GNU_STACK\fP ELF header. Turns on \fBADDR_COMPAT_LAYOUT\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-R\fP, \fB\-\-addr\-no\-randomize\fP -.RS 4 -Disables randomization of the virtual address space. Turns on \fBADDR_NO_RANDOMIZE\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-S\fP, \fB\-\-whole\-seconds\fP -.RS 4 -Obsolete bug emulation flag. Turns on \fBWHOLE_SECONDS\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-T\fP, \fB\-\-sticky\-timeouts\fP -.RS 4 -This makes \fBselect\fP(2), \fBpselect\fP(2), and \fBppoll\fP(2) system calls preserve the timeout value instead of modifying it to reflect the amount of time not slept when interrupted by a signal handler. Use when \fIprogram\fP depends on this behavior. For more details see the timeout description in \fBselect\fP(2) manual page. Turns on \fBSTICKY_TIMEOUTS\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-X\fP, \fB\-\-read\-implies\-exec\fP -.RS 4 -If this is set then \fBmmap\fP(3p) \fBPROT_READ\fP will also add the \fBPROT_EXEC\fP bit \- as expected by legacy x86 binaries. Notice that the ELF loader will automatically set this bit when it encounters a legacy binary. Turns on \fBREAD_IMPLIES_EXEC\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-Z\fP, \fB\-\-mmap\-page\-zero\fP -.RS 4 -SVr4 bug emulation that will set \fBmmap\fP(3p) page zero as read\-only. Use when \fIprogram\fP depends on this behavior, and the source code is not available to be fixed. Turns on \fBMMAP_PAGE_ZERO\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "EXAMPLE" -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -setarch \-\-addr\-no\-randomize mytestprog -setarch ppc32 rpmbuild \-\-target=ppc \-\-rebuild foo.src.rpm -setarch ppc32 \-v \-vL3 rpmbuild \-\-target=ppc \-\-rebuild bar.src.rpm -setarch ppc32 \-\-32bit rpmbuild \-\-target=ppc \-\-rebuild foo.src.rpm -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "sopwith\(atredhat.com" "Elliot Lee" "," -.MTO "jnovy\(atredhat.com" "Jindrich Novy" "," -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBpersonality\fP(2), -\fBselect\fP(2) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBsetarch\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/sfdisk.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/sfdisk.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 964589b9..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/sfdisk.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,602 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: sfdisk -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "SFDISK" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -sfdisk \- display or manipulate a disk partition table -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBsfdisk\fP [options] \fIdevice\fP [\fB\-N\fP \fIpartition\-number\fP] -.sp -\fBsfdisk\fP [options] \fIcommand\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBsfdisk\fP is a script\-oriented tool for partitioning any block device. It runs in interactive mode if executed on a terminal (stdin refers to a terminal). -.sp -Since version 2.26 \fBsfdisk\fP supports MBR (DOS), GPT, SUN and SGI disk labels, but no longer provides any functionality for CHS (Cylinder\-Head\-Sector) addressing. CHS has never been important for Linux, and this addressing concept does not make any sense for new devices. -.sp -\fBsfdisk\fP protects the first disk sector when create a new disk label. The option \fB\-\-wipe always\fP disables this protection. Note that \fBfdisk\fP(8) and \fBcfdisk\fP(8) completely erase this area by default. -.sp -\fBsfdisk\fP (since version 2.26) \fBaligns the start and end of partitions\fP to block\-device I/O limits when relative sizes are specified, when the default values are used or when multiplicative suffixes (e.g., MiB) are used for sizes. It is possible that partition size will be optimized (reduced or enlarged) due to alignment if the start offset is specified exactly in sectors and partition size relative or by multiplicative suffixes. -.sp -The recommended way is not to specify start offsets at all and specify partition size in MiB, GiB (or so). In this case \fBsfdisk\fP aligns all partitions to block\-device I/O limits (or when I/O limits are too small then to megabyte boundary to keep disk layout portable). If this default behaviour is unwanted (usually for very small partitions) then specify offsets and sizes in sectors. In this case \fBsfdisk\fP entirely follows specified numbers without any optimization. -.sp -\fBsfdisk\fP does not create the standard system partitions for SGI and SUN disk labels like \fBfdisk\fP(8) does. It is necessary to explicitly create all partitions including whole\-disk system partitions. -.sp -\fBsfdisk\fP uses \fBBLKRRPART\fP (reread partition table) ioctl to make sure that the device is not used by system or other tools (see also \fB\-\-no\-reread\fP). It\(cqs possible that this feature or another \fBsfdisk\fP activity races with \fBudevd\fP. The recommended way how to avoid possible collisions is to use \fB\-\-lock\fP option. The exclusive lock will cause udevd to skip the event handling on the device. -.sp -The \fBsfdisk\fP prompt is only a hint for users and a displayed partition number does not mean that the same partition table entry will be created (if \fB\-N\fP not specified), especially for tables with gaps. -.SH "COMMANDS" -.sp -The commands are mutually exclusive. -.sp -[\fB\-N\fP \fIpartition\-number\fP] \fIdevice\fP -.RS 4 -The default \fBsfdisk\fP command is to read the specification for the desired partitioning of \fIdevice\fP from standard input, and then create a partition table according to the specification. See below for the description of the input format. If standard input is a terminal, then \fBsfdisk\fP starts an interactive session. -.sp -If the option \fB\-N\fP is specified, then the changes are applied to the partition addressed by \fIpartition\-number\fP. The unspecified fields of the partition are not modified. -.sp -Note that it\(cqs possible to address an unused partition with \fB\-N\fP. For example, an MBR always contains 4 partitions, but the number of used partitions may be smaller. In this case \fBsfdisk\fP follows the default values from the partition table and does not use built\-in defaults for the unused partition given with \fB\-N\fP. See also \fB\-\-append\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-A\fP, \fB\-\-activate\fP \fIdevice\fP [\fIpartition\-number\fP...] -.RS 4 -Switch on the bootable flag for the specified partitions and switch off the bootable flag on all unspecified partitions. The special placeholder \(aq\-\(aq may be used instead of the partition numbers to switch off the bootable flag on all partitions. -.sp -The activation command is supported for MBR and PMBR only. If a GPT label is detected, then \fBsfdisk\fP prints warning and automatically enters PMBR. -.sp -If no \fIpartition\-number\fP is specified, then list the partitions with an enabled flag. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-delete\fP \fIdevice\fP [\fIpartition\-number\fP...] -.RS 4 -Delete all or the specified partitions. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-dump\fP \fIdevice\fP -.RS 4 -Dump the partitions of a device in a format that is usable as input to \fBsfdisk\fP. See the section \fBBACKING UP THE PARTITION TABLE\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-g\fP, \fB\-\-show\-geometry\fP [\fIdevice\fP...] -.RS 4 -List the geometry of all or the specified devices. For backward compatibility the deprecated option \fB\-\-show\-pt\-geometry\fP have the same meaning as this one. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-J\fP, \fB\-\-json\fP \fIdevice\fP -.RS 4 -Dump the partitions of a device in JSON format. Note that \fBsfdisk\fP is not able to use JSON as input format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-list\fP [\fIdevice\fP...] -.RS 4 -List the partitions of all or the specified devices. This command can be used together with \fB\-\-verify\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-F\fP, \fB\-\-list\-free\fP [\fIdevice\fP...] -.RS 4 -List the free unpartitioned areas on all or the specified devices. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-part\-attrs\fP \fIdevice partition\-number\fP [\fIattributes\fP] -.RS 4 -Change the GPT partition attribute bits. If \fIattributes\fP is not specified, then print the current partition settings. The \fIattributes\fP argument is a comma\- or space\-delimited list of bits numbers or bit names. For example, the string "RequiredPartition,50,51" sets three bits. The currently supported attribute bits are: -.sp -\fBBit 0 (RequiredPartition)\fP -.RS 4 -If this bit is set, the partition is required for the platform to function. The creator of the partition indicates that deletion or modification of the contents can result in loss of platform features or failure for the platform to boot or operate. The system cannot function normally if this partition is removed, and it should be considered part of the hardware of the system. -.RE -.sp -\fBBit 1 (NoBlockIOProtocol)\fP -.RS 4 -EFI firmware should ignore the content of the partition and not try to read from it. -.RE -.sp -\fBBit 2 (LegacyBIOSBootable)\fP -.RS 4 -The partition may be bootable by legacy BIOS firmware. -.RE -.sp -\fBBits 3\-47\fP -.RS 4 -Undefined and must be zero. Reserved for expansion by future versions of the UEFI specification. -.RE -.sp -\fBBits 48\-63\fP -.RS 4 -Reserved for GUID specific use. The use of these bits will vary depending on the partition type. For example Microsoft uses bit 60 to indicate read\-only, 61 for shadow copy of another partition, 62 for hidden partitions and 63 to disable automount. -.RE -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-part\-label\fP \fIdevice partition\-number\fP [\fIlabel\fP] -.RS 4 -Change the GPT partition name (label). If \fIlabel\fP is not specified, then print the current partition label. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-part\-type\fP \fIdevice partition\-number\fP [\fItype\fP] -.RS 4 -Change the partition type. If \fItype\fP is not specified, then print the current partition type. -.sp -The \fItype\fP argument is hexadecimal for MBR, GUID for GPT, type alias (e.g. "linux") or type shortcut (e.g. \(aqL\(aq). For backward compatibility the options \fB\-c\fP and \fB\-\-id\fP have the same meaning as this one. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-part\-uuid\fP \fIdevice partition\-number\fP [\fIuuid\fP] -.RS 4 -Change the GPT partition UUID. If \fIuuid\fP is not specified, then print the current partition UUID. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-disk\-id\fP \fIdevice\fP [\fIid\fP] -.RS 4 -Change the disk identifier. If \fIid\fP is not specified, then print the current identifier. The identifier is UUID for GPT or unsigned integer for MBR. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-reorder\fP \fIdevice\fP -.RS 4 -Renumber the partitions, ordering them by their start offset. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-show\-size\fP [\fIdevice\fP...] -.RS 4 -List the sizes of all or the specified devices in units of 1024 byte size. This command is DEPRECATED in favour of \fBblockdev\fP(8). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-T\fP, \fB\-\-list\-types\fP -.RS 4 -Print all supported types for the current disk label or the label specified by \fB\-\-label\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-verify\fP [\fIdevice\fP...] -.RS 4 -Test whether the partition table and partitions seem correct. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-relocate\fP \fIoper\fP \fIdevice\fP -.RS 4 -Relocate partition table header. This command is currently supported for GPT header only. The argument \fIoper\fP can be: -.sp -\fBgpt\-bak\-std\fP -.RS 4 -Move GPT backup header to the standard location at the end of the device. -.RE -.sp -\fBgpt\-bak\-mini\fP -.RS 4 -Move GPT backup header behind the last partition. Note that UEFI standard requires the backup header at the end of the device and partitioning tools can automatically relocate the header to follow the standard. -.RE -.RE -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-append\fP -.RS 4 -Don\(cqt create a new partition table, but only append the specified partitions. -.sp -Note that unused partition maybe be re\-used in this case although it is not the last partition in the partition table. See also \fB\-N\fP to specify entry in the partition table. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-b\fP, \fB\-\-backup\fP -.RS 4 -Back up the current partition table sectors before starting the partitioning. The default backup file name is \fI~/sfdisk\-<device>\-<offset>.bak\fP; to use another name see option \fB\-O\fP, \fB\-\-backup\-file\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-color\fP[\fB=\fP\fIwhen\fP] -.RS 4 -Colorize the output. The optional argument \fIwhen\fP can be \fBauto\fP, \fBnever\fP or \fBalways\fP. If the \fIwhen\fP argument is omitted, it defaults to \fBauto\fP. The colors can be disabled; for the current built\-in default see the \fB\-\-help\fP output. See also the \fBCOLORS\fP section. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-force\fP -.RS 4 -Disable all consistency checking. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-Linux\fP -.RS 4 -Deprecated and ignored option. Partitioning that is compatible with Linux (and other modern operating systems) is the default. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-lock\fP[=\fImode\fP] -.RS 4 -Use exclusive BSD lock for device or file it operates. The optional argument \fImode\fP can be \fByes\fP, \fBno\fP (or 1 and 0) or \fBnonblock\fP. If the \fImode\fP argument is omitted, it defaults to \fB"yes"\fP. This option overwrites environment variable \fB$LOCK_BLOCK_DEVICE\fP. The default is not to use any lock at all, but it\(cqs recommended to avoid collisions with udevd or other tools. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-no\-act\fP -.RS 4 -Do everything except writing to the device. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-no\-reread\fP -.RS 4 -Do not check through the re\-read\-partition\-table ioctl whether the device is in use. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-no\-tell\-kernel\fP -.RS 4 -Don\(cqt tell the kernel about partition changes. This option is recommended together with \fB\-\-no\-reread\fP to modify a partition on used disk. The modified partition should not be used (e.g., mounted). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-O\fP, \fB\-\-backup\-file\fP \fIpath\fP -.RS 4 -Override the default backup file name. Note that the device name and offset are always appended to the file name. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-move\-data\fP[\fB=\fP\fIpath\fP] -.RS 4 -Move data after partition relocation, for example when moving the beginning of a partition to another place on the disk. The size of the partition has to remain the same, the new and old location may overlap. This option requires option \fB\-N\fP in order to be processed on one specific partition only. -.sp -The optional \fIpath\fP specifies log file name. The log file contains information about all read/write operations on the partition data. The word "@default" as a \fIpath\fP forces sfdisk to use \fI~/sfdisk\-<devname>.move\fP for the log. The log is optional since v2.35. -.sp -Note that this operation is risky and not atomic. \fBDon\(cqt forget to backup your data!\fP -.sp -See also \fB\-\-move\-use\-fsync\fP. -.sp -In the example below, the first command creates a 100MiB free area before the first partition and moves the data it contains (e.g., a filesystem), the next command creates a new partition from the free space (at offset 2048), and the last command reorders partitions to match disk order (the original sdc1 will become sdc2). -.sp -\fBecho \(aq+100M,\(aq | sfdisk \-\-move\-data /dev/sdc \-N 1\fP \fBecho \(aq2048,\(aq | sfdisk /dev/sdc \-\-append\fP \fBsfdisk /dev/sdc \-\-reorder\fP -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-move\-use\-fsync\fP -.RS 4 -Use the \fBfsync\fP(2) system call after each write when moving data to a new location by \fB\-\-move\-data\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-output\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Specify which output columns to print. Use \fB\-\-help\fP to get a list of all supported columns. -.sp -The default list of columns may be extended if \fIlist\fP is specified in the format \fI+list\fP (e.g., \fB\-o +UUID\fP). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-q\fP, \fB\-\-quiet\fP -.RS 4 -Suppress extra info messages. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-u\fP, \fB\-\-unit S\fP -.RS 4 -Deprecated option. Only the sector unit is supported. This option is not supported when using the \fB\-\-show\-size\fP command. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-X\fP, \fB\-\-label\fP \fItype\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the disk label type (e.g., \fBdos\fP, \fBgpt\fP, ...). If this option is not given, then \fBsfdisk\fP defaults to the existing label, but if there is no label on the device yet, then the type defaults to \fBdos\fP. The default or the current label may be overwritten by the "label: <name>" script header line. The option \fB\-\-label\fP does not force \fBsfdisk\fP to create empty disk label (see the \fBEMPTY DISK LABEL\fP section below). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-Y\fP, \fB\-\-label\-nested\fP \fItype\fP -.RS 4 -Force editing of a nested disk label. The primary disk label has to exist already. This option allows editing for example a hybrid/protective MBR on devices with GPT. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-w\fP, \fB\-\-wipe\fP \fIwhen\fP -.RS 4 -Wipe filesystem, RAID and partition\-table signatures from the device, in order to avoid possible collisions. The argument \fIwhen\fP can be \fBauto\fP, \fBnever\fP or \fBalways\fP. When this option is not given, the default is \fBauto\fP, in which case signatures are wiped only when in interactive mode; except the old partition\-table signatures which are always wiped before create a new partition\-table if the argument \fIwhen\fP is not \fBnever\fP. The \fBauto\fP mode also does not wipe the first sector (boot sector), it is necessary to use the \fBalways\fP mode to wipe this area. In all cases detected signatures are reported by warning messages before a new partition table is created. See also the \fBwipefs\fP(8) command. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-W\fP, \fB\-\-wipe\-partitions\fP \fIwhen\fP -.RS 4 -Wipe filesystem, RAID and partition\-table signatures from a newly created partitions, in order to avoid possible collisions. The argument \fIwhen\fP can be \fBauto\fP, \fBnever\fP or \fBalways\fP. When this option is not given, the default is \fBauto\fP, in which case signatures are wiped only when in interactive mode and after confirmation by user. In all cases detected signatures are reported by warning messages after a new partition is created. See also \fBwipefs\fP(8) command. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "INPUT FORMATS" -.sp -\fBsfdisk\fP supports two input formats and generic header lines. -.SS "Header lines" -.sp -The optional header lines specify generic information that apply to the partition table. The header\-line format is: -.sp -\fB<name>: <value>\fP -.sp -The currently recognized headers are: -.sp -\fBunit\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the partitioning unit. The only supported unit is \fBsectors\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBlabel\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the partition table type. For example \fBdos\fP or \fBgpt\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBlabel\-id\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the partition table identifier. It should be a hexadecimal number (with a 0x prefix) for MBR and a UUID for GPT. -.RE -.sp -\fBfirst\-lba\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the first usable sector for GPT partitions. -.RE -.sp -\fBlast\-lba\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the last usable sector for GPT partitions. -.RE -.sp -\fBtable\-length\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the maximal number of GPT partitions. -.RE -.sp -\fBgrain\fP -.RS 4 -Specify minimal size in bytes used to calculate partitions alignment. The default is 1MiB and it\(cqs strongly recommended to use the default. Do not modify this variable if you\(cqre not sure. -.RE -.sp -\fBsector\-size\fP -.RS 4 -Specify sector size. This header is informative only and it is not used when sfdisk creates a new partition table, in this case the real device specific value is always used and sector size from the dump is ignored. -.RE -.sp -Note that it is only possible to use header lines before the first partition is specified in the input. -.SS "Unnamed\-fields format" -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fIstart size type bootable\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -where each line fills one partition descriptor. -.sp -Fields are separated by whitespace, comma or semicolon possibly followed by whitespace; initial and trailing whitespace is ignored. Numbers can be octal, decimal or hexadecimal; decimal is the default. When a field is absent, empty or specified as \(aq\-\(aq a default value is used. But when the \fB\-N\fP option (change a single partition) is given, the default for each field is its previous value. -.sp -The default value of \fIstart\fP is the first non\-assigned sector aligned according to device I/O limits. The default start offset for the first partition is 1 MiB. The offset may be followed by the multiplicative suffixes (KiB, MiB, GiB, TiB, PiB, EiB, ZiB and YiB) then the number is interpreted as offset in bytes. -.sp -The default value of \fIsize\fP indicates "as much as possible"; i.e., until the next partition or end\-of\-device. A numerical argument is by default interpreted as a number of sectors, however if the size is followed by one of the multiplicative suffixes (KiB, MiB, GiB, TiB, PiB, EiB, ZiB and YiB) then the number is interpreted as the size of the partition in bytes and it is then aligned according to the device I/O limits. A \(aq+\(aq can be used instead of a number to enlarge the partition as much as possible. Note \(aq+\(aq is equivalent to the default behaviour for a new partition; existing partitions will be resized as required. -.sp -The partition \fItype\fP is given in hex for MBR (DOS) where 0x prefix is optional; a GUID string for GPT; a shortcut or an alias. It\(cqs recommended to use two letters for MBR hex codes to avoid collision between deprecated shortcut \(aqE\(aq and \(aq0E\(aq MBR hex code. For backward compatibility \fBsfdisk\fP tries to interpret \fItype\fP as a shortcut as a first possibility in partitioning scripts although on other places (e.g. \fB\-\-part\-type\fP command) it tries shortcuts as the last possibility. -.sp -Since v2.36 libfdisk supports partition type aliases as extension to shortcuts. The alias is a simple human readable word (e.g. "linux"). -.sp -Since v2.37 libfdisk supports partition type names on input, ignoring the case of the characters and all non\-alphanumeric and non\-digit characters in the name (e.g. "Linux /usr x86" is the same as "linux usr\-x86"). -.sp -Supported shortcuts and aliases: -.sp -\fBL \- alias \(aqlinux\(aq\fP -.RS 4 -Linux; means 83 for MBR and 0FC63DAF\-8483\-4772\-8E79\-3D69D8477DE4 for GPT. -.RE -.sp -\fBS \- alias \(aqswap\(aq\fP -.RS 4 -swap area; means 82 for MBR and 0657FD6D\-A4AB\-43C4\-84E5\-0933C84B4F4F for GPT -.RE -.sp -\fBEx \- alias \(aqextended\(aq\fP -.RS 4 -MBR extended partition; means 05 for MBR. The original shortcut \(aqE\(aq is deprecated due to collision with 0x0E MBR partition type. -.RE -.sp -\fBH \- alias \(aqhome\(aq\fP -.RS 4 -home partition; means 933AC7E1\-2EB4\-4F13\-B844\-0E14E2AEF915 for GPT -.RE -.sp -\fBU \- alias \(aquefi\(aq\fP -.RS 4 -EFI System partition, means EF for MBR and C12A7328\-F81F\-11D2\-BA4B\-00A0C93EC93B for GPT -.RE -.sp -\fBR \- alias \(aqraid\(aq\fP -.RS 4 -Linux RAID; means FD for MBR and A19D880F\-05FC\-4D3B\-A006\-743F0F84911E for GPT -.RE -.sp -\fBV \- alias \(aqlvm\(aq\fP -.RS 4 -LVM; means 8E for MBR and E6D6D379\-F507\-44C2\-A23C\-238F2A3DF928 for GPT -.RE -.sp -The default \fItype\fP value is \fIlinux\fP. -.sp -The shortcut \(aqX\(aq for Linux extended partition (85) is deprecated in favour of \(aqEx\(aq. -.sp -\fIbootable\fP is specified as [\fB*\fP|\fB\-\fP], with as default not\-bootable. The value of this field is irrelevant for Linux \- when Linux runs it has been booted already \- but it might play a role for certain boot loaders and for other operating systems. -.SS "Named\-fields format" -.sp -This format is more readable, robust, extensible and allows specifying additional information (e.g., a UUID). It is recommended to use this format to keep your scripts more readable. -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -[\fIdevice\fP \fB:\fP] \fIname\fP[\fB=\fP\fIvalue\fP], ... -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -The \fIdevice\fP field is optional. \fBsfdisk\fP extracts the partition number from the device name. It allows specifying the partitions in random order. This functionality is mostly used by \fB\-\-dump\fP. Don\(cqt use it if you are not sure. -.sp -The \fIvalue\fP can be between quotation marks (e.g., name="This is partition name"). The currently supported fields are: -.sp -\fBstart=\fP\fInumber\fP -.RS 4 -The first non\-assigned sector aligned according to device I/O limits. The default start offset for the first partition is 1 MiB. The offset may be followed by the multiplicative suffixes (KiB, MiB, GiB, TiB, PiB, EiB, ZiB and YiB) then the number is interpreted as offset in bytes. -.RE -.sp -\fBsize=\fP\fInumber\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the partition size in sectors. The number may be followed by the multiplicative suffixes (KiB, MiB, GiB, TiB, PiB, EiB, ZiB and YiB), then it\(cqs interpreted as size in bytes and the size is aligned according to device I/O limits. -.RE -.sp -\fBbootable\fP -.RS 4 -Mark the partition as bootable. -.RE -.sp -\fBattrs=\fP\fIstring\fP -.RS 4 -Partition attributes, usually GPT partition attribute bits. See \fB\-\-part\-attrs\fP for more details about the GPT\-bits string format. -.RE -.sp -\fBuuid=\fP\fIstring\fP -.RS 4 -GPT partition UUID. -.RE -.sp -\fBname=\fP\fIstring\fP -.RS 4 -GPT partition name. -.RE -.sp -\fBtype=\fP\fIcode\fP -.RS 4 -A hexadecimal number (without 0x) for an MBR partition, a GUID for a GPT partition, a shortcut as for unnamed\-fields format or a type name (e.g. type="Linux /usr (x86)"). See above the section about the unnamed\-fields format for more details. For backward compatibility the \fBId=\fP field has the same meaning. -.RE -.SH "EMPTY DISK LABEL" -.sp -\fBsfdisk\fP does not create partition table without partitions by default. The lines with partitions are expected in the script by default. The empty partition table has to be explicitly requested by "label: <name>" script header line without any partitions lines. For example: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBecho \(aqlabel: gpt\(aq | sfdisk /dev/sdb\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -creates empty GPT partition table. Note that the \fB\-\-append\fP disables this feature. -.SH "BACKING UP THE PARTITION TABLE" -.sp -It is recommended to save the layout of your devices. \fBsfdisk\fP supports two ways. -.sp -Use the \fB\-\-dump\fP option to save a description of the device layout to a text file. The dump format is suitable for later \fBsfdisk\fP input. For example: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBsfdisk \-\-dump /dev/sda > sda.dump\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -This can later be restored by: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBsfdisk /dev/sda < sda.dump\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -If you want to do a full (binary) backup of all sectors where the partition table is stored, then use the \fB\-\-backup\fP option. It writes the sectors to \fI~/sfdisk\-<device>\-<offset>.bak\fP files. The default name of the backup file can be changed with the \fB\-\-backup\-file\fP option. The backup files contain only raw data from the \fIdevice\fP. Note that the same concept of backup files is used by \fBwipefs\fP(8). For example: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBsfdisk \-\-backup /dev/sda\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -The GPT header can later be restored by: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -dd if=~/sfdisk\-sda\-0x00000200.bak of=/dev/sda \(rs -seek=$0x00000200 bs=1 conv=notrunc -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -Note that \fBsfdisk\fP since version 2.26 no longer provides the \fB\-I\fP option to restore sectors. \fBdd\fP(1) provides all necessary functionality. -.SH "COLORS" -.sp -Implicit coloring can be disabled by an empty file \fI/etc/terminal\-colors.d/sfdisk.disable\fP. -.sp -See \fBterminal\-colors.d\fP(5) for more details about colorization configuration. The logical color names supported by \fBsfdisk\fP are: -.sp -\fBheader\fP -.RS 4 -The header of the output tables. -.RE -.sp -\fBwarn\fP -.RS 4 -The warning messages. -.RE -.sp -\fBwelcome\fP -.RS 4 -The welcome message. -.RE -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -SFDISK_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables \fBsfdisk\fP debug output. -.RE -.sp -LIBFDISK_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables libfdisk debug output. -.RE -.sp -LIBBLKID_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables libblkid debug output. -.RE -.sp -LIBSMARTCOLS_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables libsmartcols debug output. -.RE -.sp -LOCK_BLOCK_DEVICE=<mode> -.RS 4 -use exclusive BSD lock. The mode is "1" or "0". See \fB\-\-lock\fP for more details. -.RE -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -Since version 2.26 \fBsfdisk\fP no longer provides the \fB\-R\fP or \fB\-\-re\-read\fP option to force the kernel to reread the partition table. Use \fBblockdev \-\-rereadpt\fP instead. -.sp -Since version 2.26 \fBsfdisk\fP does not provide the \fB\-\-DOS\fP, \fB\-\-IBM\fP, \fB\-\-DOS\-extended\fP, \fB\-\-unhide\fP, \fB\-\-show\-extended\fP, \fB\-\-cylinders\fP, \fB\-\-heads\fP, \fB\-\-sectors\fP, \fB\-\-inside\-outer\fP, \fB\-\-not\-inside\-outer\fP options. -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.sp -The current \fBsfdisk\fP implementation is based on the original \fBsfdisk\fP from Andries E. Brouwer. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBfdisk\fP(8), -\fBcfdisk\fP(8), -\fBparted\fP(8), -\fBpartprobe\fP(8), -\fBpartx\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBsfdisk\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/showmount.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/showmount.8 index a2f510fb..35818e1b 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/showmount.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/showmount.8 @@ -56,5 +56,10 @@ Because .B showmount sorts and uniqs the output, it is impossible to determine from the output whether a client is mounting the same directory more than once. +.P +.B showmount +works by contacting the server's MNT service directly. NFSv4-only servers have +no need to advertise their exported root filehandles via this method, and may +not expose their MNT service to clients. .SH AUTHOR Rick Sladkey <jrs@world.std.com> diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/sm-notify.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/sm-notify.8 index bb7f6e0a..addf5d3c 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/sm-notify.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/sm-notify.8 @@ -190,7 +190,15 @@ by default. After starting, .B sm-notify attempts to set its effective UID and GID to the owner -and group of this directory. +and group of the subdirectory +.B sm +of this directory. After changing the effective ids, +.B sm-notify +only needs to access files in +.B sm +and +.B sm.bak +within the state-directory-path. .TP .BI -v " ipaddr " | " hostname Specifies the network address from which to send reboot notifications, @@ -241,6 +249,24 @@ These have the same effect as the command line options .B v respectively. +An additional value recognized in the +.B [sm-notify] +section is +.BR lift-grace . +By default, +.B sm-notify +will lift lockd's grace period early if it has no hosts to notify. +Some high availability configurations will run one +.B sm-notify +per floating IP address. In these configurations, lifting the +grace period early may prevent clients from reclaiming locks. +.RB "Setting " lift-grace " to " n +will prevent +.B sm-notify +from ending the grace period early. +.B lift-grace +has no corresponding command line option. + The value recognized in the .B [statd] section is diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/smbd.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/smbd.8 index 651afd45..73ac6fc9 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/smbd.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/smbd.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: smbd .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "SMBD" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "SMBD" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -260,7 +260,7 @@ parameter\&. When this is set, the following restrictions apply: .RE .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "DIAGNOSTICS" .PP Most diagnostics issued by the server are logged in a specified log file\&. The log file name is specified at compile time, but may be overridden on the command line\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/statd.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/statd.8 index 023f9965..7441ffde 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/statd.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/statd.8 @@ -185,18 +185,16 @@ restarts without the option. .TP .BI "\-n, " "" "\-\-name " ipaddr " | " hostname -Specifies the bind address used for RPC listener sockets. +This string is only used by the +.B sm-notify +command as the source address from which to send reboot notification requests. +.IP The .I ipaddr form can be expressed as either an IPv4 or an IPv6 presentation address. If this option is not specified, .B rpc.statd uses a wildcard address as the transport bind address. -.IP -This string is also passed to the -.B sm-notify -command to be used as the source address from which -to send reboot notification requests. See .BR sm-notify (8) for details. @@ -259,7 +257,15 @@ by default. After starting, .B rpc.statd attempts to set its effective UID and GID to the owner -and group of this directory. +and group of the subdirectory +.B sm +of this directory. After changing the effective ids, +.B rpc.statd +only needs to access files in +.B sm +and +.B sm.bak +within the state-directory-path. .TP .BR -v ", " -V ", " --version Causes diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/sulogin.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/sulogin.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 50ca068d..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/sulogin.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,89 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: sulogin -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "SULOGIN" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -sulogin \- single\-user login -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBsulogin\fP [options] [\fItty\fP] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBsulogin\fP is invoked by \fBinit\fP when the system goes into single\-user mode. -.sp -The user is prompted: -.sp -Give root password for system maintenance (or type Control\-D for normal startup): -.sp -If the root account is locked and \fB\-\-force\fP is specified, no password is required. -.sp -\fBsulogin\fP will be connected to the current terminal, or to the optional \fItty\fP device that can be specified on the command line (typically \fI/dev/console\fP). -.sp -When the user exits from the single\-user shell, or presses control\-D at the prompt, the system will continue to boot. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-e\fP, \fB\-\-force\fP -.RS 4 -If the default method of obtaining the root password from the system via \fBgetpwnam\fP(3) fails, then examine \fI/etc/passwd\fP and \fI/etc/shadow\fP to get the password. If these files are damaged or nonexistent, or when root account is locked by \(aq!\(aq or \(aq*\(aq at the begin of the password then \fBsulogin\fP will \fBstart a root shell without asking for a password\fP. -.sp -Only use the \fB\-e\fP option if you are sure the console is physically protected against unauthorized access. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-login\-shell\fP -.RS 4 -Specifying this option causes \fBsulogin\fP to start the shell process as a login shell. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-timeout\fP \fIseconds\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the maximum amount of time to wait for user input. By default, \fBsulogin\fP will wait forever. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -\fBsulogin\fP looks for the environment variable \fBSUSHELL\fP or \fBsushell\fP to determine what shell to start. If the environment variable is not set, it will try to execute root\(cqs shell from \fI/etc/passwd\fP. If that fails, it will fall back to \fI/bin/sh\fP. -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -\fBsulogin\fP was written by Miquel van Smoorenburg for sysvinit and later ported to util\-linux by Dave Reisner and Karel Zak. -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBsulogin\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/svcgssd.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/svcgssd.8 index 15ef4c94..8771c035 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/svcgssd.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/svcgssd.8 @@ -61,6 +61,19 @@ this is equivalent to the option. If set to any other value, that is used like the .B -p option. +.TP +.B verbosity +Value which is equivalent to the number of +.BR -v . +.TP +.B rpc-verbosity +Value which is equivalent to the number of +.BR -r . +.TP +.B idmap-verbosity +Value which is equivalent to the number of +.BR -i . + .SH SEE ALSO .BR rpc.gssd(8), diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/swaplabel.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/swaplabel.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 15255f39..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/swaplabel.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,82 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: swaplabel -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "SWAPLABEL" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -swaplabel \- print or change the label or UUID of a swap area -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBswaplabel\fP [\fB\-L\fP \fIlabel\fP] [\fB\-U\fP \fIUUID\fP] \fIdevice\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBswaplabel\fP will display or change the label or UUID of a swap partition located on \fIdevice\fP (or regular file). -.sp -If the optional arguments \fB\-L\fP and \fB\-U\fP are not given, \fBswaplabel\fP will simply display the current swap\-area label and UUID of \fIdevice\fP. -.sp -If an optional argument is present, then \fBswaplabel\fP will change the appropriate value on \fIdevice\fP. These values can also be set during swap creation using \fBmkswap\fP(8). The \fBswaplabel\fP utility allows changing the label or UUID on an actively used swap device. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-L\fP, \fB\-\-label\fP \fIlabel\fP -.RS 4 -Specify a new \fIlabel\fP for the device. Swap partition labels can be at most 16 characters long. If \fIlabel\fP is longer than 16 characters, \fBswaplabel\fP will truncate it and print a warning message. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-U\fP, \fB\-\-uuid\fP \fIUUID\fP -.RS 4 -Specify a new \fIUUID\fP for the device. The \fIUUID\fP must be in the standard 8\-4\-4\-4\-12 character format, such as is output by \fBuuidgen\fP(1). -.RE -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -LIBBLKID_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables libblkid debug output. -.RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -\fBswaplabel\fP was written by \c -.MTO "jborden\(atbluehost.com" "Jason Borden" "" -and -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "." -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBuuidgen\fP(1), -\fBmkswap\fP(8), -\fBswapon\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBswaplabel\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/swapon.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/swapon.8 deleted file mode 100644 index d39fe5c0..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/swapon.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,252 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: swapon -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "SWAPON" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -swapon, swapoff \- enable/disable devices and files for paging and swapping -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBswapon\fP [options] [\fIspecialfile\fP...] -.sp -\fBswapoff\fP [\fB\-va\fP] [\fIspecialfile\fP...] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBswapon\fP is used to specify devices on which paging and swapping are to take place. -.sp -The device or file used is given by the \fIspecialfile\fP parameter. It may be of the form \fB\-L\fP \fIlabel\fP or \fB\-U\fP \fIuuid\fP to indicate a device by label or uuid. -.sp -Calls to \fBswapon\fP normally occur in the system boot scripts making all swap devices available, so that the paging and swapping activity is interleaved across several devices and files. -.sp -\fBswapoff\fP disables swapping on the specified devices and files. When the \fB\-a\fP flag is given, swapping is disabled on all known swap devices and files (as found in \fI/proc/swaps\fP or \fI/etc/fstab\fP). -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-all\fP -.RS 4 -All devices marked as "swap" in \fI/etc/fstab\fP are made available, except for those with the "noauto" option. Devices that are already being used as swap are silently skipped. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-discard\fP[\fB=\fP\fIpolicy\fP] -.RS 4 -Enable swap discards, if the swap backing device supports the discard or trim operation. This may improve performance on some Solid State Devices, but often it does not. The option allows one to select between two available swap discard policies: -.sp -\fB\-\-discard=once\fP -.RS 4 -to perform a single\-time discard operation for the whole swap area at swapon; or -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-discard=pages\fP -.RS 4 -to asynchronously discard freed swap pages before they are available for reuse. -.RE -.sp -If no policy is selected, the default behavior is to enable both discard types. The \fI/etc/fstab\fP mount options \fBdiscard\fP, \fBdiscard=once\fP, or \fBdiscard=pages\fP may also be used to enable discard flags. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-e\fP, \fB\-\-ifexists\fP -.RS 4 -Silently skip devices that do not exist. The \fI/etc/fstab\fP mount option \fBnofail\fP may also be used to skip non\-existing device. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-fixpgsz\fP -.RS 4 -Reinitialize (exec mkswap) the swap space if its page size does not match that of the current running kernel. \fBmkswap\fP(8) initializes the whole device and does not check for bad blocks. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-L\fP \fIlabel\fP -.RS 4 -Use the partition that has the specified \fIlabel\fP. (For this, access to \fI/proc/partitions\fP is needed.) -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-options\fP \fIopts\fP -.RS 4 -Specify swap options by an fstab\-compatible comma\-separated string. For example: -.sp -\fBswapon \-o pri=1,discard=pages,nofail /dev/sda2\fP -.sp -The \fIopts\fP string is evaluated last and overrides all other command line options. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-priority\fP \fIpriority\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the priority of the swap device. \fIpriority\fP is a value between \-1 and 32767. Higher numbers indicate higher priority. See \fBswapon\fP(2) for a full description of swap priorities. Add \fBpri=\fP\fIvalue\fP to the option field of \fI/etc/fstab\fP for use with \fBswapon \-a\fP. When no priority is defined, it defaults to \-1. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-summary\fP -.RS 4 -Display swap usage summary by device. Equivalent to \fBcat /proc/swaps\fP. This output format is DEPRECATED in favour of \fB\-\-show\fP that provides better control on output data. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-show\fP[\fB=\fP\fIcolumn\fP...] -.RS 4 -Display a definable table of swap areas. See the \fB\-\-help\fP output for a list of available columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-output\-all\fP -.RS 4 -Output all available columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-noheadings\fP -.RS 4 -Do not print headings when displaying \fB\-\-show\fP output. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-raw\fP -.RS 4 -Display \fB\-\-show\fP output without aligning table columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-bytes\fP -.RS 4 -Display swap size in bytes in \fB\-\-show\fP output instead of in user\-friendly units. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-U\fP \fIuuid\fP -.RS 4 -Use the partition that has the specified \fIuuid\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Be verbose. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -\fBswapoff\fP has the following exit status values since v2.36: -.sp -\fB0\fP -.RS 4 -success -.RE -.sp -\fB2\fP -.RS 4 -system has insufficient memory to stop swapping (OOM) -.RE -.sp -\fB4\fP -.RS 4 -swapoff syscall failed for another reason -.RE -.sp -\fB8\fP -.RS 4 -non\-swapoff syscall system error (out of memory, ...) -.RE -.sp -\fB16\fP -.RS 4 -usage or syntax error -.RE -.sp -\fB32\fP -.RS 4 -all swapoff failed on \fB\-\-all\fP -.RE -.sp -\fB64\fP -.RS 4 -some swapoff succeeded on \fB\-\-all\fP -.RE -.sp -The command \fBswapoff \-\-all\fP returns 0 (all succeeded), 32 (all failed), or 64 (some failed, some succeeded). -.sp -+ -The old versions before v2.36 has no documented exit status, 0 means success in all versions. -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -LIBMOUNT_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables \fBlibmount\fP debug output. -.RE -.sp -LIBBLKID_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables \fBlibblkid\fP debug output. -.RE -.SH "FILES" -.sp -\fI/dev/sd??\fP -.RS 4 -standard paging devices -.RE -.sp -\fI/etc/fstab\fP -.RS 4 -ascii filesystem description table -.RE -.SH "NOTES" -.SS "Files with holes" -.sp -The swap file implementation in the kernel expects to be able to write to the file directly, without the assistance of the filesystem. This is a problem on files with holes or on copy\-on\-write files on filesystems like Btrfs. -.sp -Commands like \fBcp\fP(1) or \fBtruncate\fP(1) create files with holes. These files will be rejected by \fBswapon\fP. -.sp -Preallocated files created by \fBfallocate\fP(1) may be interpreted as files with holes too depending of the filesystem. Preallocated swap files are supported on XFS since Linux 4.18. -.sp -The most portable solution to create a swap file is to use \fBdd\fP(1) and \fI/dev/zero\fP. -.SS "Btrfs" -.sp -Swap files on Btrfs are supported since Linux 5.0 on files with nocow attribute. See the \fBbtrfs\fP(5) manual page for more details. -.SS "NFS" -.sp -Swap over \fBNFS\fP may not work. -.SS "Suspend" -.sp -\fBswapon\fP automatically detects and rewrites a swap space signature with old software suspend data (e.g., S1SUSPEND, S2SUSPEND, ...). The problem is that if we don\(cqt do it, then we get data corruption the next time an attempt at unsuspending is made. -.SH "HISTORY" -.sp -The \fBswapon\fP command appeared in 4.0BSD. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBswapoff\fP(2), -\fBswapon\fP(2), -\fBfstab\fP(5), -\fBinit\fP(8), -\fBfallocate\fP(1), -\fBmkswap\fP(8), -\fBmount\fP(8), -\fBrc\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBswapon\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/switch_root.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/switch_root.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 0611125e..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/switch_root.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,85 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: switch_root -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "SWITCH_ROOT" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -switch_root \- switch to another filesystem as the root of the mount tree -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBswitch_root\fP [\fB\-hV\fP] -.sp -\fBswitch_root\fP \fInewroot init\fP [\fIarg\fP...] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBswitch_root\fP moves already mounted \fI/proc\fP, \fI/dev\fP, \fI/sys\fP and \fI/run\fP to \fInewroot\fP and makes \fInewroot\fP the new root filesystem and starts \fIinit\fP process. -.sp -\fBWARNING: switch_root removes recursively all files and directories on the current root filesystem.\fP -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-h, \-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V, \-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -\fBswitch_root\fP returns 0 on success and 1 on failure. -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -\fBswitch_root\fP will fail to function if \fInewroot\fP is not the root of a mount. If you want to switch root into a directory that does not meet this requirement then you can first use a bind\-mounting trick to turn any directory into a mount point: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -mount \-\-bind $DIR $DIR -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "pjones\(atredhat.com" "Peter Jones" "," -.MTO "katzj\(atredhat.com" "Jeremy Katz" "," -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBchroot\fP(2), -\fBinit\fP(8), -\fBmkinitrd\fP(8), -\fBmount\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBswitch_root\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/systemd-coredump.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/systemd-coredump.8 index bc90dc39..64484c0e 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/systemd-coredump.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/systemd-coredump.8 @@ -226,6 +226,13 @@ When the crashed process was in container, those are the units names .PP \fICOREDUMP_CGROUP=\fR .RS 4 +The primary cgroup of the unit of the crashed process\&. +.sp +When the crashed process was in a container, this is the full path, as seen outside of the container\&. +.RE +.PP +\fICOREDUMP_PROC_CGROUP=\fR +.RS 4 Control group information in the format used in /proc/self/cgroup\&. On systems with the unified cgroup hierarchy, this is a single path prefixed with "0::", and multiple paths prefixed with controller numbers on legacy systems\&. @@ -233,9 +240,9 @@ Control group information in the format used in When the crashed process was in a container, this is the full path, as seen outside of the container\&. .RE .PP -\fICOREDUMP_OWNER_UID=\fR, \fICOREDUMP_USER_UNIT=\fR +\fICOREDUMP_OWNER_UID=\fR, \fICOREDUMP_USER_UNIT=\fR, \fICOREDUMP_SESSION=\fR .RS 4 -The numerical UID of the user owning the login session or systemd user unit of the crashed process, and the user manager unit\&. Both fields are only present for user processes\&. +The numerical UID of the user owning the login session or systemd user unit of the crashed process, the user manager unit, and the sesion identifier\&. All three fields are only present for user processes\&. .sp When the crashed process was in container, those are the values \fIoutside\fR, in the main system\&. @@ -294,25 +301,28 @@ symlink\&. When the crashed process is in a container, that path is relative to the root of the container\*(Aqs mount namespace\&. .RE .PP -\fICOREDUMP_COMM=\fR, \fICOREDUMP_PROC_STATUS=\fR, \fICOREDUMP_PROC_MAPS=\fR, \fICOREDUMP_PROC_LIMITS=\fR, \fICOREDUMP_PROC_MOUNTINFO=\fR, \fICOREDUMP_ENVIRON=\fR +\fICOREDUMP_CMDLINE=\fR, \fICOREDUMP_COMM=\fR, \fICOREDUMP_ENVIRON=\fR, \fICOREDUMP_PROC_AUXV=\fR, \fICOREDUMP_PROC_LIMITS=\fR, \fICOREDUMP_PROC_MAPS=\fR, \fICOREDUMP_PROC_MOUNTINFO=\fR, \fICOREDUMP_PROC_STATUS=\fR .RS 4 Fields that map the per\-process entries in the /proc/ filesystem: +/proc/\fIpid\fR/cmdline +(the command line of the crashed process), /proc/\fIpid\fR/comm (the command name associated with the process), -/proc/\fIpid\fR/exe -(the filename of the executed command), -/proc/\fIpid\fR/status -(various metadata about the process), -/proc/\fIpid\fR/maps -(memory regions visible to the process and their access permissions), +/proc/\fIpid\fR/environ +(the environment block of the crashed process), +/proc/\fIpid\fR/auxv +(the auxiliary vector of the crashed process, see +\fBgetauxval\fR(3)), /proc/\fIpid\fR/limits (the soft and hard resource limits), +/proc/\fIpid\fR/maps +(memory regions visible to the process and their access permissions), /proc/\fIpid\fR/mountinfo (mount points in the process\*(Aqs mount namespace), -/proc/\fIpid\fR/environ -(the environment block of the crashed process)\&. +/proc/\fIpid\fR/status +(various metadata about the process)\&. .sp See \fBproc\fR(5) diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/systemd-sysctl.service.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/systemd-sysctl.service.8 index 108c38c3..a4e353d9 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/systemd-sysctl.service.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/systemd-sysctl.service.8 @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ Print a short version string and exit\&. supports the service credentials logic as implemented by \fIImportCredential=\fR/\fILoadCredential=\fR/\fISetCredential=\fR (see -\fBsystemd.exec\fR(1) +\fBsystemd.exec\fR(5) for details)\&. The following credentials are used when passed in: .PP \fIsysctl\&.extra\fR diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/systemd-tmpfiles.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/systemd-tmpfiles.8 index ffbc7615..84bc8086 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/systemd-tmpfiles.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/systemd-tmpfiles.8 @@ -255,7 +255,7 @@ systemd\-tmpfiles \-\-remove \-\-create supports the service credentials logic as implemented by \fIImportCredential=\fR/\fILoadCredential=\fR/\fISetCredential=\fR (see -\fBsystemd.exec\fR(1) +\fBsystemd.exec\fR(5) for details)\&. The following credentials are used when passed in: .PP \fItmpfiles\&.extra\fR diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/tunelp.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/tunelp.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 0fba0ed8..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/tunelp.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,111 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: tunelp -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-01-06 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "TUNELP" "8" "2022-01-06" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -tunelp \- set various parameters for the lp device -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBtunelp\fP [options] \fIdevice\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBtunelp\fP sets several parameters for the /dev/lp\fI?\fP devices, for better performance (or for any performance at all, if your printer won\(cqt work without it...) Without parameters, it tells whether the device is using interrupts, and if so, which one. With parameters, it sets the device characteristics accordingly. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-i\fP, \fB\-\-irq\fP \fIargument\fP -.RS 4 -specifies the IRQ to use for the parallel port in question. If this is set to something non\-zero, \fB\-t\fP and \fB\-c\fP have no effect. If your port does not use interrupts, this option will make printing stop. The command \fBtunelp \-i 0\fP restores non\-interrupt driven (polling) action, and your printer should work again. If your parallel port does support interrupts, interrupt\-driven printing should be somewhat faster and efficient, and will probably be desirable. -.sp -\fBNOTE\fP: This option will have no effect with kernel 2.1.131 or later since the irq is handled by the parport driver. You can change the parport irq for example via \fI/proc/parport/*/irq\fP. Read \fI/usr/src/linux/Documentation/admin\-guide/parport.rst\fP for more details on parport. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-time\fP \fImilliseconds\fP -.RS 4 -is the amount of time in jiffies that the driver waits if the printer doesn\(cqt take a character for the number of tries dictated by the \fB\-c\fP parameter. 10 is the default value. If you want fastest possible printing, and don\(cqt care about system load, you may set this to 0. If you don\(cqt care how fast your printer goes, or are printing text on a slow printer with a buffer, then 500 (5 seconds) should be fine, and will give you very low system load. This value generally should be lower for printing graphics than text, by a factor of approximately 10, for best performance. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-chars\fP \fIcharacters\fP -.RS 4 -is the number of times to try to output a character to the printer before sleeping for \fB\-t\fP \fITIME\fP. It is the number of times around a loop that tries to send a character to the printer. 120 appears to be a good value for most printers in polling mode. 1000 is the default, because there are some printers that become jerky otherwise, but you \fImust\fP set this to \(aq1\(aq to handle the maximal CPU efficiency if you are using interrupts. If you have a very fast printer, a value of 10 might make more sense even if in polling mode. If you have a \fIreally\fP old printer, you can increase this further. -.sp -Setting \fB\-t\fP \fITIME\fP to 0 is equivalent to setting \fB\-c\fP \fICHARS\fP to infinity. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-w\fP, \fB\-\-wait\fP \fImilliseconds\fP -.RS 4 -is the number of usec we wait while playing with the strobe signal. While most printers appear to be able to deal with an extremely short strobe, some printers demand a longer one. Increasing this from the default 1 may make it possible to print with those printers. This may also make it possible to use longer cables. It\(cqs also possible to decrease this value to 0 if your printer is fast enough or your machine is slow enough. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-abort\fP \fI<on|off>\fP -.RS 4 -This is whether to abort on printer error \- the default is not to. If you are sitting at your computer, you probably want to be able to see an error and fix it, and have the printer go on printing. On the other hand, if you aren\(cqt, you might rather that your printer spooler find out that the printer isn\(cqt ready, quit trying, and send you mail about it. The choice is yours. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-check\-status\fP \fI<on|off>\fP -.RS 4 -This option is much like \fB\-a\fP. It makes any \fBopen\fP(2) of this device check to see that the device is on\-line and not reporting any out of paper or other errors. This is the correct setting for most versions of \fBlpd\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-C\fP, \fB\-\-careful\fP \fI<on|off>\fP -.RS 4 -This option adds extra ("careful") error checking. When this option is on, the printer driver will ensure that the printer is on\-line and not reporting any out of paper or other errors before sending data. This is particularly useful for printers that normally appear to accept data when turned off. -.sp -\fBNOTE\fP: This option is obsolete because it\(cqs the default in 2.1.131 kernel or later. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-status\fP -.RS 4 -This option returns the current printer status, both as a decimal number from 0..255, and as a list of active flags. When this option is specified, \fB\-q\fP off, turning off the display of the current IRQ, is implied. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-reset\fP -.RS 4 -This option resets the port. It requires a Linux kernel version of 1.1.80 or later. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-q\fP, \fB\-\-print\-irq\fP \fI<on|off>\fP -.RS 4 -This option sets printing the display of the current IRQ setting. -.RE -.SH "FILES" -.sp -\fI/dev/lp?\fP, -\fI/proc/parport/*/*\fP -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-C\fP, and \fB\-s\fP all require a Linux kernel version of 1.1.76 or later. -.sp -\fB\-C\fP requires a Linux version prior to 2.1.131. -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBtunelp\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/umount.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/umount.8 deleted file mode 100644 index bce55254..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/umount.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,232 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: umount -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "UMOUNT" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -umount \- unmount filesystems -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBumount\fP \fB\-a\fP [\fB\-dflnrv\fP] [\fB\-t\fP \fIfstype\fP] [\fB\-O\fP \fIoption\fP...] -.sp -\fBumount\fP [\fB\-dflnrv\fP] {\fIdirectory\fP|\fIdevice\fP} -.sp -\fBumount\fP \fB\-h\fP|\fB\-V\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -The \fBumount\fP command detaches the mentioned filesystem(s) from the file hierarchy. A filesystem is specified by giving the directory where it has been mounted. Giving the special device on which the filesystem lives may also work, but is obsolete, mainly because it will fail in case this device was mounted on more than one directory. -.sp -Note that a filesystem cannot be unmounted when it is \(aqbusy\(aq \- for example, when there are open files on it, or when some process has its working directory there, or when a swap file on it is in use. The offending process could even be \fBumount\fP itself \- it opens libc, and libc in its turn may open for example locale files. A lazy unmount avoids this problem, but it may introduce other issues. See \fB\-\-lazy\fP description below. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-all\fP -.RS 4 -All of the filesystems described in \fI/proc/self/mountinfo\fP (or in deprecated \fI/etc/mtab\fP) are unmounted, except the proc, devfs, devpts, sysfs, rpc_pipefs and nfsd filesystems. This list of the filesystems may be replaced by \fB\-\-types\fP umount option. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-A\fP, \fB\-\-all\-targets\fP -.RS 4 -Unmount all mountpoints in the current mount namespace for the specified filesystem. The filesystem can be specified by one of the mountpoints or the device name (or UUID, etc.). When this option is used together with \fB\-\-recursive\fP, then all nested mounts within the filesystem are recursively unmounted. This option is only supported on systems where \fI/etc/mtab\fP is a symlink to \fI/proc/mounts\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-no\-canonicalize\fP -.RS 4 -Do not canonicalize paths. The paths canonicalization is based on \fBstat\fP(2) and \fBreadlink\fP(2) system calls. These system calls may hang in some cases (for example on NFS if server is not available). The option has to be used with canonical path to the mount point. -.sp -This option is silently ignored by \fBumount\fP for non\-root users. -.sp -For more details about this option see the \fBmount\fP(8) man page. Note that \fBumount\fP does not pass this option to the \fB/sbin/umount.\fP\fItype\fP helpers. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-detach\-loop\fP -.RS 4 -When the unmounted device was a loop device, also free this loop device. This option is unnecessary for devices initialized by \fBmount\fP(8), in this case "autoclear" functionality is enabled by default. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-fake\fP -.RS 4 -Causes everything to be done except for the actual system call or umount helper execution; this \(aqfakes\(aq unmounting the filesystem. It can be used to remove entries from the deprecated \fI/etc/mtab\fP that were unmounted earlier with the \fB\-n\fP option. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-force\fP -.RS 4 -Force an unmount (in case of an unreachable NFS system). -.sp -Note that this option does not guarantee that umount command does not hang. It\(cqs strongly recommended to use absolute paths without symlinks to avoid unwanted readlink and stat system calls on unreachable NFS in \fBumount\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-i\fP, \fB\-\-internal\-only\fP -.RS 4 -Do not call the \fB/sbin/umount.\fP\fIfilesystem\fP helper even if it exists. By default such a helper program is called if it exists. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-lazy\fP -.RS 4 -Lazy unmount. Detach the filesystem from the file hierarchy now, and clean up all references to this filesystem as soon as it is not busy anymore. -.sp -A system reboot would be expected in near future if you\(cqre going to use this option for network filesystem or local filesystem with submounts. The recommended use\-case for \fBumount \-l\fP is to prevent hangs on shutdown due to an unreachable network share where a normal umount will hang due to a downed server or a network partition. Remounts of the share will not be possible. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-N\fP, \fB\-\-namespace\fP \fIns\fP -.RS 4 -Perform umount in the mount namespace specified by \fIns\fP. \fIns\fP is either PID of process running in that namespace or special file representing that namespace. -.sp -\fBumount\fP switches to the namespace when it reads \fI/etc/fstab\fP, writes \fI/etc/mtab\fP (or writes to \fI/run/mount\fP) and calls \fBumount\fP(2) system call, otherwise it runs in the original namespace. It means that the target mount namespace does not have to contain any libraries or other requirements necessary to execute \fBumount\fP(2) command. -.sp -See \fBmount_namespaces\fP(7) for more information. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-no\-mtab\fP -.RS 4 -Unmount without writing in \fI/etc/mtab\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-O\fP, \fB\-\-test\-opts\fP \fIoption\fP... -.RS 4 -Unmount only the filesystems that have the specified option set in \fI/etc/fstab\fP. More than one option may be specified in a comma\-separated list. Each option can be prefixed with \fBno\fP to indicate that no action should be taken for this option. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-q\fP, \fB\-\-quiet\fP -.RS 4 -Suppress "not mounted" error messages. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-R\fP, \fB\-\-recursive\fP -.RS 4 -Recursively unmount each specified directory. Recursion for each directory will stop if any unmount operation in the chain fails for any reason. The relationship between mountpoints is determined by \fI/proc/self/mountinfo\fP entries. The filesystem must be specified by mountpoint path; a recursive unmount by device name (or UUID) is unsupported. Since version 2.37 it umounts also all over\-mounted filesystems (more filesystems on the same mountpoint). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-read\-only\fP -.RS 4 -When an unmount fails, try to remount the filesystem read\-only. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-types\fP \fItype\fP... -.RS 4 -Indicate that the actions should only be taken on filesystems of the specified \fItype\fP. More than one type may be specified in a comma\-separated list. The list of filesystem types can be prefixed with \fBno\fP to indicate that no action should be taken for all of the mentioned types. Note that \fBumount\fP reads information about mounted filesystems from kernel (\fI/proc/mounts\fP) and filesystem names may be different than filesystem names used in the \fI/etc/fstab\fP (e.g., "nfs4" vs. "nfs"). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Verbose mode. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "NON\-SUPERUSER UMOUNTS" -.sp -Normally, only the superuser can umount filesystems. However, when \fIfstab\fP contains the \fBuser\fP option on a line, anybody can umount the corresponding filesystem. For more details see \fBmount\fP(8) man page. -.sp -Since version 2.34 the \fBumount\fP command can be used to perform umount operation also for fuse filesystems if kernel mount table contains user\(cqs ID. In this case fstab \fBuser=\fP mount option is not required. -.sp -Since version 2.35 \fBumount\fP command does not exit when user permissions are inadequate by internal libmount security rules. It drops suid permissions and continue as regular non\-root user. This can be used to support use\-cases where root permissions are not necessary (e.g., fuse filesystems, user namespaces, etc). -.SH "LOOP DEVICE" -.sp -The \fBumount\fP command will automatically detach loop device previously initialized by \fBmount\fP(8) command independently of \fI/etc/mtab\fP. -.sp -In this case the device is initialized with "autoclear" flag (see \fBlosetup\fP(8) output for more details), otherwise it\(cqs necessary to use the option \fB\-\-detach\-loop\fP or call \fBlosetup \-d <device>\fP. The autoclear feature is supported since Linux 2.6.25. -.SH "EXTERNAL HELPERS" -.sp -The syntax of external unmount helpers is: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBumount.\fP\fIsuffix\fP {\fIdirectory\fP|\fIdevice\fP} [\fB\-flnrv\fP] [\fB\-N\fP \fInamespace\fP] [\fB\-t\fP \fItype\fP.\fIsubtype\fP] -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -where \fIsuffix\fP is the filesystem type (or the value from a \fBuhelper=\fP or \fBhelper=\fP marker in the mtab file). The \fB\-t\fP option can be used for filesystems that have subtype support. For example: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBumount.fuse \-t fuse.sshfs\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -A \fBuhelper=\fP\fIsomething\fP marker (unprivileged helper) can appear in the \fI/etc/mtab\fP file when ordinary users need to be able to unmount a mountpoint that is not defined in \fI/etc/fstab\fP (for example for a device that was mounted by \fBudisks\fP(1)). -.sp -A \fBhelper=\fP\fItype\fP marker in the mtab file will redirect all unmount requests to the \fB/sbin/umount.\fP\fItype\fP helper independently of UID. -.sp -Note that \fI/etc/mtab\fP is currently deprecated and \fBhelper=\fP and other userspace mount options are maintained by libmount. -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -LIBMOUNT_FSTAB=<path> -.RS 4 -overrides the default location of the fstab file (ignored for suid) -.RE -.sp -LIBMOUNT_MTAB=<path> -.RS 4 -overrides the default location of the mtab file (ignored for suid) -.RE -.sp -LIBMOUNT_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables \fBlibmount\fP debug output -.RE -.SH "FILES" -.sp -\fI/etc/mtab\fP -.RS 4 -table of mounted filesystems (deprecated and usually replaced by symlink to \fI/proc/mounts\fP) -.RE -.sp -\fI/etc/fstab\fP -.RS 4 -table of known filesystems -.RE -.sp -\fI/proc/self/mountinfo\fP -.RS 4 -table of mounted filesystems generated by kernel. -.RE -.SH "HISTORY" -.sp -A \fBumount\fP command appeared in Version 6 AT&T UNIX. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBumount\fP(2), -\fBlosetup\fP(8), -\fBmount_namespaces\fP(7), -\fBmount\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBumount\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/uuidd.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/uuidd.8 index 554f0416..0e209deb 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/uuidd.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/uuidd.8 @@ -1,13 +1,13 @@ '\" t .\" Title: uuidd .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 +.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.20 +.\" Date: 2023-11-21 .\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 +.\" Source: util-linux 2.39.3 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "UUIDD" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" +.TH "UUIDD" "8" "2023-11-21" "util\-linux 2.39.3" "System Administration" .ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq .el .ds Aq ' .ss \n[.ss] 0 @@ -37,9 +37,18 @@ uuidd \- UUID generation daemon The \fBuuidd\fP daemon is used by the UUID library to generate universally unique identifiers (UUIDs), especially time\-based UUIDs, in a secure and guaranteed\-unique fashion, even in the face of large numbers of threads running on different CPUs trying to grab UUIDs. .SH "OPTIONS" .sp +\fB\-C\fP, \fB\-\-cont\-clock\fP[=\fItime\fP] +.RS 4 +Activate continuous clock handling for time based UUIDs. \fBuuidd\fP could use all possible clock values, beginning with the daemon\(cqs start time. The optional argument can be used to set a value for the max_clock_offset. This gurantees, that a clock value of a UUID will always be within the range of the max_clock_offset. +.sp +The option \*(Aq\-C\*(Aq or \*(Aq\-\-cont\-clock\*(Aq enables the feature with a default max_clock_offset of 2 hours. +.sp +The option \*(Aq\-C<NUM>[hd]\*(Aq or \*(Aq\-\-cont\-clock=<NUM>[hd]\*(Aq enables the feature with a max_clock_offset of NUM seconds. In case of an appended h or d, the NUM value is read in hours or days. The minimum value is 60 seconds, the maximum value is 365 days. +.RE +.sp \fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-debug\fP .RS 4 -Run uuidd in debugging mode. This prevents uuidd from running as a daemon. +Run \fBuuidd\fP in debugging mode. This prevents \fBuuidd\fP from running as a daemon. .RE .sp \fB\-F\fP, \fB\-\-no\-fork\fP @@ -97,14 +106,14 @@ Make \fBuuidd\fP exit after \fInumber\fP seconds of inactivity. Test \fBuuidd\fP by trying to connect to a running uuidd daemon and request it to return a time\-based UUID. .RE .sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP +\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP .RS 4 -Output version information and exit. +Display help text and exit. .RE .sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP +\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP .RS 4 -Display help screen and exit. +Print version and exit. .RE .SH "EXAMPLE" .sp @@ -130,7 +139,7 @@ The \fBuuidd\fP daemon was written by \c .SH "REPORTING BUGS" .sp For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." +.URL "https://github.com/util\-linux/util\-linux/issues" "" "." .SH "AVAILABILITY" .sp The \fBuuidd\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_acl_tdb.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_acl_tdb.8 index 0f2f2044..bc3ca665 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_acl_tdb.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_acl_tdb.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_acl_tdb .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_ACL_TDB" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_ACL_TDB" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_acl_xattr.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_acl_xattr.8 index 721b7792..eb16a048 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_acl_xattr.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_acl_xattr.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_acl_xattr .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_ACL_XATTR" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_ACL_XATTR" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_aio_fork.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_aio_fork.8 index f06a1691..b7a5e72a 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_aio_fork.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_aio_fork.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_aio_fork .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_AIO_FORK" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_AIO_FORK" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ Straight forward use: .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_aio_pthread.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_aio_pthread.8 index f80dfd26..e138d5cf 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_aio_pthread.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_aio_pthread.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_aio_pthread .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_AIO_PTHREAD" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_AIO_PTHREAD" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ The default is \*(Aqno\*(Aq\&. .RE .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_audit.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_audit.8 index c025edf6..3acb0be0 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_audit.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_audit.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_audit .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_AUDIT" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_AUDIT" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Log operations on all shares using the LOCAL1 facility and NOTICE priority: .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_btrfs.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_btrfs.8 index 774bea1d..4d90b334 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_btrfs.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_btrfs.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_btrfs .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_BTRFS" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_BTRFS" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ to Windows Explorer as file / directory "previous versions"\&. .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_cacheprime.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_cacheprime.8 index a245df74..06403a6e 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_cacheprime.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_cacheprime.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_cacheprime .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_CACHEPRIME" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_CACHEPRIME" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ cacheprime is not a substitute for a general\-purpose readahead mechanism\&. It is intended for use only in very specific environments where disk operations must be aligned and sized to known values (as much as that is possible)\&. .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_cap.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_cap.8 index 46ae4f96..b2754ff7 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_cap.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_cap.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_cap .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_CAP" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_CAP" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ On a system using GNU libiconv, use CAP encoding to support users in the Shift_J .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_catia.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_catia.8 index c38d369f..9239379d 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_catia.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_catia.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_catia .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_CATIA" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_CATIA" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_commit.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_commit.8 index bd8fb4a0..d0e0553a 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_commit.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_commit.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_commit .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_COMMIT" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_COMMIT" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ commit may reduce performance\&. .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_crossrename.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_crossrename.8 index d547abae..1e65ffe7 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_crossrename.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_crossrename.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_crossrename .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_CROSSRENAME" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_CROSSRENAME" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ To add server\-side cross\-device renames inside of a share for all files sized .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_default_quota.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_default_quota.8 index fd84d109..ab832d2d 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_default_quota.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_default_quota.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_default_quota .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_DEFAULT_QUOTA" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_DEFAULT_QUOTA" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ Store the default quota record in the quota record for the user with ID 65535 an .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_dirsort.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_dirsort.8 index 96d9d41d..10806510 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_dirsort.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_dirsort.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_dirsort .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_DIRSORT" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_DIRSORT" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ Sort directories for all shares: .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_expand_msdfs.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_expand_msdfs.8 index df5577cc..01f4c8da 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_expand_msdfs.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_expand_msdfs.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_expand_msdfs .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_EXPAND_MSDFS" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_EXPAND_MSDFS" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ With this module, the link target is not directly a server and share, but this m With this, clients from network 192\&.168\&.234/24 are redirected to host local\&.samba\&.org, clients from 192\&.168/16 are redirected to remote\&.samba\&.org and all other clients go to default\&.samba\&.org\&. .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_extd_audit.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_extd_audit.8 index 0649823b..412c84d6 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_extd_audit.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_extd_audit.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_extd_audit .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_EXTD_AUDIT" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_EXTD_AUDIT" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ is identical to This module is stackable\&. .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_fake_perms.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_fake_perms.8 index c1fa4855..c99f2ae7 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_fake_perms.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_fake_perms.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_fake_perms .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_FAKE_PERMS" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_FAKE_PERMS" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ This module is stackable\&. .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_fileid.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_fileid.8 index ef6fcd94..4a7de509 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_fileid.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_fileid.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_fileid .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_FILEID" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_FILEID" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ module in order avoid load on heavily contended (most likely read\-only) inodes\ .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_fruit.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_fruit.8 index 1253f403..6f952818 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_fruit.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_fruit.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_fruit .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_FRUIT" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_FRUIT" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_full_audit.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_full_audit.8 index 5487c796..8d7e7da4 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_full_audit.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_full_audit.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_full_audit .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_FULL_AUDIT" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_FULL_AUDIT" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -501,7 +501,7 @@ Log file and directory open operations on the [records] share using the LOCAL7 f .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_glusterfs_fuse.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_glusterfs_fuse.8 index 53606b37..6dd88be9 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_glusterfs_fuse.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_glusterfs_fuse.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_glusterfs_fuse .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_GLUSTERFS_FUSE" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_GLUSTERFS_FUSE" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ module\&. This module does currently have no further options\&. .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_io_uring.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_io_uring.8 index 2ce002a9..d8361610 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_io_uring.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_io_uring.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_io_uring .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_IO_URING" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_IO_URING" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ The default is \*(Aqno\*(Aq\&. \fBio_uring_setup\fR(2)\&. .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_linux_xfs_sgid.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_linux_xfs_sgid.8 index 9801f814..a6909249 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_linux_xfs_sgid.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_linux_xfs_sgid.8 @@ -1,13 +1,13 @@ '\" t -.\" Title: vfs_syncops +.\" Title: vfs_linux_xfs_sgid .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_SYNCOPS" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_LINUX_XFS_SGID" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ if the parent directory had the SGID bit set\&. This module is stackable\&. .SH "EXAMPLES" .PP -Add syncops functionality for [share]: +Add linux_xfs_sgid functionality for [share]: .sp .if n \{\ .RS 4 @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ Add syncops functionality for [share]: .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_media_harmony.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_media_harmony.8 index 86141c4c..8ea6d189 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_media_harmony.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_media_harmony.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_media_harmony .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_MEDIA_HARMONY" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_MEDIA_HARMONY" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ vfs_media_harmony is designed to work with Avid editing applications that look in the Avid MediaFiles or OMFI MediaFiles directories for media\&. It is not designed to work as expected in all circumstances for general use\&. For example: It is possible to open a client\-specific file such as msmMMOB\&.mdb_192\&.168\&.1\&.10_userx even though it doesn\*(Aqt show up in a directory listing\&. .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_offline.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_offline.8 index c6300816..621667d7 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_offline.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_offline.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_offline .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_OFFLINE" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_OFFLINE" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ Mark all files in a share as offline: .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_preopen.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_preopen.8 index 3f9cc524..258d0a4c 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_preopen.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_preopen.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_preopen .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_PREOPEN" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_PREOPEN" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ in the \*(Aq\m[blue]\fBlog level\fR\m[]\*(Aq section for special handling of the .RE .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_readahead.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_readahead.8 index 8e618850..606f2e6f 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_readahead.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_readahead.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_readahead .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_READAHEAD" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_READAHEAD" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ G .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_readonly.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_readonly.8 index 727c516d..34476fa5 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_readonly.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_readonly.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_readonly .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_READONLY" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_READONLY" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ Mark the [backup] share as read only during business hours: .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_recycle.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_recycle.8 index bf49f483..76a11415 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_recycle.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_recycle.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_recycle .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_RECYCLE" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_RECYCLE" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ instead of deleting them: .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_shadow_copy.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_shadow_copy.8 index 4448513c..5e4583a1 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_shadow_copy.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_shadow_copy.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_shadow_copy .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_SHADOW_COPY" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_SHADOW_COPY" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ vfs_shadow_copy is designed to be an end\-user tool only\&. It does not replace or enhance your backup and archival solutions and should in no way be considered as such\&. Additionally, if you need version control, implement a version control system\&. .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_shadow_copy2.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_shadow_copy2.8 index 4b1adaa1..c6822cf9 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_shadow_copy2.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_shadow_copy2.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_shadow_copy2 .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_SHADOW_COPY2" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_SHADOW_COPY2" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -519,7 +519,7 @@ vfs_shadow_copy2 is designed to be an end\-user tool only\&. It does not replace or enhance your backup and archival solutions and should in no way be considered as such\&. Additionally, if you need version control, implement a version control system\&. .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_shell_snap.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_shell_snap.8 index 3e7f4cba..f9d6e5c0 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_shell_snap.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_shell_snap.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_shell_snap .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_SHELL_SNAP" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_SHELL_SNAP" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ Samba\*(Aqs FSRVP server must be configured in the [global] section: .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_snapper.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_snapper.8 index a4a9e7fa..2a4a5ab6 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_snapper.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_snapper.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_snapper .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_SNAPPER" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_SNAPPER" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Remote snapshot creation and deletion is only permitted by Samba for Active Dire The DiskShadow\&.exe FSRVP client initially authenticates as the Active Directory computer account\&. This account must therefore be granted the same permissions as the user account issuing the snapshot creation and deletion requests\&. .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_streams_depot.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_streams_depot.8 index 4bba707a..b80910d9 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_streams_depot.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_streams_depot.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_streams_depot .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_STREAMS_DEPOT" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_STREAMS_DEPOT" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_streams_xattr.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_streams_xattr.8 index cf963dc1..ec379498 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_streams_xattr.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_streams_xattr.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_streams_xattr .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_STREAMS_XATTR" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_STREAMS_XATTR" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_syncops.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_syncops.8 index 84090390..46e30faa 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_syncops.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_syncops.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_syncops .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_SYNCOPS" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_SYNCOPS" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ Add syncops functionality for [share]: .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_time_audit.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_time_audit.8 index dbc189cc..7fe22524 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_time_audit.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_time_audit.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_time_audit .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_TIME_AUDIT" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_TIME_AUDIT" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ This would log VFS calls that take longer than 3 seconds: .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_unityed_media.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_unityed_media.8 index 265756df..e68ed098 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_unityed_media.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_unityed_media.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_unityed_media .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_UNITYED_MEDIA" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_UNITYED_MEDIA" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Enable unityed_media for Mac and Windows clients: .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_virusfilter.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_virusfilter.8 index b54e5739..416b50b4 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_virusfilter.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_virusfilter.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_virusfilter .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools .\" Source: Samba 4.8 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_VIRUSFILTER" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.8" "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_VIRUSFILTER" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.8" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_widelinks.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_widelinks.8 index fdf5a850..8e7fa553 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_widelinks.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_widelinks.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_widelinks .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_WIDELINKS" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_WIDELINKS" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ This module is stackable\&. No examples listed\&. This module is implicitly loaded by smbd as needed\&. .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_worm.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_worm.8 index 39638652..02d2ef1d 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_worm.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_worm.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_worm .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_WORM" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_WORM" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ Deny the write access to files and folders, which are older than five minutes (3 .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_xattr_tdb.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_xattr_tdb.8 index b15d90b0..cc486ed6 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_xattr_tdb.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_xattr_tdb.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_xattr_tdb .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_XATTR_TDB" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_XATTR_TDB" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/wdctl.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/wdctl.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 4131c558..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/wdctl.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,114 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: wdctl -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "WDCTL" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -wdctl \- show hardware watchdog status -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBwdctl\fP [options] [\fIdevice\fP...] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -Show hardware watchdog status. The default device is \fI/dev/watchdog\fP. If more than one device is specified then the output is separated by one blank line. -.sp -If the device is already used or user has no permissions to read from the device, then \fBwdctl\fP reads data from sysfs. In this case information about supported features (flags) might be missing. -.sp -Note that the number of supported watchdog features is hardware specific. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-flags\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Print only the specified flags. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-F\fP, \fB\-\-noflags\fP -.RS 4 -Do not print information about flags. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-I\fP, \fB\-\-noident\fP -.RS 4 -Do not print watchdog identity information. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-noheadings\fP -.RS 4 -Do not print a header line for flags table. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-output\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Define the output columns to use in table of watchdog flags. If no output arrangement is specified, then a default set is used. Use \fB\-\-help\fP to get list of all supported columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-O\fP, \fB\-\-oneline\fP -.RS 4 -Print all wanted information on one line in key="value" output format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-raw\fP -.RS 4 -Use the raw output format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-settimeout\fP \fIseconds\fP -.RS 4 -Set the watchdog timeout in seconds. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-T\fP, \fB\-\-notimeouts\fP -.RS 4 -Do not print watchdog timeouts. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-x\fP, \fB\-\-flags\-only\fP -.RS 4 -Same as \fB\-I \-T\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "," -.MTO "lennart\(atpoettering.net" "Lennart Poettering" "" -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBwdctl\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/wipefs.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/wipefs.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 8b479f15..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/wipefs.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,166 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: wipefs -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "WIPEFS" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -wipefs \- wipe a signature from a device -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBwipefs\fP [options] \fIdevice\fP... -.sp -\fBwipefs\fP [\fB\-\-backup\fP] \fB\-o\fP \fIoffset device\fP... -.sp -\fBwipefs\fP [\fB\-\-backup\fP] \fB\-a\fP \fIdevice\fP... -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBwipefs\fP can erase filesystem, raid or partition\-table signatures (magic strings) from the specified \fIdevice\fP to make the signatures invisible for libblkid. \fBwipefs\fP does not erase the filesystem itself nor any other data from the device. -.sp -When used without any options, \fBwipefs\fP lists all visible filesystems and the offsets of their basic signatures. The default output is subject to change. So whenever possible, you should avoid using default outputs in your scripts. Always explicitly define expected columns by using \fB\-\-output\fP \fIcolumns\-list\fP in environments where a stable output is required. -.sp -\fBwipefs\fP calls the BLKRRPART ioctl when it has erased a partition\-table signature to inform the kernel about the change. The ioctl is called as the last step and when all specified signatures from all specified devices are already erased. This feature can be used to wipe content on partitions devices as well as partition table on a disk device, for example by \fBwipefs \-a /dev/sdc1 /dev/sdc2 /dev/sdc\fP. -.sp -Note that some filesystems and some partition tables store more magic strings on the device (e.g., FAT, ZFS, GPT). The \fBwipefs\fP command (since v2.31) lists all the offset where a magic strings have been detected. -.sp -When option \fB\-a\fP is used, all magic strings that are visible for \fBlibblkid\fP(3) are erased. In this case the \fBwipefs\fP scans the device again after each modification (erase) until no magic string is found. -.sp -Note that by default \fBwipefs\fP does not erase nested partition tables on non\-whole disk devices. For this the option \fB\-\-force\fP is required. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-all\fP -.RS 4 -Erase all available signatures. The set of erased signatures can be restricted with the \fB\-t\fP option. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-b\fP, \fB\-\-backup\fP -.RS 4 -Create a signature backup to the file \fI$HOME/wipefs\-<devname>\-<offset>.bak\fP. For more details see the \fBEXAMPLE\fP section. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-force\fP -.RS 4 -Force erasure, even if the filesystem is mounted. This is required in order to erase a partition\-table signature on a block device. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-J\fP, \fB\-\-json\fP -.RS 4 -Use JSON output format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-lock\fP[=\fImode\fP] -.RS 4 -Use exclusive BSD lock for device or file it operates. The optional argument \fImode\fP can be \fByes\fP, \fBno\fP (or 1 and 0) or \fBnonblock\fP. If the \fImode\fP argument is omitted, it defaults to \fB"yes"\fP. This option overwrites environment variable \fB$LOCK_BLOCK_DEVICE\fP. The default is not to use any lock at all, but it\(cqs recommended to avoid collisions with udevd or other tools. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-i\fP, \fB\-\-noheadings\fP -.RS 4 -Do not print a header line. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-O\fP, \fB\-\-output\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Specify which output columns to print. Use \fB\-\-help\fP to get a list of all supported columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-no\-act\fP -.RS 4 -Causes everything to be done except for the \fBwrite\fP(2) call. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-offset\fP \fIoffset\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the location (in bytes) of the signature which should be erased from the device. The \fIoffset\fP number may include a "0x" prefix; then the number will be interpreted as a hex value. It is possible to specify multiple \fB\-o\fP options. -.sp -The \fIoffset\fP argument may be followed by the multiplicative suffixes KiB (=1024), MiB (=1024*1024), and so on for GiB, TiB, PiB, EiB, ZiB and YiB (the "iB" is optional, e.g., "K" has the same meaning as "KiB"), or the suffixes KB (=1000), MB (=1000*1000), and so on for GB, TB, PB, EB, ZB and YB. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-parsable\fP -.RS 4 -Print out in parsable instead of printable format. Encode all potentially unsafe characters of a string to the corresponding hex value prefixed by \(aq\(rsx\(aq. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-q\fP, \fB\-\-quiet\fP -.RS 4 -Suppress any messages after a successful signature wipe. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-types\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Limit the set of printed or erased signatures. More than one type may be specified in a comma\-separated list. The list or individual types can be prefixed with \(aqno\(aq to specify the types on which no action should be taken. For more details see \fBmount\fP(8). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -LIBBLKID_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables \fBlibblkid\fP(3) debug output. -.RE -.sp -LOCK_BLOCK_DEVICE=<mode> -.RS 4 -use exclusive BSD lock. The mode is "1" or "0". See \fB\-\-lock\fP for more details. -.RE -.SH "EXAMPLES" -.sp -\fBwipefs /dev/sda\fP* -.RS 4 -Prints information about sda and all partitions on sda. -.RE -.sp -\fBwipefs \-\-all \-\-backup /dev/sdb\fP -.RS 4 -Erases all signatures from the device \fI/dev/sdb\fP and creates a signature backup file \fI~/wipefs\-sdb\-<offset>.bak\fP for each signature. -.RE -.sp -\fBdd if=~/wipefs\-sdb\-0x00000438.bak of=/dev/sdb seek=$0x00000438 bs=1 conv=notrunc\fP -.RS 4 -Restores an ext2 signature from the backup file \fI~/wipefs\-sdb\-0x00000438.bak\fP. -.RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBblkid\fP(8), -\fBfindfs\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBwipefs\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/xfs_io.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/xfs_io.8 index ef7087b3..56abe000 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/xfs_io.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/xfs_io.8 @@ -713,7 +713,7 @@ Swaps extent forks between files. The current open file is the target. The donor file is specified by path. Note that file data is not copied (file content moves with the fork(s)). .TP -.BI "set_encpolicy [ \-c " mode " ] [ \-n " mode " ] [ \-f " flags " ] [ \-v " version " ] [ " keyspec " ]" +.BI "set_encpolicy [ \-c " mode " ] [ \-n " mode " ] [ \-f " flags " ] [ \-s " log2_dusize " ] [ \-v " version " ] [ " keyspec " ]" On filesystems that support encryption, assign an encryption policy to the current file. .I keyspec @@ -736,6 +736,9 @@ filenames encryption mode (e.g. AES-256-CTS) .BI \-f " flags" policy flags (numeric) .TP +.BI \-s " log2_dusize" +log2 of data unit size. Not supported by v1 policies. +.TP .BI \-v " version" policy version. Defaults to 1 or 2 depending on the length of .IR keyspec ; @@ -1340,6 +1343,9 @@ parameter specifies which type of metadata to repair. For AG metadata, one AG number must be specified. For file metadata, the repair is applied to the open file unless the inode number and generation number are specified. +The +.B -R +option can be specified to force rebuilding of a metadata structure. .TP .BI "label" " " "[ -c | -s " label " ] " On filesystems that support online label manipulation, get, set, or clear the diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/xfs_mdrestore.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/xfs_mdrestore.8 index 72f3b297..f60e7b56 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/xfs_mdrestore.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/xfs_mdrestore.8 @@ -5,12 +5,19 @@ xfs_mdrestore \- restores an XFS metadump image to a filesystem image .B xfs_mdrestore [ .B \-gi +] [ +.B \-l +.I logdev ] .I source .I target .br .B xfs_mdrestore .B \-i +[ +.B \-l +.I logdev +] .I source .br .B xfs_mdrestore \-V @@ -49,6 +56,11 @@ Shows metadump information on stdout. If no is specified, exits after displaying information. Older metadumps man not include any descriptive information. .TP +.BI \-l " logdev" +Metadump in v2 format can contain metadata dumped from an external log. +In such a scenario, the user has to provide a device to which the log device +contents from the metadump file are copied. +.TP .B \-V Prints the version number and exits. .SH DIAGNOSTICS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/xfs_metadump.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/xfs_metadump.8 index c0e79d77..496b5926 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/xfs_metadump.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/xfs_metadump.8 @@ -11,6 +11,9 @@ xfs_metadump \- copy XFS filesystem metadata to a file ] [ .B \-l .I logdev +] [ +.B \-v +.I version ] .I source .I target @@ -74,6 +77,12 @@ metadata such as filenames is not considered sensitive. If obfuscation is required on a metadump with a dirty log, please inform the recipient of the metadump image about this situation. .PP +The contents of an external log device can be dumped only when using the v2 +format. +Metadump in v2 format can be generated by passing the "-v 2" option. +Metadump in v2 format is generated by default if the filesystem has an +external log and the metadump version to use is not explicitly mentioned. +.PP .B xfs_metadump should not be used for any purposes other than for debugging and reporting filesystem problems. The most common usage scenario for this tool is when @@ -123,8 +132,11 @@ is stdout. .TP .BI \-l " logdev" For filesystems which use an external log, this specifies the device where the -external log resides. The external log is not copied, only internal logs are -copied. +external log resides. +If the v2 metadump format is selected, the contents of the external log will be +copied to the metadump. +The v2 metadump format will be selected automatically if this option is +specified. .TP .B \-m Set the maximum size of an allowed metadata extent. Extremely large metadata @@ -134,6 +146,11 @@ this value. The default size is 2097151 blocks. .B \-o Disables obfuscation of file names and extended attributes. .TP +.B \-v +The format of the metadump file to be produced. +Valid values are 1 and 2. +The default metadump format is 1. +.TP .B \-w Prints warnings of inconsistent metadata encountered to stderr. Bad metadata is still copied. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/zramctl.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/zramctl.8 deleted file mode 100644 index e0f1f57d..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/zramctl.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,158 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: zramctl -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "ZRAMCTL" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -zramctl \- set up and control zram devices -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -Get info: -.RS 4 -\fBzramctl\fP [options] -.RE -.sp -Reset zram: -.RS 4 -\fBzramctl\fP \fB\-r\fP \fIzramdev\fP... -.RE -.sp -Print name of first unused zram device: -.RS 4 -\fBzramctl\fP \fB\-f\fP -.RE -.sp -Set up a zram device: -.RS 4 -\fBzramctl\fP [\fB\-f\fP | \fIzramdev\fP] [\fB\-s\fP \fIsize\fP] [\fB\-t\fP \fInumber\fP] [\fB\-a\fP \fIalgorithm\fP] -.RE -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBzramctl\fP is used to quickly set up zram device parameters, to reset zram devices, and to query the status of used zram devices. -.sp -If no option is given, all non\-zero size zram devices are shown. -.sp -Note that \fIzramdev\fP node specified on command line has to already exist. The command \fBzramctl\fP creates a new \fI/dev/zram<N>\fP nodes only when \fB\-\-find\fP option specified. It\(cqs possible (and common) that after system boot \fI/dev/zram<N>\fP nodes are not created yet. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-algorithm lzo\fP|\fBlz4\fP|\fBlz4hc\fP|\fBdeflate\fP|\fB842\fP -.RS 4 -Set the compression algorithm to be used for compressing data in the zram device. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-find\fP -.RS 4 -Find the first unused zram device. If a \fB\-\-size\fP argument is present, then initialize the device. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-noheadings\fP -.RS 4 -Do not print a header line in status output. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-output\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Define the status output columns to be used. If no output arrangement is specified, then a default set is used. Use \fB\-\-help\fP to get a list of all supported columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-output\-all\fP -.RS 4 -Output all available columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-raw\fP -.RS 4 -Use the raw format for status output. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-reset\fP -.RS 4 -Reset the options of the specified zram device(s). Zram device settings can be changed only after a reset. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-size\fP \fIsize\fP -.RS 4 -Create a zram device of the specified \fIsize\fP. Zram devices are aligned to memory pages; when the requested \fIsize\fP is not a multiple of the page size, it will be rounded up to the next multiple. When not otherwise specified, the unit of the \fIsize\fP parameter is bytes. -.sp -The \fIsize\fP argument may be followed by the multiplicative suffixes KiB (=1024), MiB (=1024*1024), and so on for GiB, TiB, PiB, EiB, ZiB and YiB (the "iB" is optional, e.g., "K" has the same meaning as "KiB") or the suffixes KB (=1000), MB (=1000*1000), and so on for GB, TB, PB, EB, ZB and YB. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-streams\fP \fInumber\fP -.RS 4 -Set the maximum number of compression streams that can be used for the device. The default is use all CPUs and one stream for kernels older than 4.6. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -\fBzramctl\fP returns 0 on success, nonzero on failure. -.SH "FILES" -.sp -\fI/dev/zram[0..N]\fP -.RS 4 -zram block devices -.RE -.SH "EXAMPLE" -.sp -The following commands set up a zram device with a size of one gigabyte and use it as swap device. -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C - # zramctl \-\-find \-\-size 1024M - /dev/zram0 - # mkswap /dev/zram0 - # swapon /dev/zram0 - ... - # swapoff /dev/zram0 - # zramctl \-\-reset /dev/zram0 -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "nefelim4ag\(atgmail.com" "Timofey Titovets" "," -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -.URL "http://git.kernel.org/cgit/linux/kernel/git/torvalds/linux.git/tree/Documentation/admin\-guide/blockdev/zram.rst" "Linux kernel documentation" "" -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBzramctl\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file |